Mn00224e v11 IDU ALP2 ALCP2 ALCP2e PDF

ALS
ALplus2, ALCplus2, ALCplus2e

Access Link Series
User manual
MN.00224.E - 011
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.

Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
HP, HP OpenView NNM and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
Contents
Section 1.
USER GUIDE
1
2
11
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ..............................................................................11

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .........................................12
2.1
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ....................................................................12

2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................12
2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................12
2.2
SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................13
2.3
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &

ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) .................................................................................15
2.4
INTERNAL BATTERY ..........................................................................................15
PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................16

3.1
PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................16
3.2
AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................16
3.3
STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................16
Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION
ABBREVIATION LIST................................................................................................19
4.1
19
ABBREVIATION LIST .........................................................................................19
SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................21

5.1
RECOMMENDATION ..........................................................................................21
5.2
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ....................................................................................21
5.3
ALPLUS2 MODULAR IDU ....................................................................................21

5.3.1 LIM .......................................................................................................22
5.3.2 RIM.......................................................................................................22
5.3.3 Controller ..............................................................................................22
5.4
ALCPLUS2 COMPACT IDU...................................................................................22
5.5
ALCPLUS2E COMPACT IDU .................................................................................23
5.6
N+0................................................................................................................25
5.7
ODU ...............................................................................................................25
MN.00224.E - 011
5.8
MANAGEMENT ..................................................................................................26
5.8.1 Hardware platform ..................................................................................26
5.8.2 Management ports ..................................................................................26
5.8.2.1
MNGT/1 and MNGT/2 ................................................................27
5.8.2.2
RS232 ....................................................................................27
5.8.2.3
LCT USB .................................................................................27
5.8.3 Protocols ...............................................................................................27

6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................31

6.1
IDU CHARACTERISTICS .....................................................................................31

6.1.1 Traffic interfaces .....................................................................................31
6.1.1.1
2 Mbit/s (E1 G.703) ..................................................................31
6.1.1.2
STM1 electrical ........................................................................32
6.1.1.3
STM1 optical............................................................................32
6.1.1.4
Ethernet interface ....................................................................33
6.1.2 Alarm interface.......................................................................................36

6.1.3 Service channels.....................................................................................36
6.1.3.1
E1 (Connector name is 2 Mbit/s wayside) ....................................37
6.1.3.2
64 kbit/s codirectional...............................................................37
6.1.3.3
64 kbit/s contradirectional .........................................................37
6.1.3.4
9600 bit/s synch/asynch ...........................................................38
6.1.3.5
9600 or 2x4800 bit/s synch/asynch ............................................38
6.1.4 Modulation and channel bandwidth ............................................................38

6.1.5 1+1 switching criteria..............................................................................39
6.1.6 Cable Interface .......................................................................................40
6.1.7 Consumption and max current absorption ..................................................40
6.1.8 Fuses ....................................................................................................41
6.2
6.3
ODU CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................................41

EQUIPMENT GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS............................................................42
6.3.1 Dimensions ............................................................................................42
6.3.2 Weight ..................................................................................................42
6.3.3 Environmental condition ..........................................................................42
ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................44

7.1
CONFIGURATION ..............................................................................................44
7.1.1 ALplus2 block diagrams ...........................................................................44
7.1.2 Controller ..............................................................................................44
7.1.2.1
Service signals.........................................................................45
7.1.2.2
Firmware ................................................................................45
7.1.2.3
Web Lct ..................................................................................45
7.1.2.4
Controller LEDs ........................................................................45
7.1.2.5
SD memory card management ...................................................46
7.1.3 LIM .......................................................................................................46

7.1.3.1
Switch for Ethernet ports...........................................................47
7.1.3.2
STM-1 synchronisation ..............................................................48
7.1.3.3
LIM LEDs.................................................................................49
7.1.4 RIM.......................................................................................................49
7.1.4.1
Modulator................................................................................50
7.1.4.2
Demodulator ...........................................................................50
7.1.4.3
Adaptive code modulation .........................................................50
7.1.4.4
Power supply ...........................................................................52
7.1.4.5
Telemetry IDU/ODU..................................................................52
MN.00224.E - 011
7.2
LOOPS ............................................................................................................52
7.2.1 Tributary ...............................................................................................52
7.2.2 IDU loop ................................................................................................53
ALCplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................57

8.1
CONFIGURATION ..............................................................................................57
8.1.1 Switch for ethernet ports .........................................................................57
8.2
SYNCHRONIZATION ..........................................................................................58
8.3
SD MEMORY CARD MANAGEMENT .......................................................................58
8.4
ALC BLOCK DIAGRAMS......................................................................................59
8.5
ALCPLUS2 NODE ..............................................................................................59

8.5.1 Expansion from 2 to 3 nodals ...................................................................60
8.5.2 Reduction from 3 to 2 nodes.....................................................................60
8.6
LAG - LINK AGGREGATION ................................................................................61

8.6.1 Line Trunking .........................................................................................61
8.6.2 Radio Link Trunking ................................................................................62
8.7
LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP ...................................................64
8.8
ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................65

8.8.1 Service Layer OAM ..................................................................................65
8.8.2 OAM Example with ALCplus2 ....................................................................67
8.8.3 Reset Switch ..........................................................................................68
8.8.4 MAC Table clear ......................................................................................68
8.9
ALCPLUS2 FIRMWARE UPDATES .........................................................................68

8.9.1 Firmware release 1.3.3 ............................................................................68
8.9.3 Firmware Release 1.4.0 ...........................................................................69
8.9.4 Firmware Release 1.4.1 ...........................................................................69
ALCplus2E IDU DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................76

9.1
CONFIGURATION ..............................................................................................76
9.2
ALCPLUS2E BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................................76

9.2.1 ADAPTIVE CODE MODULATION - ACM PROFILES .........................................77
9.3
FREQUENCY REUSE...........................................................................................77
9.4
XPIC 1+1 CONFIGURATION................................................................................78

9.4.1 XPIC 1+1 management ...........................................................................79
9.4.2 SSP protocol management .......................................................................79
9.5
2X(1+0) EST WEST CONFIGURATION..................................................................79

9.5.1 Selective E1 Protection ............................................................................79
9.6
N+0 CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................80

9.6.1 Frequency arrangement definitions............................................................80
9.6.2 GENERALS .............................................................................................80
9.6.3 2X(1+0) system with XPIC .......................................................................81
9.6.4 2X(1+0) system with hybrid coupler, two channels......................................82
9.6.5 2X(1+0) with circulator, low losses............................................................83
9.6.6 4X(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler two CCDP channels ...........................84
9.6.7 4X(1+0) with XPIC, circulator, two CCDP channels ......................................85
9.6.8 8X(1+0) with XPIC and multicirculator .......................................................86
9.6.9 MULTICIRCULATOR FREQUENCY RESTRICTIONS .........................................87
MN.00224.E - 011
9.7
SYNCHRONIZATION ..........................................................................................89
9.8
ALCPLUS2E NODE.............................................................................................90
9.8.1 Expansion from 2 to 3 IDUs......................................................................91
9.8.2 Reduction from 3 to 2 IDUs ......................................................................92
9.9
SWITCH FOR ETHERNET PORTS ..........................................................................92
9.10
LAG - LINK AGGREGATION ................................................................................97

9.10.1 Line Trunking .........................................................................................97
9.10.2 Radio Link Trunking ................................................................................98
9.11
LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP ...................................................99
9.12
ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................99

9.12.1 Service Layer OAM ..................................................................................99
9.12.2 OAM Example with ALCplus2e................................................................. 101
9.13
ALCPLUS2E FIRMWARE UPDATES...................................................................... 101

9.13.1 Firmware release 1.3.1 .......................................................................... 101
9.14
FIRMWARE UPDATES FOR ALCPLUS2E 1+1 XPIC ................................................. 108

10 ODU DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................113

10.1
ODU VERSIONS.............................................................................................. 113

10.1.1 AS ODU ............................................................................................... 113
10.1.2 ASN ODU ............................................................................................. 113
10.2
DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................ 113
10.3
CABLE INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 114
10.4
POWER SUPPLY .............................................................................................. 114
10.5
TX SECTION................................................................................................... 114
10.5.1 ATPC operation..................................................................................... 115
10.6
RX SECTION .................................................................................................. 115
10.7
1+1 TX SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 115
Section 3.
INSTALLATION
121
11 INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC

COMPATIBILITY.....................................................................................................121
11.1
GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION........................ 121
11.2
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 122
11.3
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION............................................................................ 122

11.3.1 IDU..................................................................................................... 122
11.3.2 IDU installation..................................................................................... 122
MN.00224.E - 011
11.4
ELECTRICAL WIRING....................................................................................... 122
11.5
OPTICAL CONNECTORS ................................................................................... 124
11.6
CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS .............................................................. 124
11.7
IDU-ODU INTERCONNECTION CABLE................................................................. 124

11.7.1 Electrical characteristics......................................................................... 124
11.7.2 Connectors .......................................................................................... 124
11.7.3 Max length........................................................................................... 124
11.7.4 Suggested cable ................................................................................... 124
11.8
GROUNDING CONNECTION .............................................................................. 125
11.9
IDU-ODU CABLE GROUNDING KIT INSTALLATION ............................................... 125

11.9.1 Grounding kit K09283F (for RG8 or 1/8 cable) ......................................... 125
11.9.2 Grounding kit ICD00072F (for any cable with shield) ................................. 126
11.10 SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION ............................................................... 127

12 ALplus2 CONNECTORS ...........................................................................................128
12.1
IDU FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................... 128

12.1.1 LIM connectors ..................................................................................... 128
12.1.2 RIM connectors..................................................................................... 128
12.1.3 Controller connectors ............................................................................ 128
12.2
IDU BODY CONNECTORS ................................................................................. 129
13 ALCplus2 CONNECTORS .........................................................................................135

13.1
IDU FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................... 135
13.2
ALCPLUS2 1+0/1+1 (GAI0157/GAI0152) ........................................................... 135
13.3
ALCPLUS2 16E1 1+0/1+1 (GAI0155/GAI0156) ................................................... 136
13.4
ALCPLUS2 NODAL 1+0/1+1 (GAI0163/GAI0162) ................................................ 136
13.5
ALCPLUS2 32E1 1+0/1+1 (GAI0169/GAI0168) ................................................... 137
14 ALCplus2E CONNECTORS........................................................................................138
14.1
IDU FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................... 138
14.2
ALCPLUS2E 1+0 (GAI0178), 2+0/1+1 (GAI0175), 2+0/XPIC (GAI0172) ................ 138
14.3
ALCPLUS2E 18E1 2XSTM1 NODAL (GAI0176), 2+0/1+1 (GAI0173),

2+0/XPIC (GAI0170) ...................................................................................... 139
14.4
ALCPLUS2E 34E1 2XSTM1 1+0 (GAI0177), 2+0/1+1 (GAI0174),

2+0/XPIC (GAI 0171) ..................................................................................... 140
15 INSTALLATION NOTE ON FREQUENCY REUSE SYSTEMS (XPIC)..............................141

15.1
FREQUENCY REUSE......................................................................................... 141
15.2
CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................... 141

15.2.1 Antennas ............................................................................................. 141
15.2.2 RF channel ........................................................................................... 141
15.2.3 ATPC................................................................................................... 141
15.2.4 IDU-ODU cable ..................................................................................... 141
16 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA ...........142
16.1
INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 142
16.2
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 143
16.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 143
16.4
GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 145
17 INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...........159

17.1
MN.00224.E - 011
17.2
17.3
17.4
GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 162
18 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .........173
18.1
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 173
18.2
18.3
18.4

18.4.1 Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna ................ 174
18.4.2 Installation of ODU................................................................................ 175
18.4.3 ODU installation.................................................................................... 176
18.5
ANTENNA AIMING........................................................................................... 176
18.6
COMPATIBILITY .............................................................................................. 176
18.7
GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 177
19 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA

(KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) .............................................................................192
19.1
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 192
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 194

19.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 194
19.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 194
19.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 194
19.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 194
19.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 194
19.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 195
19.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 195
19.6

19.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 195
19.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 196
20 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH RFS INTEGRATED ANTENNA...206
20.1
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 206
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5

20.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 207
20.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 208
20.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 208
20.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 208
20.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 208
20.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 208
20.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 209
20.6

20.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 209
20.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 209
MN.00224.E - 011
21 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF ODU ASN WITH STANDARD LOCK ...................220
21.1
ODU COUPLING KIT ........................................................................................ 220

21.1.1 ODU AS ............................................................................................... 220
21.1.2 ODU ASN ............................................................................................. 220
21.2
21.1.2.1
Fast lock coupling kit .............................................................. 220
21.1.2.2
Standard coupling kit .............................................................. 220
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA ........... 221
21.2.1 ODU AS and ODU ASN (Fast Lock) .......................................................... 221
21.2.2 ODU ASN (Standard Lock)...................................................................... 221
21.3
21.2.2.1
1+0 ODU .............................................................................. 221
21.2.2.2
1+1 ODU .............................................................................. 222
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA............. 223
21.3.1 ODU AS and ODU ASN (Fast Lock) .......................................................... 223
21.3.2 ODU ASN (Standard Lock)...................................................................... 223
21.3.2.1
1+0 ODU .............................................................................. 224
21.3.2.2
1+1 ODU .............................................................................. 224
21.3.2.3
Waveguide towards the antenna............................................... 226
22 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF 8+0 ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA ...........234
22.1
GENERALS ..................................................................................................... 234
22.2
N+0.............................................................................................................. 234
Section 4.
LINE-UP
245
23 LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP .................................................................................245

23.1
LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP............................................................................ 245

23.1.1 Equipment configuration ........................................................................ 245
23.1.2 Antenna alignment and received field measurement .................................. 246
23.1.3 Network element configuration ............................................................... 246
23.1.4 Few considerations about addresses ........................................................ 247
23.1.5 Radio checks ........................................................................................ 247
23.1.6 ACM setting ......................................................................................... 247
24 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF

MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS ..............................................................................250
24.1
24.2
SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 250

CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD USING SCT ...................................... 250
24.2.1 Configuration upload ............................................................................. 250
24.2.2 Configuration download ......................................................................... 250
24.3
CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD USING WEBLCT ................................ 251

24.3.1 Configuration upload ............................................................................. 251
24.3.2 Configuration download ......................................................................... 251
24.3.3 SD Memory card ................................................................................... 251
25 LINE-UP FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC ..........................................................................252

25.1
LAN SETUP .................................................................................................... 252
25.2
LOCAL LAN-1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN-1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN PER
PORT ............................................................................................................ 252
MN.00224.E - 011
25.3
FROM 3 PORT TO 3 PORT CONNECTIONS ........................................................... 257
25.4
FROM 3 PORT TO 3 PORT CONNECTIONS ........................................................... 262
26 HOW TO CHANGE ADDRESS ON REMOTE EQUIPMENT WITHOUT LOSING THE

CONNECTION .........................................................................................................267
26.1
TOOLS .......................................................................................................... 267
26.2
PROCEDURE................................................................................................... 267
27 LINE-UP OF THE NODE WITH NODAL IDU ..............................................................279

27.1
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 279
27.2
NODE CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................... 279
27.3
EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 280
27.4
TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION ........................................................................... 281
27.5
CONFIGURATION OF THE CROSS-CONNECTION MATRIX ...................................... 282

27.5.1 Tributary - Radio Cross-connection.......................................................... 282
27.5.2 Tributary - Tributary Cross-connection ..................................................... 282
27.6
ETHERNET SWITCH......................................................................................... 283
28 EXAMPLE OF ALCplus2 NODE EXPANSION..............................................................298

28.1
INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................. 298
28.2
PRECONDITIONS ............................................................................................ 298
28.3
NBUS AND INTRA-NODE GE CABLING RULES ..................................................... 300
28.4
NODE EXPANSION FROM N TO N+K ELEMENTS................................................... 301

28.4.1 Step 1 ................................................................................................. 301
28.4.2 Step 2 ................................................................................................. 301
28.4.3 Step 3 (traffic affecting)......................................................................... 301
28.4.4 Step 4 ................................................................................................. 302
28.5
NODE REDUCTION FROM N+K TO N ELEMENTS .................................................. 303

28.5.2 Step 2 ................................................................................................. 303
28.5.4 Step 4 ................................................................................................. 303
29 LINE-UP RADIO TRUNKING (Link Aggregation Radio Side) ....................................304

29.1
RADIO TRUNKING MODE (INTERNAL PORT - PORT A) .......................................... 304

29.1.1 To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the trunking mode....... 304
29.1.2 To enable/disable the Trunking mode for the internal port .......................... 305
30 LINE-UP LINE TRUNKING (Link Aggregation Line Side) .........................................306

30.1
LINE TRUNKING MODE .................................................................................... 306
31 LINE-UP OAM .........................................................................................................308

31.1
FM DOMAIN ................................................................................................... 308
31.2
OAM-FM MA/MEP ............................................................................................ 309
31.3
VLAN IDENTIFIER - VLAN NAME - ETHERNET SWITCH PORT ................................. 310
32 LINE-UP ELP ..........................................................................................................311

32.1
ETHERNET LINE PROTECTION (ELP) .................................................................. 311
33 LINE-UP ACL ..........................................................................................................312

33.1
ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) .......................................................................... 312
MN.00224.E - 011
34 LINE-UP SYNCHRONISATION .................................................................................314

34.1
LINE-UP SYNCHRONISATION........................................................................... 314
34.2
SYNCHRONISATION FROM LAN3 AT 1GBIT/S...................................................... 315
34.3
SYNCHRONIZATION FROM E1........................................................................... 315
Section 5.
COMMISSIONING REPORT
321
35 COMMISSIONING REPORT FOR ALCPLUS2E IDU ....................................................321

35.1
GENERAL INFORMATIONS................................................................................ 321

35.1.1 Documentation ..................................................................................... 321
35.1.2 Site Identifiers...................................................................................... 322
35.1.3 Configurations ...................................................................................... 322
35.1.4 Network addresses (DCN) ...................................................................... 323
35.2
SITE INSPECTION ........................................................................................... 325
35.3
COMMISSIONING CHECKS ............................................................................... 326
35.4
COMMISSIONING MEASURES ........................................................................... 329

35.4.1 Tributary connections stability ................................................................ 329
35.4.2 Link Fade Margin .................................................................................. 330
35.4.3 Loops and maintenance ......................................................................... 331
35.5
ETHERNET TEST ............................................................................................. 333

35.5.1 Link Residual BER test ........................................................................... 335
35.6
35.7
FINAL CHECK LIST.......................................................................................... 336

FINAL REPORT ............................................................................................... 337
35.7.1 Link activation date ............................................................................... 337
35.7.2 Certificate ............................................................................................ 338
Section 6.
MAINTENANCE
339
36 ALARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING .........................................................................339

36.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 339
36.2
FAULTY CONDITION ........................................................................................ 339

36.2.1 Front panel LEDs .................................................................................. 339
36.2.2 SCT/WEBLCT alarm window.................................................................... 340
36.2.3 Direction of an alarm............................................................................. 340
36.2.4 Alarms group ....................................................................................... 340
36.3
ALARMS ........................................................................................................ 342

36.3.1 Common alarms ................................................................................... 342
36.3.2 ETH LAN alarms.................................................................................... 343
36.3.3 LIM alarms........................................................................................... 343
36.3.4 Node alarms......................................................................................... 344
36.3.5 Performance Monitoring alarms............................................................... 344
36.3.6 Plug-in alarms ...................................................................................... 344
36.3.7 Radio alarms ........................................................................................ 345
MN.00224.E - 011
36.3.8 RIM alarms .......................................................................................... 345

36.3.9 RT alarms ............................................................................................ 346
36.3.10SETS alarms ....................................................................................... 346
36.3.11SNTP alarms ....................................................................................... 346
36.3.12STM1 alarms ....................................................................................... 347
Section 7.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
349
37 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................349

37.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 349
37.2
WEBLCT ........................................................................................................ 349
Section 8.
COMPOSITION
353
38 COMPOSITION OF ALplus2 IDU..............................................................................353

38.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 353
38.2
IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 353
38.3
COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT ................................................................ 354
39 COMPOSITION OF ALCplus2 IDU............................................................................356

39.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 356
39.2
IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 356
40 COMPOSITION OF ALCplus2e IDU ..........................................................................358

40.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 358
40.2
IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 358
41 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT.........................................................................361

41.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 361
Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES
381
42 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................381

43 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................389
44 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................391
10
MN.00224.E - 011
Section 1.
USER GUIDE
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A. declares that the products:

-
digital radio relay system
AS6 and ASN6
AS7 and ASN7
AS8 and ASN8
AS10 and ASN10
AS11 and ASN11
AS13 and ASN13
AS15 and ASN15
AS18 and ASN18
AS23 and ASN23
AS25 and ASN25
AS28 and ASN28
AS32 and ASN32
AS38 and ASN38
complies with the essential requirements of article 3 of the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) and therefore is
marked CE.
The following standards have been applied:
-
EN 60950-1: 2006 Safety of information technology equipment.
EN 301 4894 V.1.3.1 (20028): Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 4. Specific conditions for fixed radio links and ancillary equipment and services
ETSI EN 301 751 V.1.1. (200212): Fixed Radio Systems; Pointto point equipment and antennas;
generic harmonized standard for pointtopoint digital fixed radio systems and antennas covering the
essential requirements under article 3.2 of the 1999/5/EC Directive.
MN.00224.E - 011
11
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY

RULES
2.1
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the line
switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor.
2.1.1
Artificial respiration
It is important to start mouth respiration at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedure
for mouth to mouth respiration method is described in the Tab.1.
2.1.2
Treatment of burns
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
Warning
12
Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections
Apply dry gauze on the burns
Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
MN.00224.E - 011
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration

Step
Description
Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body.
If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his
stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients
mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (dentures, chewing gum, etc.).
Figure
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under
the patients head and one under his neck.
Lift the patients head and let it recline backwards as far
as possible.
Shift the hand from the patients neck to his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers
closed together.
While performing these operations take a good supply of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open
With your thumb between the patients chin and mouth keep
his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities
2.2
While performing these operations observe if the patients

chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that
case open the patients mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth
and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patients chest
heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first
even when the patients nose is not obstructed, provided his
nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the
hand you were holding his head with. The patients head must
be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of

twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the
patient has regained consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
SAFETY RULES
When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain components electrostatic charge sensitive.
MN.00224.E - 011
13
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication
In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band
(Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).
Fig.2 - Elasticized band
Fig.3 - Coiled cord
This device has Class I LASER modules: it is not required to have a laser warning label or other laser statement (IEC 60825-1).
14
MN.00224.E - 011
2.3
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &

ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). This
marking of Fig.4 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other
household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either
the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier
and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other
commercial wastes for disposal.
Fig.4 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419
2.4
INTERNAL BATTERY
Inside the equipment, in IDU unit, there is a lithium battery.

CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries
according to law.
MN.00224.E - 011
15
PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
3.1
PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL
The purpose of this manual consists in providing the user with information which permit to operate and
maintain the ALS radio family.
Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/LCT management program windows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help-on line.
3.2
AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE
The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment:
a basic understanding of microwave transmission
installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system
a good knowledge of IP/OSI networks and routing policy.
3.3
STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section.
Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.
Section 1 User Guide

It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the
manual.
Section 2 Description and specifications

It traces the broad line of equipment operation and lists the main technical characteristics of the whole
equipment and units it consists of.
List of abbreviation meaning is also supplied.
16
MN.00224.E - 011
Section 3 Installation
The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections.
The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.
Section 4 LineUp
Lineup procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation.
The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.
Section 5 Commissioning report

This section describes how to prepare a commissioning report regarding the installation of a link
Section 6 Maintenance
In this section a description of alarms is given in order to help operators to perform equipment maintenance and troubleshooting.
Section 7 Programming and supervision

The ALS radio family is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are already available, some other will be available in the future.
This section lists the tools implemented and indicates if descriptions are already available.
Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.
Section 8 Composition
Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.
Section 9 Lists and assistance

This section contains the lists of figures and tables and the assistance service information.
MN.00224.E - 011
17
18
MN.00224.E - 011
Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND
SPECIFICATION
ABBREVIATION LIST
4.1
ABBREVIATION LIST
ACM
Adaptive Code Modulation
AF
Assured Forwarding
AL
Access Link
ALS
Access LInk Series
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
ATPC
Automatic Transmit Power Control
BB
Baseband
BBER
Background Block Error Radio
BER
Bit Error Rate
CCM
Continuity Check Message
DSCP
Differentiated Service Code Point
DSP
Digital Signal Processing
E1
2 Mbit/s
EMC/EMI
Electromagnetic Compatibility/Electromagnetic Interference
EOC
Embedded Overhead Channel
ERC
European Radiocommunication Committee
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
FEC
Forward Error Corrector
FEM
Fast Ethernet Module
HDLC
High Level Data Link Control
MN.00224.E - 011
19
20
IDU
Indoor Unit
IF
Intermediate Frequency
IpToS
Type of Service IP
LAN
Local Area Network
LAPS
Link Access Procedure SDH
LCT
Local Craft Terminal
LIM
Line Interface Module
LLF
Link Loss Forwarding
LOF
Loss Of Frame
LOS
Loss Of Signal
MA
Maintenance Association
MAC
Media Access Control
MD
Maintenance Domain
MDI
Medium Dependent Interface
MDIX
Medium Dependent Interface Crossover
MEP
Maintenance End Point
MIB
Management Information Base
MIP
Maintenance Intermediate Point
MMIC
Monolitic Microwave Integrated Circuit
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failure
NE
Network Element
OAM
Operation Administration and Maintenance
ODU
Outdoor Unit
OSI
Open System Interconnection
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PPI
Plesiochronous Physical Interface
PPP
Point to Point Protocol
PTOS
Priority Type Of Service
RIM
Radio Interface Module
SCT
Subnetwork Craft Terminal
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TOS
Type Of Service
VID
Virtual LAN Identifier
VLAN
Virtual LAN
WFQ
Wait Fair Queue
Wayside Traffic
Additional 2 Mbit/s Traffic
MN.00224.E - 011
SYSTEM PRESENTATION
5.1
RECOMMENDATION
The equipment complies with the following international standards:
EN 301 4894 for EMC
EN 302 217 for all frequency bands
ITUR recommendations for all frequency bands
EN 300 1322 characteristics for power supply
EN 300 019 environmental characteristics (Operation class 3.2 for IDU and class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)
EN 60950 for safety.
5.2
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
The ALS plus2 family is the new packet radio link from SIAE. These packet radio links are split mount
equipment made up of:
an indoor unit called IDU for 19 rack mounting that interfaces tributaries and supervises the full
equipment
an outdoor unit called ODU for pole or wall mounting with RF circuitry and antenna flange.
IDU units are available in the following versions
ALplus2: modular. Main circuits are divided in modules, replaceable in case of failure
ALCplus2: compact. All the circuitry is housed in a single board
ALCplus2e: compact. All the circuitry is housed in a single board.
ODU units are available in the following versions:
AS (max capacity of 341 Mbit/s)
ASN (max capacity of 341 Mbit/s)
5.3
ALPLUS2 MODULAR IDU
The unit is available in the following configurations:
ALplus2 1+0 for E1 and Ethernet traffic (see Fig.5)
ALplus2 1+1 for E1 and Ethernet traffic (see Fig.6)
The following modules make up the modular IDU.
MN.00224.E - 011
21
5.3.1
LIM
The LIM interfaces the in (out) E1 streams and Ethernet traffic and, through a multiplexing (demultiplexing) and bit insertion (bit extraction) process, supplies (receives) the aggregate signal to the modulator
(from the demodulator). In addition the LIM performs the digital processing of the QAM modulator.
Moreover the module duplicates the main signals at the Tx side and performs the changeover at the Rx
side in the 1+1 version.
5.3.2
RIM
The RIM contains:
the IF section of the programmable modemodulator (8 available profiles: 4QAM, 4QAM strong,
8PSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM)
the power supply unit that processes the battery voltage to supply power to the IDU circuits and
send the battery voltage towards the ODU
the cable interface for the bidirectional communication between IDU and ODU via interconnecting
cable
thanks to ACM (Adaptive Code Modulation) actual modulation can be automatically changed according to available S/N.
5.3.3
Controller
The Controller performs the following operations:
interfaces the service signals as 1x9600 bit/s or 2x4800 bit/s, 64 kbit/s, 2 Mbit/s (details are given
in the system technical specification)
contains the equipment software that permits to control and to manage all the equipment functionality through a main controller and associated peripherals distributed within IDU and ODU
interfaces the SCT/LCT management system through Ethernet, RS232 and USB ports
receive external alarms and route them to relay contact along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.
5.4
ALCPLUS2 COMPACT IDU
The unit is available in the following configurations:
22
ALCplus2 1+0
see Fig.7
ALCplus2 1+1
see Fig.8
ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1
see Fig.9
see Fig.10
see Fig.11
see Fig.12
ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal
see Fig.13
ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal
see Fig.14
MN.00224.E - 011
The compact IDU are made by a single board.

The line interfaces contain the tributary connectors and, by means of processes of multiplexing/demultiplexing and of bit insertion/extraction, provide/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/demodulator. The line interfaces realize the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1
configuration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and execute the switch on the reception
side.
The interfaces to the ODU contain the interface of the cable for the bidirectional communication between
ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. The power supply units of the IDU
process the battery voltage and supply power to the circuits of IDU and ODU. The controller section of the
radio contains the interfaces of the service channels, stores the firmware of the IDU, interfaces the SIAE
management systems through dedicated supervision ports and forwards external and internal alarms to
the relay contacts.
5.5
ALCPLUS2E COMPACT IDU
The unit is available in the following configurations listed in Tab.2.

Tab.2 - ALCplus2e IDU configurations
1+0
EPP
2+0/1+1
XPIC
EPP
2+0 or
1+0 XPIC
EPP
MN.00224.E - 011
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1
See Fig.15
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1
See Fig.16
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL
See Fig.17
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 EPP
See Fig.15
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP
See Fig.16
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL EPP
See Fig.17
ALCplus2 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1
See Fig.18
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1
See Fig.19
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL
See Fig.20
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 EPP
See Fig.18
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP
See Fig.19

EPP
See Fig.20
ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 2xE1
See Fig.18
ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1
See Fig.19

NODAL
See Fig.20
ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 2xE1 EPP
See Fig.18

EPP
See Fig.19

NODAL EPP
See Fig.20
23
XPIC
ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 2xE1
See Fig.18
ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1
See Fig.19
ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL
See Fig.20
ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 2xE1 EPP
See Fig.18
ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP
See Fig.19
ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL

EPP
See Fig.20
1+1 XPIC
EPP
The Compact IDU and EPP (Enhanced Packet Processing) are made of a single board and expansions like
34E1 2xSTM1 or 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL.
The line interface contain the tributary connectors and, by means of processes of multiplexing/demultiplexing and of bit insertion/extraction, provide/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/demodulator. The line interfaces realize the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1
configuration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and execute the switch on the reception
side.
The interfaces to the ODU contain the interface of the cable for the bidirectional communication between
ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. The power supply units of the IDU
process the battery voltage and supply power to the circuits of IDU and ODU.
The controller section of the radio contains the interfaces to internal circuits, stores the firmware of the
IDU, interfaces the SIAE management systems through dedicated supervision ports and forwards external
and internal alarms to the relay contacts.
The IDU ALCplus2e XPIC permits different transmission methods:
ACAP Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization
ACCP Adjacent Channel Co Polarization
CCDP Co Channel Dual Polarization
CCDP, with XPIC technology, in ALCplus2e IDU doubles the capacity of radio link, a clear advantage to the
network operator at the dense frequency bands.
CCDP operation provides two parallel radio streams in the same RF channel with orthogonal polarizations,
thus doubling the radio hop total capacity. Separate and independent signals are transmitted, over the
same RF channel using a single antenna with a double polarization feeder. However, despite of the orthogonality of the two signals, some interference between the signals almost inevitably occurs, due to imperfect
antenna isolation and channel degradation.
Each polarization demodulator path receives a large signal from the orthogonal polarization, causing crosspolarization interference. XPIC systems cancels this interference in order to demodulate both vertical and
horizontal signal successfully. In XPIC technology, each polarization path receives both the polar and the
cross-polar interference.
In ALCplus2e XPIC, the XPIC circuitry and ACM engine gives to the network operator high capacity and
high availability.
Tab.3 - ALCplus2e IDU configurations (updated hardware)
1+0
EPP
24
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1
See Fig.15
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1
See Fig.16
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL
See Fig.17
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 EPP
See Fig.15
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP
See Fig.16
See Fig.17
MN.00224.E - 011
See Fig.18
See Fig.19
See Fig.20
See Fig.18
See Fig.19
See Fig.20
EPP
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 PWE3
See Fig.15
Hw
PWE3 2+0/1+1
ready
EPP
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 EPP PWE3
See Fig.15
Hw
PWE3
ready
2+0
EPP
ALFCplus2e 2+0 XPIC 4GE 18E1 EPP PWE3
See Fig.15
Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3
transmission
ready
1+0
EPP
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP PWE3
See Fig.16
Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3 2+0/1+1
transmission
ready
EPP
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP

PWE3
See Fig.16
Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3
transmission
ready
EPP
ALCplus2E 2+0 XPIC 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP

PWE3
See Fig.16
1+1
EPP
Hw
PWE3
ready
1+0
2+0
Some IDUs with updated hardware are PWE3 ready.

Some IDUs with updated hardware permit STM-1 bulk transmission and are PWE3 ready.
5.6
N+0
The ALCplus2e radio links can be combined together up to 4 ODU connected to a multicirculator to feed
vertical antenna port and other 4 ODU connected to another multicirculator to feed horizontal antenna port.
The result is a radio link with eight streams 8+0 with XPIC. This is at 7GHz and channel bandwidth of
28MHz. See Fig.21.
5.7
ODU
The ODU unit contains IF and RF circuits that permits to transmit and receive the signals relevant the user
traffic, the management and the telemetry and it is connected with its IDU unit through a single cable.
The ODU employs four different passband filters with the following bandwidth: 7, 14, 28 and 56 MHz. A 40
MHz bandwidth is available in some RF band only (ASN6U, ASN11). The ODU unit is available in two different versions: AS (only from hardware version 003) and ASN (optimized).
MN.00224.E - 011
25
The configuration of the ODU can be 1+0 or 1+1 with integrated or separated antenna. In 1+1 configuration the antenna coupling is performed through a balanced or an unbalanced hybrid system (branching
unit).
For ALCplus2e 8+0 configuration is also available. This configuration is performed through a multicirculator
for each polarization.
5.8
MANAGEMENT
ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e equipment can be locally and remotely controlled via an internal dedicated
application software called WebLCT through Internet Browser and LAN connection. A serial/USB connection
can be used through the WebLCT console, an application that can be downloaded from SIAE site (http://
www.siaemic.com)
It provides a friendly graphic interface complying with current standard use of keyboard, mouse, windows
and so on.
Other software available for management of a network of ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e is SCT (Windows)
and NMS5UX/NMS5LX (Unix/Linux).
5.8.1
Hardware platform
The hardware platform used by SCT/LCT is based on personal computer having at least following characteristics:
microprocessor Pentium 4 or similar
1GB RAM
windows compatible graphic monitor
HD with 200 Mbyte of free space
Windows 95/Windows NT/Windows 98/Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows 7
LAN or USB connection (or RS232 ALplus2 only)
5.8.2
Management ports
The SCT/LCT program is connected to the equipment via the following communication ports:
26
MNGT/1 or MNGT/2 (Ethernet LAN 10BaseT)
RS232 (asynchronous serial line) for ALplus2 only
LCT (USB)
Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into the radio frame
Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into a 16 kbit/s or 4x16 kbit/s time slot of one of
the 2 Mbit/s tributary signals
In band management through traffic LAN (separated VLAN required)
MN.00224.E - 011
5.8.2.1
MNGT/1 and MNGT/2
LAN cable type
802.3 10BaseT
Connector
RJ45
Connection to LAN
direct with a CAT5 Twisted Pair
Protocol
TCP/IP or IPoverOSI
5.8.2.2
RS232
Electrical interface
V.28
Connector
SUB-D 9pin
Asynchronous baud rate
9600,19200,38400,57600
Protocol
PPP
5.8.2.3
LCT USB
USB 1.1 version
Baud rate
1.5 Mbit/s
Protocol
PPP
5.8.3
Protocols
SNMP along with IP or OSI protocol stacks are used to reach and manage the equipment operation.
SPEED
ON
48V
PoE
FAIL
10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX
STM1
Trib: 1-8
USER IN/OUT
RS232
MNGT/1
Trib: 9-16
LINKNURG URG
ACT
LINK
ACT
LCT
ACT
LINK
SW TEST
MNGT/2
WAY
SIDE
CH1
CH2
2Mb/s
Fig.5 - ALplus2 1+0
ON
48V
PoE
FAIL
10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX
STM1
LINK NURG URG

ACT
LINK
ACT
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
MNGT/1
Trib: 9-16
Trib: 1-8
ACT
LINK
SW
MNGT/2
TEST
48V
WAY
SIDE
CH1
CH2
2Mb/s
SPEED
Fig.6 - ALplus2 1+1
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
LAN 4
M 3.15A
250VAC
MNGT
LAN 3
LAN 4
1
GREEN
48VDC
NURG URG
LCT
LINK
LAN 1
LAN 3
Trib. A
SD
USER IN/OUT
SW
TEST ON
YELLOW
Fig.7 - ALCplus2 1+0 and ALCplus2e 2E1 1+0
MN.00224.E - 011
27
SPEED
YELLOW
LAN 2
Trib. B
LAN 4
M 3.15A
250VAC
LAN 3
LAN 4
LCT
1
LINK
GREEN
LAN 1
48VDC
NURG URG
Trib. A
LAN 3
SW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
SD
MNGT
Fig.8 - ALCplus2 1+1 and ALCplus2e E1 2+0/1+1 and ALCplus2e 2E1 XPIC 2+0
SPEED
YELLOW
LAN 2
Trib. B
LAN 4
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 9-16
M 3.15A
250VAC
MNGT
LAN 3
LAN 4
48VDC
NURG URG
LCT
GREEN
LINK
LAN 1
Trib. A
LAN 3
SW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
SD
Fig.9 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1
SPEED
YELLOW
LAN 2
Trib. B
LAN 4
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 9-16
M 3.15A
250VAC
LAN 3
LAN 4
LCT
1
LINK
GREEN
LAN 1
48VDC
NURG URG
Trib. A
LAN 3
SW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
SD
MNGT
LAN 2
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 4
Trib. 9-16
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 17-24
Trib. 25-32
2
MNGT
ON
LAN 3
LAN 4
NURG
LCT
1
GREEN
LINK
LAN 1
Trib. A
LAN 3
SW
TEST
USER IN/OUT
SD
M 3.15A
250V
URG
48V
SPEED
YELLOW
ON
Fig.11 - ALCplus2 1+0 32E1
LAN 2
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 4
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 9-16
ON
LAN 3
2
NURG
LCT
LINK
LAN 1
Trib. 25-32
LAN 4
1
GREEN
Trib. 17-24
2
MNGT
Trib. A
LAN 3
SW
TEST
USER IN/OUT
SD
M 3.15A
250V
URG
48V
1
SPEED
YELLOW
ON
YELLOW
SPEED
LAN 2
LAN 4
Trib. B
STM1
Trib. 9-16
ON
LAN 3
M 3.15A
250VAC
NBUS
LAN 4
48VDC
NURG URG
LCT
LINK
LAN 1
Trib. A
LAN 3
SW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
SD
1
GREEN
Trib. 1-8
1
2
MNGT
Fig.13 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal
SPEED
LAN 2
LAN 4
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 3
LAN 4
LAN 3
48VDC
NURG URG
LCT
LAN 1
M 3.15A
250VAC
NBUS
1
LINK
Trib. 9-16
ON
MNGT
GREEN
Trib. 1-8
1
Trib. A
1
SD
USER IN/OUT
1
SW
TEST ON
YELLOW
28
MN.00224.E - 011
SPEED
YELLOW
LAN 2
Trib. B
LAN 4
M 3.15A
250V
2
LAN 3
LAN 4
LCT
R
GREEN
LINK
LAN 1
48V
NURG URG
SW
Trib. A
LAN 3
MNGT
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
Fig.15 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 4
Trib. 17-24
Trib. 9-16
Trib. 25-32
M 3.15A
250V
ON
MNGT
LAN 3
LAN 4
NURG URG
LCT
R
GREEN
Trib. 1-8
LINK
LAN 1
SW
Trib. A
LAN 3
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
48V
YELLOW
Fig.16 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1
SPEED
LAN 2
LAN 4
Trib. B
STM1
ON
LAN 3
GREEN
Trib. 9-16
M 3.15A
250V
NBUS
LAN 4
Trib. 1-8
1
2
MNGT
NURG
LCT
LINK
LAN 1
LAN 3
48V
URG
SW
Trib. A
TEST
USER IN/OUT
YELLOW
ON
Fig.17 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
LAN 4
MNGT
LAN 3
LAN 4
LINK
LAN 1
1
SW
Trib. A
LAN 3
48V
NURG URG
LCT
R
GREEN
M 3.15A
250V
YELLOW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
Fig.18 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 4
Trib. 9-16
Trib. 17-24
Trib. 25-32
2
ON
LAN 3
LAN 4
1
LINK
LAN 1
48V
1
SW
Trib. A
LAN 3
M 3.15A
250V
NURG URG
LCT
R
GREEN
Trib. 1-8
2
MNGT
YELLOW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
Fig.19 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1
SPEED
LAN 2
LAN 4
Trib. B
STM1
1
ON
MNGT
LAN 3
LINK
LAN 1
LAN 3
Trib. A
M 3.15A
250V
1
48V
NURG URG
LCT
Trib. 9-16
2
NBUS
LAN 4
1
GREEN
Trib. 1-8
1
SW
USER IN/OUT
TEST ON
YELLOW
Fig.20 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL
MN.00224.E - 011
29
Fig.21 - N+0
30
MN.00224.E - 011
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1
IDU CHARACTERISTICS
In the following paragraphs are listed only the main characteristics of an IDU typology.
Further information are included in the chapter relevant that IDU.
6.1.1
Traffic interfaces
ALplus2, max transmitted capacity 341 Mbit/s:

-
16E1 G.703 75/120 Ohm (2SCSI connector, 8E1 each)
2 STM1 (SFP connector)
3 Ethernet ports: 2 RJ45, electrical (LAN1 and LAN2) and 2 SFP, optical (LAN1 and LAN3). LAN1
can be set electrical or optical.
ALCplus2, max transmitted capacity 341 Mbit/s. Traffic options can vary depending on IDU version:
-
18E1 G.703 75/120 Ohm (2SCSI connectors, 8E1 each + 2RJ45)
4 Ethernet ports: 4 RJ45, electrical (LAN1, LAN2, LAN3 and LAN4) and 2 SFP, optical (LAN3 and
LAN4). LAN3 and LAN4 can be set electrical or optical
2 BUS for traffic connections with other ALCplus2 IDUs (same version).
ALCplus2e, max transmitted capacity 682 Mbit/s, 341 Mbit/s, per carrier (IDU 2+0/XPIC). Traffic
options can vary depending on IDU version:
-
4 Ethernet ports: 4 RJ45, electrical (LAN1, LAN2, LAN3 and LAN4) and 2 SFP, optical (LAN3 and
LAN4). LAN3 and LAN4 can be set electrical or optical
2 BUS for traffic connections with other ALCplus2e IDUs (same version, TBA).
6.1.1.1
2 Mbit/s (E1 G.703)
Input side
Bit rate
2048 kbit/s 50 ppm
Line code
HDB3
Rated impedance
75 Ohm or 120 Ohm
MN.00224.E - 011
31
Rated level
2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm
Return loss
12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz

Max attenuation of the input cable
6 dB according to
Accepted jitter
see Tab. 2, CCITT Rec. G.823
Transfer function
see Fig. 1, CCITT Rec. G.742
Connector type
SCSI 50 pin
f trend
Output side
Bit rate
2048 kbit/s 50 ppm
Rated impedance
75 Ohm or 120 Ohm
Rated level
Output jitter
according to G.742/G.823
Pulse shape
Connector type
SCSI 50 pin
6.1.1.2
STM1 electrical
Input side
Bit rate
155520 kbit/s 4.6 ppm
Line code
CMI
Rated impedance
75 Ohm
Rated level
1 Vpp 0.1V
Return loss
15 dB from 8 MHz to 240 MHz
12.7 dB at 78 MHz ( f trend)
Output side
Bit rate
155520 kbit/s 4.6 ppm
Rated level
1 Vpp 0.1 V
Pulse shape
see Fig. 24 and Fig. 25 of ITU-T Rec. G.703
6.1.1.3
STM1 optical
The STM1 interface can be specialised for different applications, by simply equipping the STM1 interface
with the appropriate pluggable optical or electrical transceiver. Optical interface has LC connectors. Electric
interface has 1.0/2.3 connectors. The characteristics of all the possible optical interfaces are summarised
in Tab.4.
32
MN.00224.E - 011
Tab.4 - Optical interface characteristics

Interface
Ref.
Launched
power (dBm)
Minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
Operating
wavelength
Transceiver
Fibre
Distance
(km)
L-1.2
G.957
0 ... -5
-34
1480 - 1580
Laser
Single-Mode
Up to 80
L-1.1
G.957
0 ... -5
-34
1263 - 1360
Laser
Single-Mode
Up to 40
S-1.1
G.957
-8 ... -15
-28
1263 - 1360
Laser
Single-Mode
Up to 15
I-1
ANSI
-14 ... -20
-28
1263 - 1360
Laser
MultiMode
Up to 2
The LIM is provided with Automatic Laser Shutdown as prescribed by ITU-T G.664 Recommendation.
6.1.1.4
-
Ethernet interface
Ethernet connectors
IEEE 802.3 10/100/1000 BaseT RJ45

see also Tab.5
Tab.5 - Ethernet optical interfaces characteristics, SPF and LLC connectors

Operating wavelength nm
Fibre
Distance
IEEE
802.3
1310
Multimode
Up to 550m
Gigabit Ethernet
1000BaseSx
IEEE
802.3z
850
Multimode
Up to 2km
Gigabit Ethernet
1000BaseLx
IEEE
802.3z
9.5dB
1310
Single Mode
Up to 10km
Gigabit Ethernet
1000BaseLx
IEEE
802.3z
19dB
1310
Single Mode
Up to 40km
Gigabit Ethernet
1000BaseLx
IEEE
802.3z
25dB
1550
Single Mode
Up to 80km
Interface
Ref.
Fast Ethernet
100BaseFx
Link budget
Ethernet switch functionality
MAC Switching
MAC Learning
MAC Ageing
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control
IEEE 802.1p QoS
IP-V4 ToS/DSCP
IP-V6 TC/DSCP
IEEE 802.1D STP
IEEE 802.1W RSTP
Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
see Tab.6
MN.00224.E - 011
33
Tab.6 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e

(Ethernet only)
Bandwidth
7 MHz
14 MHz
28 MHz
56 MHz
34
Modulation
Frame Size (byte)

64
128
256
512
1024
1518
4QAMs
10.1
9.4
9.1
8.9
8.7
8.7
4QAM
12.5
11.6
11.2
11.0
10.8
10.7
8PSK
17.1
16.0
15.4
15.1
14.8
14.7
16QAM
24.3
22.7
21.8
21.4
21.0
20.9
32QAM
29.3
27.4
26.4
25.8
25.4
25.2
64QAM
36.3
33.8
32.6
31.9
31.3
31.2
128QAM
40.7
38.0
36.6
35.8
35.2
35.0
256QAM
47.9
44.7
43.0
42.2
41.4
41.2
4QAMs
20.3
18.9
18.2
17.8
17.5
17.4
4QAM
24.2
22.6
21.7
21.3
20.9
20.8
8PSK
33.7
31.4
30.3
29.6
29.1
29.0
16QAM
47.6
44.5
42.8
41.9
41.2
41.0
32QAM
59.7
55.8
53.7
52.6
51.6
51.4
64QAM
71.5
66.7
64.2
62.9
61.8
61.5
128QAM
83.1
77.6
74.7
73.2
71.9
71.5
256QAM
97.7
91.2
87.7
85.9
84.4
84.0
4QAMs
41.5
38.6
37.2
36.4
35.8
35.6
4QAM
48.7
45.3
43.6
42.7
41.9
41.7
8PSK
72.8
67.7
65.2
63.9
62.7
62.4
16QAM
96.7
90.0
86.6
84.8
83.4
82.9
32QAM
121.1
112.7
108.5
106.2
104.4
103.8
64QAM
145.0
135.0
129.9
127.3
125.0
124.4
128QAM
168.7
157.0
151.1
148.0
145.4
144.7
256QAM
198.1
184.4
177.5
173.9
170.8
169.9
4QAMs
82.3
76.6
73.6
72.1
71.2
70.9
4QAM
95.7
89.1
85.6
83.8
82.8
82.5
8PSK
142.9
133.0
127.7
125.0
123.5
123.1
16QAM
192.9
179.0
171.9
168.3
166.1
165.5
32QAM
235.3
218.4
209.8
205.3
202.7
201.9
64QAM
280.0
259.8
249.6
244.3
241.1
240.2
128QAM
333.3
309.6
297.4
291.0
288.2
287.2
256QAM
396.2
369.9
355.3
347.7
343.2
341.9
Estimated Ethernet throughput (Mbit/s)
see Tab.7
MN.00224.E - 011
Tab.7 - Estimated Ethernet throughput

Bandwidth
40 MHz
Frame size (byte)
Modul.
64
1518
4QAMs
57
49
4QAM
69
60
8PSK
100
86
16QAM
136
117
32QAM
164
141
64QAM
202
174
128QAM
238
205
256QAM
277
239
Guaranteed ethernet latency (ms)
see Tab.8
Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e (Ethernet only)

Bandwidth
7 MHz
14 MHz
MN.00224.E - 011
Modulation
Frame Size (byte)

64
128
256
512
1024
1518
10000
4QAMs
1.042
1.111
1.248
1.522
2.09
2.609
11.684
4QAM
0.844
0.900
1.011
1.233
1.693
2.113
9.465
8PSK
0.627
0.668
0.750
0.913
1.229
1.541
6.974
16QAM
0.477
0.505
0.560
0.67
0.895
1.115
4.755
32QAM
0.401
0.426
0.475
0.573
0.756
0.938
4.214
64QAM
0.477
0.496
0.533
0.607
0.768
0.908
3.35
128QAM
0.52
0.537
0.572
0.642
0.774
0.914
3.222
256QAM
0.507
0.521
0.550
0.608
0.726
0.845
2.761
4QAMs
0.954
0.987
1.053
1.186
1.462
1.715
6.104
4QAM
0.8
0.828
0.884
0.995
1.226
1.439
5.12
8PSK
0.575
0.596
0.637
0.719
0.882
1.044
3.557
16QAM
0.418
0.432
0.461
0.518
0.639
0.757
2.634
32QAM
0.345
0.357
0.381
0.428
0.518
0.618
2.176
64QAM
0.439
0.449
0.469
0.51
0.59
0.669
2.02
128QAM
0.458
0.467
0.486
0.523
0.594
0.663
1.907
256QAM
0.444
0.452
0.468
0.499
0.557
0.623
1.656
35
28 MHz
56 MHz
6.1.2
4QAMs
0.475
0.492
0.526
0.595
0.735
0.867
3.136
4QAM
0.406
0.421
0.450
0.508
0.628
0.74
2.677
8PSK
0.274
0.284
0.305
0.347
0.426
0.508
1.881
16QAM
0.214
0.222
0.238
0.271
0.334
0.395
1.483
32QAM
0.176
0.183
0.197
0.224
0.276
0.326
1.235
64QAM
0.227
0.232
0.243
0.265
0.311
0.356
1.067
128QAM
0.237
0.242
0.252
0.272
0.312
0.351
1.003
256QAM
0.231
0.236
0.246
0.265
0.298
0.333
0.982
4QAMs
0.241
0.250
0.268
0.304
0.377
0.447
1.651
4QAM
0.207
0.215
0.230
0.261
0.324
0.384
1.418
8PSK
0.14
0.146
0.158
0.181
0.226
0.27
1.052
16QAM
0.112
0.117
0.126
0.144
0.179
0.214
0.83
32QAM
0.094
0.098
0.106
0.122
0.154
0.185
0.697
64QAM
0.125
0.129
0.137
0.152
0.178
0.205
0.71
128QAM
0.126
0.129
0.135
0.147
0.172
0.196
0.601
256QAM
0.121
0.124
0.129
0.14
0.162
0.183
0.549
Alarm interface
User output
-
Relay contacts
normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC)
Open contacts R min.
100 MOhm at 500 Vdc
Closed contacts R max.
0.5 Ohm
Switching voltage V max.
60 Vdc 30 Vac
Switching current I max.
1A
User input
-
Equivalent circuit recognized as a closed contact
200 Ohm resist. (max) referred to -6V (min)
Equivalent circuit recognized as an open contact
60 kOhm (min) referred to +4 v (max)
6.1.3
Service channels
ALplus2 only.
Two service channels are available:
36
V11 64 kbit/s co/contradirectional
E1: configurable as Extra E1-1 or Extra E1-2 (connector name is 2 Mbit/s wayside but is in band.
MN.00224.E - 011
6.1.3.1
E1 (Connector name is 2 Mbit/s wayside)
This E1 is in band. Only the name is wayside.
Input side
Bit rate
2048 kbit/s 50 ppm
Line code
HDB3
Rated impedance
75 Ohm or 120 Ohm
Rated level
Return loss

6 dB according to
Accepted jitter
see Tab. 2, CCITT Rec. G.823
Transfer function
Connector type
RJ45 (in/out in the same conn.)
f trend
Output side
Bit rate
2048 kbit/s 50 ppm
Rated impedance
75 Ohm or 120 Ohm
Rated level
Output jitter
according to G.742/G.823
Pulse shape
Connector type
RJ45 (in/out in the same conn.)
6.1.3.2
64 kbit/s codirectional
Tolerance
100 ppm
Coding
synch + data + octet as per G.703
Impedance
120 Ohm
3 dB at 128 kHz
User side
CCITT Rec. G.703
Input/output level
1 Vp/120 Ohm 0.1 V
Return loss
see par. 1.2.1.3 in CCITT Rec. G.703
Connector
RJ45
6.1.3.3
64 kbit/s contradirectional
Tolerance
100 ppm
Coding
clock and data on separate wires
Impedance
120 Ohm
3 dB at 128 kHz
MN.00224.E - 011
37
Equipment side
contradirectional
Input/output level
1 Vp/120 Ohm 0.1 V
CCITT Rec. V.11
Connector
RJ45
6.1.3.4
Data interface
RS232
CCITT Rec. V.28
Input speed
9600 baud
Control wires
DTR, DSR, DCD
Connector
RJ45
6.1.3.5
9600 or 2x4800 bit/s synch/asynch
CCITT Rec. V.28
Input speed
4800 or 9600 bit/s
CCITT Rec. V.28
Connector
RJ45
6.1.4
38
9600 bit/s synch/asynch
Modulation and channel bandwidth
Carrier IF mo-demodulating frequency
Tx side 330 MHz

Rx side 140 MHz
Type of modulation
4QAM strong, 4QAM, 8PSK, 16QAM, 32QAM,

64QAM, 128QAM, 256 QAM
Bandwidth
7MHz, 14MHz, 28MHz, 56MHz
Bandwidth ALCplus2e
7MHz, 14MHz, 28MHz, 40MHz, 56MHz
Modulation approach
ACM
Modulating signal
depending on selected capacities
Equalization
24 taps
Coding gain
2.5 dB at 10-6 1 dB at 10-3
Correction
LDPC
MN.00224.E - 011
6.1.5
1+1 switching criteria
Rx switch
Rx switch is hitless and the system has built in capabilities of minimizing errors during the detection time.
Branch 1 is preferential and the system switches to branch 2 only when branch 1 is error affected. The
switching facility provides automatic synchronization of the two incoming streams up to:
dynamic difference
100 bytes
static delays
100 bytes.
Tab.9 shows Rx Alarm Priority.

Tab.9 - Rx Alarm Priority
Levels
Definition
Priority 1
Manual forcing (selectable by software)
Priority 2
CRC pulse from demodulator
Tx switch (1+1 hot stand-by)

Tx switch is not hitless. Maximum outage due to the Tx switching (sum of the maximum automatic changeover + Rx IDU re-synchronisation time), with ACM (Adaptive Code and Modulation) activated, is shown in
Tab.10.
Tab.10 - Maximum outage due to the Tx switching
Bandwidth
Maximum outage due to the Tx switching (msec)
7 MHz
< 1500
14 MHz
< 1200
28 MHz
< 900
56 MHz
< 400
Tab.11 shows Tx Alarm Priority.

Tab.11 - Tx Alarm Priority
Priority
Levels
Definition
Highest
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Priority 1
RIM PSU Alarm
Priority 2
Manual forcing (selectable by software)
Priority 3
Cable Short Alarm
Priority 3
Cable Open Alarm
Priority 3
Modulator Failure
Priority 3
ODU Unit Failure Alarm
Priority 3
VCO Failure Alarm
Priority 3
IF Unit Alarm
Priority 3
Tx Power Low Alarm
Priority 4
Request from Remote Terminal (both Receivers Alarmed)
Lowest
Priority 5
Revertive Tx (preferential branch selectable by software)
MN.00224.E - 011
39
6.1.6
Cable Interface
Interconnection with ODU unit
single coaxial cable for both Tx and Rx
Cable length
300 m
Cable rated impedance
50 Ohm
Signal running along the cable

-
Tx nominal frequency
330 MHz
Rx nominal frequency
140 MHz
Telemetry IDU -> ODU
17.5 MHz
Telemetry ODU <- IDU
5.5 MHz
In band management through traffic LAN or VLAN
Transceiver management signals 388 kbit/s bidirectional
Remote power supply direct from battery voltage.
6.1.7
Consumption and max current absorption
In this paragraphs are listed the following three characteristics: the max current (IMAX) at the power connector of the IDU alone, the max current (IMAX) at the power connector of the IDU with the complete equipment (IDU 1+1 and relevant 2 ODUs) and the consumption of the IDU alone. The consumption of the
complete equipment is described inside the ODU attachment (one for each frequency) with high precision,
at this point we have considered the ODU with the higher consumption (about 25W) among all the available.
Indicated voltage is related to max current and max consumption.
N.B. The consumption of the complete equipment is described inside the ODU attachment (one for each
frequency).
ALplus2 IMAX and consumption
see Tab.12
ALCplus2 IMAX and consumption
see Tab.12
ALCplus2e IMAX and consumption
see Tab.12
The power supply connectors of ALplus2 are independent. The power supply connectors of ALCplus2 and
ALCplus2e are in parallel (through diode).
Tab.12 - IMAX and consumption
40
IDU
IMAX (IDU only)
IMAX (IDU+ODUs)
Consumption
(IDU only)
ALplus2 1+0
1A (@40.8 Vdc)
1.7A (@40.8 Vdc)
40W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALplus2 1+1
1.2A (@40.8 Vdc)
1.7A (@40.8 Vdc)
48W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2 1+0
0.81A (@40.8 Vdc)
1.42A (@40.8 Vdc)
33W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2 1+1
0.92A (@40.8 Vdc)
2.15A (@40.8 Vdc)
38W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2 1+0
exp 16E1
0.88A (@40.8 Vdc)
1.5A (@40.8 Vdc)
36W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2 1+0
exp nodal
0.91A (@40.8 Vdc)
1.52A (@40.8 Vdc)
37W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2 1+1
exp 16E1
1A (@40.8 Vdc)
2.23A (@40.8 Vdc)
41W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2 1+1
exp nodal
1.1A (@40.8 Vdc)
2.33A (@40.8 Vdc)
45W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2e 1+0 2E1
1.22A (@40.8 Vdc)
1.8A (@40.8 Vdc)
50W (@57.6 Vdc)
MN.00224.E - 011
IDU
IMAX (IDU only)
IMAX (IDU+ODUs)
Consumption
(IDU only)
ALCplus2e 1+0 34E1

2xSTM-1
1.42A (@40.8 Vdc)
2A (@40.8 Vdc)
58W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2e 1+0 18E1

2xSTM-1 nodal
1.42A (@40.8 Vdc)
2A (@40.8 Vdc)
58W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1
2E1
1.35A (@40.8 Vdc)
2.55A (@40.8 Vdc)
55W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1
34E1 2xSTM-1
1.54A (@40.8 Vdc)
2.75A (@40.8 Vdc)
63W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1
18E1 2xSTM-1
1.54A (@40.8 Vdc)
2.75A (@40.8 Vdc)
63W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2e 2+0 2E1

XPIC
1.45A (@40.8 Vdc)
2.1A (@40.8 Vdc)
59W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2E 2+0 34E1

2xSTM-1
1.64A (@40.8 Vdc)
2.85A (@40.8 Vdc)
67W (@57.6 Vdc)
ALCplus2e 2+0 18E1

2xSTM-1 nodal
1.64A (@40.8 Vdc)
2.85A (@40.8 Vdc)
67W (@57.6 Vdc)
6.1.8
Fuses
Power supply circuits are protected against overcurrent with fuses on supply line:
6.2
ALplus2
there is an internal soldering fuse on the RIM PCB behind front panel
Nominal current
3A
Nominal voltage
125 Vac/dc
Type
timed
Dimensions
6.10 mm x x2.59 mm
ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
accessible on the front panel
Nominal current
3.15A
Nominal voltage
250 Vac/dc
Type
medium timed
Dimensions
5 mm x x20 mm
ODU CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency range
see attachment relevant to ODU frequency
RF channelling
Go-return frequency
Frequency stability
Spurious transmission
Output power
BER Rx threshold
Max RF level in Rx for BER 10-3
Additional Tx and Rx losses for 1+1 version
MN.00224.E - 011
41
Antenna configuration
Consumption
6.3
EQUIPMENT GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
6.3.1
Dimensions
The dimensions of the unit are the following:
IDU ALplus2 (1+0/1+1)
IDU ALCplus2/ALCplus2e (1+0/1+1, all versions)480mm x 45mm x 213mm (wxhxd)
ODU 1+0 ASN ODU version
254mm x 254mm x 114mm (wxhxd)
ODU 1+0 AS ODU version
ODU 1+1 ASN ODU version
ODU 1+1 AS ODU version
6.3.2
Weight
The weight of the units is the following:
IDU ALplus2 (1+0/1+1)
IDU ALCplus2/ALCplus2e (1+0/1+1, all versions)2.5 kg
ODU AS (1+0)
5.5 kg
ODU AS (1+1, with branching unit)
15.5 kg
ODU ASN (1+0)
4.5 kg
ODU (AS) (1+1 with branching unit)
13.5 kg
6.3.3
42
3.5 kg
Environmental condition
IDU operating temperature
-5 C to +45 C
ODU operating temperature
-33 C to +55 C
IDU survival temperature
-10 C to +55 C
ODU survival temperature
-40 C to +60 C
ODU operating humidity
95% at 35 C
ODU operating condition
according to IP65
ODU dissipation thermal resistance
0.5 C/W
ODU solar heat gain
< 5 C
Wind speed (ODU with integrated antenna)
< 200 km/h
ODU max height
4000m
MN.00224.E - 011
Storage condition
MN.00224.E - 011
according to T.1.2 ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 (weather

protected, not temperature controlled storage
locations)
43
ALPLUS2 IDU DESCRIPTION
7.1
CONFIGURATION
The IDU of the ALplus2 is available in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration.

The IDU is made up by the following modules:
Controller
LIM
RIM (one module in 1+0 configuration, two modules in 1+1 configuration).
7.1.1
ALplus2 block diagrams
In Fig.24 you can find the block diagram of ALplus2 with 16E1, version 1+0 and 1+1 configuration. In
Fig.25 you can find the block diagram of Alplus2 with 16E1, 2x(1+0) configuration.
7.1.2
Controller
The module performs the following operations:
44
communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IPoverOSI

as communication protocol stacks. The interface ports for the equipment management are the following:
-
2 LAN Ethernet 10BaseT (MNGT/1 and MNGT/2, both RJ45)
USB port
RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/NMS connection (using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up
to 57600)
RS232 asynchronous used for connecting further NEs (using PPP protocol and baud rate speed
up to 57600)
EOC embedded within the packet radio frame for connection to the remote NEs
EOC into a 16kbit/s or 64kbit/s of an E1 timeslot.
WEB LCT interface can be used with EOC capacity equal or bigger than 64 kbit/s
max 2 WEB LCT users can access the same controller
log-in: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then controlling the user ID and relevant password
database (MIB): equipment configuration is stored in a non-volatile memory
equipment configuration: the equipment is configured through stored configuration parameters or

user commands
MN.00224.E - 011
alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered logger and alarm
sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT - NMS5UX. Management of the alarm LEDs on the
LIM front panel.
user in and alarm out management: it receives external alarms and route them to relay contacts
along with the internal alarms generated by the equipment
performance monitoring: PM management as per Recc. G.828
download: firmware, Web Lct and configuration file can be downloaded. Download activity is based
on FTP protocol.
Warning: Lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.
7.1.2.1
Service signals
The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel:
9600 baud/V.28 or 2x4800 baud/V.28 or 9600 baud V.28/RS232 synch/asynch channels
64 kbit/s/V.11 codirectional or contradirectional
E1 wayside G.703.
Service signals connected to the controller modules are sent to the LIM module for MUX/DEMUX processing.
7.1.2.2
Firmware
Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality and it is distributed on
two hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
Firmware can be updated through the Web Lct and it is stored in two different memory banks: one containing the running firmware and the other the stand-by firmware. This permits to download a new firmware release to the stand by bank without cutting the traffic. Bank switch enables the new release to be
used.
7.1.2.3
Web Lct
The Web Lct allows the configuration and the management of the local equipment. When the remote one
is configured properly, the whole radio link can be managed.
Web Lct runs on Internet Explorer and Firefox with Flash player plug-in. WLC is a utility to connect to
ALplus2 with USB cable.
WLC and Flash player plug-in for IE and Firefox can be downloaded from the site www.siaemic.com after
registration.
7.1.2.4
Controller LEDs
On Controller front panel are present four LEDs to summarize the terminal status:
URG - red, ON with critical or major alarms active
NURG - red, ON with minor or warning alarms active
SW - red, ON with firmware mismatch alarm
TEST - yellow, ON with at least a manual operation active.
Always on Controller front panel are present two Ethernet ports for management, MNGT1 and MNGT2,
whose LEDs are:
MN.00224.E - 011
45
during the boot with Ethernet cable inserted:

-
green LED = ON
yellow LED = blinking
during the boot without Ethernet cable inserted:

-
green LED = OFF
yellow LED = OFF
in standard working condition:

-
green LED = ON -> LINK UP
green LED = OFF -> LINK DOWN
yellow LED = ON -> LINK 100BaseT
yellow LED = OFF -> LINK 10BaseT.
7.1.2.5
SD memory card management
On the Controller board is present a slot, not accessible from the external, for the insertion of a memory
card. The memory card allows the upload/download of the equipment configuration and the equipment
firmware
-
Memory card format
SD, SDHC
Memory card capacity
up to 4 GB.
7.1.3
LIM
The LIM performs the following operations:
multiplexing and demultiplexing (MUX/DEMUX process) of traffic (tributaries and Ethernet frames)
aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit and viceversa. The aggregate frame contains:
-
the main signal from the MUX(s)
the framed service signal from the service MUX
the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment
the frame alignment word (FAW)
the bits dedicated to the FEC
switch functionality for Ethernet ports
processing of the signals during the mo-demodulation
STM1 signal processing and RSOH management
duplication of the digital processed signals to supply two RIMs in 1+1 configuration.
From the two RIMs the LIM receives I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following processing:
46
clock recovery
frequency and phase carrier locking
baseband equalisation and filtering
bit polarity decision
differential decoding
parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.
MN.00224.E - 011
The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error corrector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve:
BER estimate measurement
radio performances.
7.1.3.1
Switch for Ethernet ports
Inside LIM is present an Ethernet switch with 3 external ports (electrical 1000BaseT or optical 1000BaseX)
and one internal. Only port 1 is present with both kind of interface, the port 2 is electrical and port 3 optical.
The external interfaces (3 operational on 4 presents) are placed on the front panel. Internal port is represented by the local radio stream where through native Ethernet transport is connected with the remote
equipment.
Ethernet port LEDs
There are 2 LEDs:
Speed
-
one blinking = 10BaseT
two blinking = 100BaseT
three blinking = 1000BaseT
LINK/ACT
-
on = link up, no activity
off = link down
blinking = activity.
Switch function
LIM can operate like a switch between two or more separated LANs with the following advantages:
to connect two separate LANs
to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network
to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than
the traffic in a single LAN.
The switch realised into LIM/Ethernet module is transparent (IEEE 802.1d and 802.q) into the same Vlan
described by VLAN Configuration Table.
It works at data link level, Layer 2 of OSI pile, and leave untouched Layer 3 and it takes care to send traffic
from a local LAN to another one (Local and Remote).
Routing is only on the basic of Level 2 addresses, sublevel MAC.
The operation is the following: when a LAN port receives a MAC frame, on the basis of destination address,
it decides which LAN to send it:
if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is discarded
if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into
local address table, the frame is sent only on destination LAN (MAC switching)
otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).
Ethernet Full Duplex function

Full duplex mode can be activated into 10/100BaseT interfaces manually or with autonegotiation.
100BaseFx operates always into full duplex mode.
MN.00224.E - 011
47
Link Loss Forwarding

Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of Ethernet interface. LLF can be enabled or disabled.
If LLF is enabled, any linkdown alarm will generate the alarm status of Ethernet interface blocking any
transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each ports at front panel.
With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not
available and can temporarily re-route the traffic.
MDI/MDIX cross-over
The Ethernet electrical interface into FEM module can be defined by WebLCT as MDI or MDIX to cross-over
between pairs so that external cross-over cable is not required.
VLAN functionality
LIM Ethernet module works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag. Tag is made up with:
a fixed word of 2 bytes
3 bits for priority according with 802.1p
1 fixed bit
12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according with 802.1q.
Switch cross-connections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only output ports should be defined for any used VID. Vlan ID (VID) has a range from 1 to 4095.
7.1.3.2
STM-1 synchronisation
Refer to Fig.22.
STM-1 frame generation requires that it is synchronised to a SDH network.
Into ALplus2 a synchronisation circuit, called SETS, gets the synchronisation signal from the following different sources:
radio
STM1
tributary A/WST
tributary B
tributary n
Lan3
Lan4
Internal source
As shown in Fig.22 the clocks extracted from the sources are sent to a selection circuit that chooses one
of the signals depending on the control sent by a selection logic.
This latter acts on the base of alarm roots (LOS-loss of input signal, LTI-loss of timing input, LOF-loss of
frame), on the base of assigned priority and manual forcing.
The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required synchronisation for the STM-1 frame generation. If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source
is used for the local restart.
48
MN.00224.E - 011
Radio
Trib A
Trib B/n
Source
selector
STM-1
Synchronisation
for
STM-1 interface
Lan3
Lan4
LOS
LTI
Priority Control
Manual Forcing
Logic circuit
for
clock
synchronisation
Fig.22 - Synchronisation block diagram
7.1.3.3
LIM LEDs
On LIM front panel are present two LEDs to describe the following aspect:
PoE - green, ON if Power over Ethernet facility is active
FAIL - red, ON if the boot of the module wasnt successful.
7.1.4
RIM
The RIM consists of the following main circuits:
IF part of the QAM modulator
IF part of the QAM demodulator
power supply
telemetry IDU/ODU.
MN.00224.E - 011
49
7.1.4.1
Modulator
Signals from LIM are connected to a programmable modulator. It consists of the following circuits:
recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity
two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process
330 MHz local oscillator
a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation.
The obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with ODU.
7.1.4.2
Demodulator
At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM demodulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit.
The QAM demodulator within the RIM converts the signal to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator
within the LIM.
7.1.4.3
Adaptive code modulation
ACM profiles
In ALplus2/ALplus2 radio family uses Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) in order to employ the correct
modulation profile depending on the Rx signal quality.
Available ACM profiles are the following:
4QAM strong
4QAM
8PSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM.
These profiles operate in an RF channel with the following bandwidth:
7 MHz
14 MHz
28 MHz
56 MHz.
ACM switching
The usage of the previous modulation profiles in a fixed channel bandwidth results in a variable capacity.
The criteria defining the necessity of an ACM switching, upshift or downshift, is the Rx S/N ratio.
50
Upshift - When there is an increase of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the modulation complexity is increased in the direction from 4QAM strong to 256QAM increasing the spectral
efficiency
MN.00224.E - 011
Downshift - When there is a decrease of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the modulation is reduced in the direction from 256QAM to 4QAM strong reducing the spectral efficiency,
In order to configure properly the radio link using ACM facility, an optimization must be found between
max traffic during good propagation conditions and max availability during bad propagation conditions. To
obtain this purpose the ACM in ALplus2/ALCplus2 family can be configured via software setting the following parameters: ACM setting and Tx Power mode.
ACM setting
The ACM can vary modulation profiles between two extremes defined by the operator through software
configuration: Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation.
Upper modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the better condition (high
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the maximum throughput defined at Upper Modulation: the
highest modulation profile that ACM can employ
Lower modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the worst condition (low
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the minimum throughput, defined at Lower Modulation: the
lowest modulation profile that ACM can employ
Tx power mode
Tx power mode can be set as Constant Peak or Constant Average (constant bolometer measurement).
Constant Peak - Tx power is at maximum at 4QAM and at 256QAM is reduced (typical 4.5 dB) so
the RF Tx amplifier can operate in better linear conditions.
Constant Average - Tx power is the same at any modulation.
The Tx Power mode is set depending on the modulation license of the user and depending on the Lower
Modulation that has been set.
For example:
In case of a 4QAM licence, all the other modulations must remain into the 4QAM mask. In this condition
Tx power must be Constant Peak (Tx Power Constant Peak Mode = Enable): max Tx power at 4QAM and
reduced power at all the other modulations.
In case of a 16QAM licence (or higher complexity) and Lower Modulation is set at 4QAM, the emitted spectrum must remain into the emitted spectrum defined for 16QAM even if the equipment is transmitting at
4QAM. In this case Tx power must be Constant Average (Tx Power Constant Peak Mode = Disable): Tx
power is always the same at any modulation and typically is the Upper Modulation's power. As an alternative the Lower Modulation can be set at 16QAM so Tx power Constant Peak can be activated.
With Constant Average Tx power (Tx Power Constant Peak Mode = Disable), the Tx power at 4QAM and
any other modulation is the same of Upper Modulation, so if Upper Modulation is 256QAM the output power
at any modulation is the same of 256QAM which is 4.5 dB less than 4QAM. The result is that enabling
256QAM is a big advantage for traffic but less link budget margin at 4QAM.
E1 priority
E1 available tributaries belong to two groups.
One is Permanent E1 equal to High Priority E1 that will never be interrupted during modulation downshift.
Downshift modulation will be limited to the minimum to obtain the selected Permanent E1.
The second group is Extra E1 equal to Low Priority, these tributaries will be interrupted progressively during
modulation downshift. They will start to be cut from the highest e.g. tributaries 16th or 32nd up to the first.
In Tab.13 it is reported the priority of tributaries, the lowest will be cut first.
Ethernet traffic
Once defined the bandwidth, Permanent E1 and Extra E1 at any modulation the amount of Ethernet capacity is the total radio capacity minus the Permanent + Extra E1 at any modulation.
MN.00224.E - 011
51
Tab.13 - E1 priority
Priority
Highest
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
V
Lowest
7.1.4.4
ALplus2
ALCplus2
Permanent E1 never
disappears
Permanent E1 never
disappears
WST
Tributary A
Tributary B
E1 tributary n1
E1 tributary n1
E1 tributary n16
E1 tributary n16
E1 tributary n32
E1 tributary n32
Power supply
The -48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltage for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for -5 V.
Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents. The same battery running through the
interconnection cable gives the power to the ODU.
An electronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.
7.1.4.5
Telemetry IDU/ODU
The dialogue IDU/ODU is made-up by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Controls for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals.
The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carriers:
17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU
5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.
7.2
LOOPS
To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the WebLCT/NMS program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.23.
7.2.1
Tributary
Tributary local loop

Each input tributary is routed directly to the tributary output upon receiving the command. The Tx line
transmission is still on.
52
MN.00224.E - 011
Tributary remote loop

Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.
7.2.2
IDU loop
This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connected to demodulator input.
The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz to 140 MHz.
MN.00224.E - 011
53
Fig.23 - IDU loopback
54
MN.00224.E - 011
Trib. loc. loop
Trib. OUT
Trib. IN
Trib. rem.
loop
LIM
DEMUX
MUX
BE
BI
DEM
140
330
MOD
RIM
from ODU
140 MHz
IDU loop
330 MHz
to ODU
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
10/100BaseT
1000BaseT
Ethernet
packet switch
10/100/1000BaseT
Port A
1000BaseSX,LX
Permanent E1
up to 60E1
Radio
1+0
1+1
E1
cross-connect
STM-1 MSP
Extra E1
up to 19E1
16E1
WST
Up to 80E1
- Permanent = High Priority
- Extra = Low Priority
Fig.24 - ALplus2 with 16E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram
MN.00224.E - 011
55
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
10/100BaseT
1000BaseT
Ethernet
packet switch
Port A
10/100/1000BaseT
Port B
1000BaseSX,LX
Permanent E1
up to 60E1
Radio A
1+0
E1
cross-connect
STM1 MSP
Extra E1
up to 19E1
16E1
E1 WST
Permanent E1
up to 60E1
Radio B
1+0
Extra E1
up to 19E1
Fig.25 - ALPlus2 with 16E1, 2x(1+0) configuration, block diagram
56
MN.00224.E - 011
ALCPLUS2 IDU DESCRIPTION
8.1
CONFIGURATION
The IDU of ALCplus2 is available in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration.

Into the IDU there are the following circuits:
Controller
LIM
RIM (one circuit in 1+0 configuration, two circuits in 1+1 configuration).
The IDU of ALCplus2 is one RU subrack.

All the listed circuits are inserted into a single board.
Circuits for others 16xE1 or 32xE1 are inserted into the ALCplus2 IDU, one RU subrack, with exp16E1 or
exp32E1 options.
Please refer to chapter 7 ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION for any information relevant to functionalities of the
listed circuits.
8.1.1
Switch for ethernet ports
Inside IDU is present an Ethernet switch with 4 external ports (electrical 1000BaseT or optical 1000BaseX)
and one internal. Port 3 and Port 4 have both interfaces, Port 1 and Port 2 are electrical only.
The external interfaces (4operational on 6 present) are placed on the front panel. Internal port is represented by the local radio stream where, through native Ethernet transport, is connected with the remote
equipment.
For Ethernet switch functionalities, please refer to chapter 7 ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION.
8.1.2
Service channels
No service channels ports are available for ALCplus2 IDU.
MN.00224.E - 011
57
8.2
SYNCHRONIZATION
Refer to Fig.52.
Into ALplus2e a synchronisation circuit, called SETS, gets the synchronisation signal from the following different sources:
radio A
radio B
STM1(1)
STM1 (2)
tributary A/B
tributary A/B as T3
tributary nE1
node1
node2
Lan A (Lan1,2,3,4) Gbit Electrical
Lan B (Lan1,2,3,4) Gbit Electrical
Internal source
The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required internal synchronisation signal T0.
Trib A or B selected as T3 can be the source of T4 signal (2MHz) for other equipment like for example into
nodal structure.
If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source is used for the local restart of STM1 generation.
8.3
SD MEMORY CARD MANAGEMENT
On the front panel a protected slot for the insertion of a memory card is present.
The memory card allows the upload/download of the equipment configuration and the equipment firmware.
58
Memory card format
SD, SDHC
Memory card capacity
up to 4 GB.
MN.00224.E - 011
8.4
ALC BLOCK DIAGRAMS
On Fig.31, Fig.32, Fig.33 and Fig.34 you can find block diagrams of ALCplus2 with 32E1 expansion, with
16E1 expansion and NBUS, with 16E1 expansion and without any expansion.
8.5
ALCPLUS2 NODE
A node can be made up of max 8 subracks of ALCplus2 IDU so that we can have:
up to 8 maximum independent radio directions, with max 80E1 per direction
up to 8 STM1 MST or MSP
up to 8 x 16E1 = 128E1
up to 8 x 2 x 1Gbit Lan ports.
On the front panel of ALCplus2 there are two NBUS ports (1 and 2) which must be connected to the other
IDU subrack as in Fig.35 for E1 traffic and Ethernet traffic.
For Ethernet traffic Lan1 and Lan2 must be connected as in Fig.35 Lan1 and Lan2 connection can be made
with normal Lan cables CAT5e/CAT6.
NBUS connection among the IDUs are made by cables of CAT7 quality, only by proprietary SIAE cable to
insert into the NBUS connectors (1 and 2) on the front panel. See Tab.15 for cable length and SIAE code.
Warning: for NBUS do not use normal Lan cables.
For any IDU into WebLCT it is necessary to define how many IDU are into the Node from 2 to 8.
Into WebLCT each IDU must be defined as node number 1, 2...8.
NBUS can operate in Protected mode or in Not Protected mode. Each NBUS carries 126 E1s.
In case of Not Protected mode, all the 126 E1s of the NBUS are used to connect a subrack to the others
for a total amount of 252 E1 connections available on NBUSes from one IDU.
In case of Protected mode, the unused connections, are used as protection of the connections between the
other IDUs; for example 63 E1s are used between Node1 and Node2 and the other 63 E1s are used as
protection of the connections between the other nodes, the connections used as protection pass into others
IDUs as passthrough without any need to be programmed.
The troubles in the connections between the NBUS buses are identified by alarms.
In case of protected modality, if the cable carrying the traffic is broken, an alarm is issued on the relevant
NBUS port, the equipment software switches the traffic on the other operating NBUS cable.
For Ethernet traffic Lan1 and Lan2 must be connected as in Fig.35.
With SCT/LCT program it is possible to configure a Node made up of some Nodals so into the window of
Node Manager it is possible to program only one big Crossconnect matrix for E1 and only one Ethernet
switch for all Lan traffic.
The software hides all NBUS connection for E1 and Lan connection from an IDU to others IDUs, so to operate on one big Crossconnection matrix and one big Ethernet switch.
For any IDU the Node Manager shows for E1s 16E1, STM1 E1s, radio permanent E1, radio extra E1 and for
Ethernet Lan3, Lan4, radio port Port A.
The Nodal equipment with SDH STM1 interface is a Regenerator Section Termination (RST) and a Multiplex
Section Termination (MST) therefore it generates the STM-1 frame and has an internal synchronization circuit SETS. The synchronization of the Node can be distributed on the NBUS.
The ALCplus2 subracks must be synchronised together via NBUS or other interface.
MN.00224.E - 011
59
For each Nodal subrack, the STM-1 interface can be duplicated (1+1 MSP) for the possible protection of
cable. The switching criteria in Rx are:
Unequipped
LOS
LOF
MSAIS
TIM
B2 excessive BER
B2 degraded BER.
8.5.1
Expansion from 2 to 3 nodals
Suppose that the nodals 1 and 2 already exist and that you must add the nodal 3.
Disconnect the cable between NBUS1 nodal2 and NBUS2 nodal1, the traffic is automatically switched to
the other cable, if necessary.
Disconnect the cable between LAN1 nodal2 and LAN2 nodal1, the traffic is automatically switched to the
other cable, if necessary.
By WebLCT or SCT/LCT, re-program the nodal1 and nodal2 as node with 3 items.
By WebLCT or SCT/LCT, re-program the nodal3 as nodal3, protected and define the node with 3 items.
Connect the NBUS1 of the nodal2 with NBUS2 of nodal3, connect the NBUS1 of the nodal3 with NBUS2 of
the nodal1 as in Fig.35.
Connect the LAN1 of the nodal2 with LAN2 of nodal3, connect the LAN1 of the nodal3 with LAN2 of the
nodal1 as in Fig.35.
By SCT/LCT, with Nodal ALCplus2 Manager, Nodal Configuration add nodal3 IP address.
Program the interested cross-connections and Ethernet switch connections with external interfaces of
nodal3, Node Manager will take care of connections on NBUSes and LAN1, 2.
The same procedure can be used even if the added node is different from nodal3.
8.5.2
Reduction from 3 to 2 nodes
Suppose that the nodals 1, 2 and 3 already exist and that the nodal 3 must be removed.
By SCT/LCT, with Nodal ALCplus2 Manager, delete all the cross-connections to the external interfaces of
nodal3.
Remove the cables of the NBUS and LAN going to nodal3.
Connect nodal2 NBUS1 to nodal1 NBUS2 as in Fig.35.
Connect nodal2 LAN1 to nodal1 LAN2 as in Fig.35.
The same procedure can be used even if the deleted nodal is different from nodal3.
60
MN.00224.E - 011
8.6
LAG - LINK AGGREGATION
Link Aggregation (LAG) is a feature available on SIAE ALCplus2 equipment that allows assigning up to four
physical links to one logical link (trunk) that functions as a single, higher-speed link.
In SIAE equipment LAG is named Trunking and two different implementations are possible:
Line trunking: it works by aggregating LAN interfaces.
Radio trunking: it works by aggregating radio interfaces.
Radio Trunking is available only when the Nodal Ethernet functionality is enabled.
The nodal Ethernet configuration can be deployed on all the ALCplus2 IDU models.
More details about this implementation will be provided in next paragraph 8.5 ALCplus2 NODE.
8.6.1
Line Trunking
Line Trunking is available on the ALCplus2 IDU. SIAE ALCplus2 support IEEE 802.3ad LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol). See Fig.26.
Fig.26 - Enabling Line Aggregation, Enable trunk1

LACP allows a network device to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the
peer (directly connected device that also implements LACP). In addition to the increased capacity of the
logical link, LACP provides additional advantages:
failover detection when a link fails, allowing for a trunk reconfiguration in order to avoid systematic
packet loss (after the reconfiguration the packets will be lost only if the throughput exceed the trunk
capacity).
it introduces an agreement between the two LACP peers before to start data transmission over the
trunk. This prevent anomalous behaviour in case of cabling or configuration mistakes.
LACP works by sending frames (LACPDUs) over the links belonging to the trunk. Also the equipment deployed on the other end of the trunk will send LACP frames over the same links: this enables the two units
to establish the trunk. LACP can be configured two modes: active or passive. In active mode it will always
send frames along the configured links. SIAE ALCplus2 implements an "active" LACP.
MN.00224.E - 011
61
Each IDU allows to define up to 4 different trunks on its LAN interfaces. A Line Trunk can aggregate up to
4 LAN interfaces with the following restrictions:
all the LAN interfaces must be defined with the same speed (either 10, 100 or 1000 Mbit/s).
all the LAN interfaces must be set in Full Duplex mode
all the interfaces must belong to the same IDU, even if the IDU is deployed in Nodal Ethernet configuration.
When a Trunk is defined on SIAE ALCplus2, the end-to-end traffic is transmitted over all the aggregated
lines. As a results, the overall capacity of the trunk can be theoretically equal to the number of aggregated
lines multiplied by the capacity of a single line. In the example of Fig.27, four 100Mbs connection are
grouped into the same trunk, carrying all the capacity in transit from a radio link to another. In this configuration, the theoretical maximum capacity that can transit on this trunk is 400 Mbit/s.
LAN1
100 Mbit/s
LAN1
LAN2
100 Mbit/s
LAN2
ALCplus2
ALCplus2
LAN3
100 Mbit/s
LAN3
LAN4
100 Mbit/s
LAN4
Line
trunking
Fig.27 - Line trunking

The packets carried by the trunk are assigned to each line depending on their Source MAC (SA) and Destination MAC (DA) Addresses (MAC hashing).
A possible problem that could occur when Link Aggregation protocols are used is a change in the transmission order of packets belonging to the same logical session. The MAC hashing method prevents such a
problem: the traffic transmitted from one host to another one in the network (fixed SA and DA) is always
sent over the same physical line of the trunk, avoiding any order change.
If a line of the trunk fails (for example due to a cable disconnection), the LACP protocol automatically reconfigure the trunk group into a lower order trunk. So doing, the traffic that before was carried over the
failed line, now will be re-distributed over one of the remaining trunk lines, ensuring continuity to the traffic
transmission. The typical LAG reconfiguration time in case of a LAN cable failure is below 1 second.
8.6.2
Radio Link Trunking
Radio Link Trunking is a feature available on SIAE ALCplus2 equipment when deployed in Nodal Ethernet
configuration.
This feature allows to bundle up to 4 radio links to increase the capacity of an Ethernet connection between
two radio sites (see Fig.28).
62
MN.00224.E - 011
LAN4
LAN4
LAN3
LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 1
ALCplus2
Node 1
LAN2
LAN2
LAN1
LAN1
LAN4
LAN4
LAN3
LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 2
ALCplus2
Node 2
LAN2
LAN2
LAN1
LAN1
LAN4
LAN4
LAN3
LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 3
ALCplus2
Node 3
LAN2
LAN2
LAN1
LAN1
LAN4
LAN4
LAN3
LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 4
ALCplus2
Node 4
LAN2
LAN2
LAN1
LAN1
SITE A
Radio
trunking
SITE B
Fig.28 - Radio trunking

Each Nodal Ethernet stack can belongs to one Radio Trunk. Each IDU of the trunk sends over the air only
a portion of the traffic, according to the same hashing rule used for the line trunking (see paragraph 8.6.1
Line Trunking). The traffic received from the radio trunk is sent towards the IDU where is located the outgoing interface according to standard MAC learning/switching mechanisms.
Resiliency between the radio links aggregated into the trunk is managed by means of a proprietary protocol. If a radio link of the trunk fails (due to fading or equipment failure), this protocol automatically reconfigure the trunk group into a lower order trunk. In this way, the traffic that before was carried over the
failed link, now will be re-distributed over one of the remaining trunk lines, ensuring continuity to the traffic
transmission. The typical Radio Trunk reconfiguration time is about 600msec.
It is important to note that also if it could be possible to aggregate up to four 340Mbit/s radio links (by
using 56 MHz frequency channel with 256 QAM modulation), the maximum capacity that can be carried
over the radio link cannot exceed 1Gbit/s in each direction of transmission (referring to Fig.28, from Site
A to Site B and vice-versa).
Regarding multicast/broadcast, the total traffic entering the stack (sum of the packets entering from LAN3/
LAN4 interfaces and from the radio ports) cannot exceed 1Gbit/s. This because also the traffic received
from the radio trunk is flooded towards all the IDUs belonging to the Nodal Ethernet stack (MAC learning
cannot be performed over multicast packets).
MN.00224.E - 011
63
8.7
LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP
ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) is a feature available on ALCplus2 IDU that allows to protect a GE interface
against cable failure or accidental disconnection. With ELP it is possible to connect an ALCplus2 IDU to another network element by using two GE interfaces. Both interfaces are active but just one is enabled to
forward and receive traffic (forwarding state), while the other does not allow any traffic to pass (blocking
state). If the forwarding interface goes down, the other one passes to the forwarding state. The typical
switching time is around 1.5 sec. This feature does not imply the use of any protocol, but is simply based
on the status of the physical interfaces. As a consequence, no particular protocol support is required on
the connected equipment: it is simply required to enable the two GE interfaces.
When the Nodal Ethernet configuration is used, ELP can be used to protect the traffic of two GE interfaces
belonging to two different IDUs of the stack. In this way the traffic can be protected against IDU failure,
in addition to the cable protection.
This feature is particularly useful when the Nodal stack is connected to an external equipment like a core
router (see the example of the following Fig.29).
LAN4
LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 2
LAN2
LAN1
LAN4
LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 3
LAN2
LAN1
Core router
LAN4
ELP
protection
LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 4
LAN2
LAN1
Fig.29 - Line protection through distributed ELP

It is recommended to disable any Spanning Tree protocol on the external equipment: this could cause longer traffic recovery times.
64
MN.00224.E - 011
8.8
ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE)
As native Ethernet is originally designed for LAN (local Area Network), OAM is not included into the native
Ethernet network equipment. In order to provide a carrier grade service, the OAM protocol can be used in
any point-to-point Ethernet link (made up of a single radio link or many radio links). The aim of this protocol is to check and monitor the functionality of the service that the provider guarantees on the network.
8.8.1
Service Layer OAM
The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards cover
this topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.
The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and reporting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional features, like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.
SIAE ALCplus2 supports CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.
The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provides the tools to monitor the
Ethernet Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators. Since the spectrum of application
can include many applications a more hierarchical structure is needed.
The Standards define:
Maintenance Domains (MD): these specify the Domains of operators, users and service providers.
Levels from 0 to 7 are possible depending on the type of service to be monitored. Customer Domain
is the higher which includes both ends of the Ethernet service (from one End user to the other End
user), Standard Default values for Customer Domain are 7, 6 and 5. Service Provider Domains
should have a MD lower than the Customer Domain since include the whole network except the End
Users. Standard default values for Provider Domains are 3 and 4. Operator Domains are lower than
Service Provider Domains since just a part of the network is included. Standard Default values for
operator domains are 0, 1 and 2. A domain is transparent to all messages with higher priority while
blocking all lower priority messages. Fig.30 shows the hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains.
MN.00224.E - 011
65
CE
PE
PE
Access
Network
Operator 1
Core Network
CE
Access
Network
Operator 2
Core Network
High Level
Customer
Service
Provider
MEP
MEP
MEP
MEP
MEP
MIP
MIP
MEP
Operator 1
Low Level
MEP
MIP
MIP
MEP
Operator 2
Fig.30 - Hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains

ALCplus2 equipment belongs to one Maintenance Domain.
At each end of the Maintenance Domain two MEPs (Maintenance End Point) will be specified. One MEP is
local, the other one is in the remote equipment. The MEPs are "markers" that defines the end of a domain
and are in charge of originating OAM frames.
In a domain also MIPs (Maintenance Intermediate Points) can be specified. The MIPs are passive checkpoints. The MEPs and MIPs configuration are discussed in details in the following points. The choice of the
domain that is the Domain Label (name) is left to the user. Particular attention must be paid to use exactly
the same MD label (and level) in each equipment where the MD is specified, i.e. different equipment with
same value of MD domain but different MD labels (or levels) belongs to different Domains.
66
A Maintenance Association (MA) is one association which correlates the VLAN to the MD in which
the MEPs and MIPs have to be defined.
When a specified traffic needs to be monitored, then it is necessary to relay the VLAN to a Domain
and to the corresponding MEPs or MIPs through the MA. Before creating the Maintenance Association, the VLAN, either SVLAN (Service VLAN Tag o Stacked VLAN Tag) or C-VLAN, has to be specified
in the VLAN Table. In each SIAE equipment it is possible to set up to 32 different MA. Particular
attention must be paid to use the same MA label in each equipment where the MA is specified, i.e.
different MA labels on the same VLAN correspond to different MA associations.
MN.00224.E - 011
At the Edge of a MD there are MEPs (Maintenance End Points) and in the middle there could be MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points). MEPs are the units in charge of managing the CFM to correctly
monitor the status of the Ethernet service provided. MIPs are passive check-points that answer to
polling coming from MEPs. MEPs will forward OAM messages coming from higher domains and will
discard OAM messages generated from lower domains.
Each interface can be configured as MEP, Port A interface (radio interface) included. Once chosen
the interface, depending on the network topology, the direction of the MEP has to be specified. Two
Directions are possible, MEP "up" and MEP "Down". With MEP "Down" configured the OAM PDUs are
sent from the interface in the direction outside the equipment, i.e. the OAM PDUs are sent from the
interface on the cable toward next equipment. With MEP "Up" configured the OAM PDUs are sent
from the interface toward the inside of the equipment and will follow the VLAN table previously configured. MEPs are distinguished from each other through a MEP ID, therefore MEPs belonging to
same MA must have different MEP Ids. In order to configure a MIP the MA has to be enabled on the
equipment. Up to 32 MIPs or MEPs can be configured on each equipment.
The protocols belonging to the Connectivity Fault Management implemented in SIAE equipment are following listed:
Continuity Check Protocol: this protocol enables the sending of a periodic message (like a Heartbeat
message) which enables the other MEPs deployed in the network to distinguish the status of a virtual connection. This message can only be originated by a MEP. Time between messages is adjustable with 1s, 10s, 1min, 10min. These messages do not trigger any automatic reply from the
destination entity.
LoopBack Protocol: it resembles an IP PING message; once this message is sent (e.g. MEP1 sends
a Loopback Message to MEP2). MEP2 replies to MEP1 confirming therefore the status of the connection. This is done to check the status of the connection between the MEP originating the message
and the MEP/MIP to which the message is addressed. This message can only be originated from one
MEP and can be addressed to both MEPs or MIPs. ALCplus2: The number of Loopback Messages in
ALCplus2 equipment is adjustable from 1 to 5 consecutive Loopbacks. In each equipment, it is possible for each MEP to check the presence of other MEPs in the same MA. This is done through the
"Remote MEP" application which allows this acknowledgement and distinguishes the other MEP
through means of MEP IDs and MAC address.
Link Trace Protocol: This protocol sends a message similar to the LoopBack protocol. Every equipment that is reached by this message will answer to the sender providing its own MAC Address. In
this way the sender is able to understand of which equipment the MA is composed. E.g. a MEP sends
the Link Trace Message to another MEP belonging to the same Maintenance Association. The MIPs
that are eventually deployed in the middle of the path will forward this message and answer to the
initiating MEP with their own MAC Address. By doing so the initiating MEP knows the OAM-devices
deployed in the path and their order.
Remote Defect Indicator: This Feature allows a MEP, in presence of a fault or a defect, to send a
RDI to inform the other MEPs, belonging to the same MA, of the presence of this Defect. The advantages of this procedure are to avoid multiple Alarms created by the same cause and to be able
to check the status of other Remote MEPs. This RDI information is reported in the Continuity Check
Message. ALCplus2: This feature is present in ALCplus2 equipment and the presence of this alarm
can be checked as well in the Remote MEPs screen on the equipment.
8.8.2
OAM Example with ALCplus2
As an example, let's consider a network where a sequence of 8 SIAE ALCplus2 Radio links is deployed. In
this case a Maintenance Domain, a VLAN and a Maintenance Association have to be defined. The VLAN carrying the traffic must be present in the VLAN table of each equipment.
Two MEPs at the end of the chains and a variable number of MIPs in the middle has to be defined with
Continuity Check Message (CCM) enabled.
In case of defect or Ethernet problem, the Continuity Check Message will result in an "Inactive" status triggering one Alarm.
By logging on one MEP it is sufficient to configure the Loopback message and Link Trace Message correctly
detects the location of the Bottleneck or defect related to this traffic. If More than one VLAN is present then
more than one MA has to be defined.
MN.00224.E - 011
67
8.8.3
Reset Switch
Reset Switch button forces factory default values into switch but this is true only at next restart.
8.8.4
MAC Table clear
This is a button to clear all the MAC Table.

MAC Learning on Port basis and MAC Learning on VID basis.
The purpose of these two selection is dividing the MAC table into some independents parts named FID (Forwarding Indication Database).
8.9
ALCPLUS2 FIRMWARE UPDATES
In this chapter are described the new features available in an ALCplus2 with new firmware releases. Only
the main releases are considered (....the firmware releases with new features).
Every firmware release is included in a System Version and is supplied with the right WebLCT version.
FW update procedure
The order of file download is the following:
1. FW_Boot E82101
2. FW_appl N90634
3. WEBLCT N96106
All the files are in a compressed container called System Version v.XX.YY.ZZ.
If ODU needs a firmware update, it must be done after there three.
8.9.1
Firmware release 1.3.3
The new features included in this release are the following:
MAC Address Table

The MAC address in the MAC Address Table can be managed also in this way:
MAC Learning on Vid basis: MAC address table can be managed depending on Vid
MAC on port basis: MAC address table can be managed depending on port
Management Port Speed

The two management ports can be set in different ways separately:
68
Full duplex 10M
MN.00224.E - 011
Half duplex 10M
Full duplex 100M
Half duplex 100M
Auto-Speed-Dplx (the speed is set automatically during the handshake of the interfaces)
Management Port VLAN Tagging

The two management ports can be inserted in a VLAN.
The setting are the following:
both ports are in the same VLAN
one port is a VLAN and the other port is without Vid
both ports are without the Vid management
8.9.2
Tx Transmitter Permanent Off

Now is available a new manual operation in the radio management: the Tx side of the radio can be turned
off with or without the timeout checking.
LAN Port Ingress Rate Limiting

New values are available in each LAN port to limit the input throughput (PIRL - Port based Ingress Rate
Limiting).
8.9.3
Firmware Release 1.4.0
LAN3/LAN4 syncE Management

Now LAN port3 and LAN port4 can be used in equipment synchronization without considering the interface
kind: the syncE management is available with optical and with electrical interface.
8.9.4
Firmware Release 1.4.1
MN.00224.E - 011
69
SOH-STM1 Transport
Now the SOH of a STM1 stream can be transmitted: the SOH transport is made up by a permanent TDM,
one for STM1-1 and another for STM1-2.
A proper symbol is present in the cross connection matrix for this kind of usage.
SSM Management in Synchronization Sources

The SSM management (quality status of a synch source) is available on the following sources:
STM1
Nodal Bus
E1
Lan Port
SSM allows:
the traceability to an identifiable primary clock reference source
the presence of two synch sources to all the network elements, a primary and a secondary source
in case of a primary failure
the lack of timing loops
SSM can be enabled on all the LAN ports in order to distribute the quality of the clock, according to Rec.
G8264/Y.1364.
Radio E1 type
The E1 streams carried through the radio link can be set as framed or not framed.
In case of Framed setting, the TU-AIS alarms can be used for VC12 management.
8.9.5
Management Port Secure Mode

The management ports can be set in secure mode: only traffic with the Vid pointed out can be managed.
Ethernet Traffic Rate Limiter

The Ethernet switch is protected against traffic storming.
In each LAN port, up to three different limits can be set for the following kind of traffic and/or a combination
of them: Unicast, Unknown Unicast, Unknown Multicast, Broadcast, ARP.
SSM Management
The SSM management can be set on port basis on Ethernet ports.
70
MN.00224.E - 011
CWDM SFP modules

A bigger range of optical plug-in modules can be used.
8.9.6
Management of CWDM SFP module from any supplier

This release increases the range of CWDM SFP modules that can be used in the IDU.
Egress shaping functionality

This feature allows limiting the egress throughput of the ALCplus2e LAN interfaces, by properly exploiting
the buffer of this port.
The egress shaping rate can be configured with the following values:
if Egress Rate < 1Mbit/s: 64kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 512 kbit/s
if Egress Rate > 1 Mbit/s & Egress Rate <10 Mbit/s: values with granularity of 1 Mbit/s
if Egress Rate > 10 Mbit/s (up to 1 Gbit/s): values with granularity of 10 Mbit/s.
In this way each Ethernet port has separate limits for input and output throughput.
Asymmetric Link Loss Forwarding functionality

In some cases, the radio link failure can be unidirectional, for example when the local equipment has an
Rx signal failure but the remote Rx signal is OK (i.e. unidirectional radio fail due to failure of a transmitter).
However, also in these cases there can be the need to shutdown the link in both directions even if there is
only a unidirectional link failure.
Using the bidirectional LLF feature, in case of LLF in the local equipment, the local equipment can notify
this LLF status to the remote equipment, shutting down the link on both directions.
Extended buffer (128 Mb) on Ethernet queues of radio port

This release assigns up to 128 Mbit (16Mbyte) to a single queue.
The following buffer configuration are available on the 8 output queues of the radio port:
each queue is configurable from 128 kbit to 128 Mbit (see the below screenshot of the queue configuration)
every radio port has a total available buffer of 184 Mbit (23 Mbyte), so the sum of the 8 output
queue lengths of a single radio port does not have to exceed this value.
MN.00224.E - 011
71
LAN1
LAN2
10/100BaseT
1000BaseT
Ethernet
packet switch
10/100/1000BaseT
LAN3
10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseT,SX,LX
LAN4
10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseSX,LX
Port A
Permanent E1
up to 60E1
Radio
1+0
1+1
E1
cross-connect
STM-1 MSP
Extra E1
up to 19E1
32E1
2E1
Up to 80E1
Fig.31 - ALCplus2 with 32E1 expansion, STM-1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram
72
MN.00224.E - 011
LAN1
LAN2
10/100BaseT
1000BaseT
Ethernet
packet switch
10/100/1000BaseT
LAN3
10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseT,SX,LX
LAN4
10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseSX,LX
Port A
Permanent E1
up to 60E1
Radio
1+0
1+1
E1
cross-connect
STM-1 MSP
16E1
Extra E1
up to 19E1
NBUS1
NBUS2
2E1
Up to 80E1
Fig.32 - ALCplus2 with 16E1 expansion, STM1, NBUS, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram
MN.00224.E - 011
73
10/100BaseT
LAN1
LAN2
1000BaseT
Ethernet
packet switch
10/100/1000BaseT
LAN3
10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseT,SX,LX
LAN4
10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseSX,LX
Port A
Radio
1+0
1+1
2E1
Fig.33 - ALCplus2 with 2E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram
10/100BaseT
1000BaseT
LAN1
LAN2
10/100/1000BaseT
LAN3
10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseT,SX,LX
LAN4
10/100/1000BaseT
1000BaseSX,LX
16E1
Ethernet
packet switch
Port A
Radio
1+0
1+1
2E1
Fig.34 - ALCplus2 with 16E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram
74
MN.00224.E - 011
NBUS
STM1
up to 80E1
16E1
E1 CrossConnect
Nodal 1
Ethernet Switch
LAN3
LAN4
up to 340 Mbit/s
LAN
NBUS
STM1
up to 80E1
16E1
E1 CrossConnect
Nodal 2
Ethernet Switch
LAN3
LAN4
up to 340 Mbit/s
LAN
NBUS
STM1
up to 80E1
16E1
E1 CrossConnect
up to Nodal 8
LAN3
LAN4
Ethernet Switch
up to 340 Mbit/s
LAN
Fig.35 - Node block diagram in protected configuration
MN.00224.E - 011
75
ALCPLUS2E IDU DESCRIPTION
9.1
CONFIGURATION
The IDU of ALCplus2e is available in the following configurations
1+0
1+1
1+0 XPIC
1+1 XPIC
2x (1+0)
2x (1+0) East West
N+0
N+0 XPIC
All the IDUs are made up with the following circuits:
Controller
LIM
RIM (one circuit in 1+0 configuration, two circuits in 1+1 configuration).
The IDU of ALCplus2e is one RU subrack.

Please refer to chapters 7 ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION and 8 ALCplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION for any information relevant to functionalities of the listed circuits.
9.1.1
Service channels
No service channels ports are available for ALCplus2e IDU.
9.2
ALCPLUS2E BLOCK DIAGRAM
On Fig.55 you can find block a diagram of ALCplus2e with 32E1 expansion.
76
MN.00224.E - 011
9.2.1
ADAPTIVE CODE MODULATION - ACM PROFILES
In ALplus2e radio family uses Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) in order to employ the correct modulation profile depending on the Rx signal quality. Available ACM profiles are the following:
4QAM strong
4QAM
8PSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM.
These profiles operate in an RF channel with the following bandwidth:
7 MHz
14 MHz
28 MHz
40 MHz
56 MHz.
With 1+0 configuration the E1 number is:
Number of permanent (fixed) E1:
max 80E1
Number of extra (dynamical) E1:
max 21E1
Total number of E1 per direction:
82 E1
Total number of E1 per unit:
82 E1.
9.3
FREQUENCY REUSE
The frequency reuse makes use of an XPIC circuit (Cross Polar Interference Canceller) and allows the coexistence of two radio bearer transmission on the same RF channel. Each radio bearer carries an individual
radio frame up to 341 Mbit/s.
The system consists of two fully independent transceivers, and a cross-polarized antenna with polarization
H connected to one transceiver and polarization V connected to the other transceiver.
The initial co-channel interference is featured by the antenna cross polar discrimination factor (example
29 dB). This value may be not sufficient for frequency reuse system making use of modulations 32QAM
After all, it may be impaired by the propagation condition giving rise to a BER degradation. To get a suitable
discrimination value, an adaptive canceller, based on a fully numeric adaptive coefficient filter, must be
used.
As shown in Fig.58 the received signals at the IF receiver outputs are processed by the demodulator placed
on the copolar branch as well as by the canceller annexed to the demodulator processing the signals from
the cross polar polarization. This process operates in baseband time domain.
An adaptive equalizer minimizes the intersymbolic interference within the copolar demodulator whereas a
circuit similar to the equalizer, processes the signal on the cross route.
Such a signal, summed with the one available at the equalizer output permits the cancelling of the interference contained in the copolar signal. XPIC circuit is used into configuration 1+0 XPIC and 1+1 XPIC.
IDU-ODU coaxial cable to ODU for vertical polarization and ODU for horizontal polarization should not differ
more than 1.5 meters in length.
MN.00224.E - 011
77
9.4
XPIC 1+1 CONFIGURATION
The XPIC 1+1 configuration is made up of two ALCplus2e IDU with XPIC and 4ODU connected as in Fig.56.
Interconnections between the two IDU are as follows:
one IDU is defined Master, the other is defined Reserve, while one of them is Active the other is
Stand-by
LAN protection with ring connection within LAN1 Master with LAN2 Reserve and LAN1 Reserve with
LAN1 Master
TDM protection with Nodal Bus, NBUS1 Master with NBUS2 Reserve and NBUS1 Reserve with
NBUS2 Master.
The Active IDU has Tx and Rx on and it is communicating bidirectionally with remote end. The stand-by
IDU has Tx off. The following user interfaces are available:
STM1
-
4x(1+0), the four STM1s (two on Master and two on Reserve) are independent
or
-
2x(1+1 MSP), two STM1s in MSP
protection are always in the same IDU
4x1Gbit Ethernet, (LAN3, 4 Master LAN3, 4 Reserve). ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) can be used to
protect LAN connection with another port of the same IDU or the other IDU.
no E1 port is available.
A max number 160 (2x80) VC12s are available via radio. Nodal bus from Master and Reserve can carry a
max of 126xVC12s.
The Active IDU is using completely the Radios, the Stand-by IDU has the two Radios in Tx off. HW failure
activate protection switch. Radio traffic is moved on new Active IDU. Switching from one IDU to the other
is traffic affecting.
The four STM1 available on front panel of IDU Master and IDU Reserve can get the traffic from Master Radio
1A and 2A or from Reserve Radio 1A and 2A depending on which IDU is Active: Master or Reserve.
Connection from Radio (Active IDU) to Active IDU STM1 ports is done through cross connection matrix.
Connection from Radio (Active IDU) to Stand-by IDU STM1 ports is done through Active cross connection
matrix, NBUS1, 2, and Stand-by cross connection matrix. Some Ethernet Enchanced features are not available:
Not available: transparent point to point
MAC Learning must be always enabled
Not available: Priority management is the same for all LAN ports
Not available: Customer VID Rewrite
Not available: CVid Rewrite & Selective QinQ
Not available: MPLS priority to SVLAN priority. MPLS priority to CVLAN priority is available
Not available any CIR/EIR feature
Not available RED/WRED feature
Advance statistic counters are available only on radio port
Cable to be used for short connections
78
MNGT1 to MNGT2
F03596
LAN1 to LAN2
F03596
LAN2 to LAN1
F03596
NBUS1 upper to NBUS2 lower
F03598
NBUS1 lower to NBUS2upper
F03598
MN.00224.E - 011
9.4.1
XPIC 1+1 management
Master and Reserve IDUs have two different IP address shown to the user with WebLCT.
MNGT1 is connected with MNGT2 with a Lan cable. The two local IP address and remote IP Address are in
the same subnet. Local to remote connection of management channel is in Bridge mode.
9.4.2
SSP protocol management
Synchronization Setup Protocol (SSP) is on only into Active IDUs. Into Standby IDUs the SSP is off.
9.5
2X(1+0) EST WEST CONFIGURATION
The 2x(1+0) Est West configuration is made up of one IDU and 2 ODUs connected as in Fig.57.
One ODU to an antenna directed to Est, one ODU connected to an antenna directed to West.
The following interfaces are available:
16E1 and 2E1
2xSTM1
4x1Gbit Ethernet
Cross connection is possible among STM1s, 16E1, radio side E1s. At receiving end the IDU receives E1s
from two ODUs East and West and decides which is going to use on the basis of alarms.
Ethernet traffic may arrive from East or West, switching between the two sides can be done with rapid
spanning tree protocol, activated on both radio ports.
Number of permanent (fixed) E1:
max 2x80E1
Number of extra (dynamical) E1:
max 2x21E1
Total number of E1 for any direction:
82 E1
Total number of E1 per unit:
164 E1.
9.5.1
Selective E1 Protection
A selective E1 subset defined into WebLCT can be routed, for protection purposes, to both radio directions
Vertical and Horizontal or Est and West.
With 1+0 XPIC configuration the ALCplu2e on the other side receives the two E1s and decides which one
to select on the basis of alarms.
With 2x(1+0) Est West configuration, if the equipment is part of a loop, the equipment is receiving the
two E1s and on the basis of alarms decides which incoming E1 to select.
MN.00224.E - 011
79
9.6
N+0 CONFIGURATION
The ALCplus2e can be configured with a number of ODU depending on frequency arrangement.
9.6.1
Frequency arrangement definitions
The following frequency arrangement definitions will be used. See Fig.36, Fig.37 and Fig.38.
Fig.36 - ACAP: Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization
Fig.37 - ACCP: Adjacent Channel CoPolarization
Fig.38 - CCDP: CoChannel Dual Polarization
9.6.2
GENERALS
ALCplus2e high capacity radio links N+0 are available in some configurations:
80
2x(1+0) with frequency reuse (XPIC),
MN.00224.E - 011
2x(1+0) with hybrid coupler, two channels adjacent or not adjacent
2x(1+0) with circulator, two channels adjacent or not adjacent, low losses, narrow band ODU
4x(1+0) with XPIC, hybrid coupler, two not adjacent channels or two CCDP adjacent channels
4x(1+0) with XPIC, circulator, two not adjacent channels or two CCDP adjacent channels, low losses, narrow band ODU
8x(1+0) with XPIC, CCDP frequency arrangement, narrow band ODUs
New software license may be necessary for some configurations.

Any single radio stream can be used as:
a STM1 SDH stream + nxE1 + Ethernet stream
whole capacity can be used for an Ethernet stream
For maximum Ethernet throughput, depending on channel bandwidth, modulation, frame size and protocols, please refer to relevant paragraph in this manual
9.6.3
2X(1+0) system with XPIC
See Fig.39 and Fig.40
Fig.39 - Frequency arrangement
Fig.40 - Layout of 2x(1+0) with XPIC
MN.00224.E - 011
81
The solutions ALCplus2e 2x(1+0) with frequency reuse (XPIC) have the following characteristics:
XPIC,
dual polarization antenna,
Channel bandwidth: 14MHz, 28MHz, 40MHz, 56 MHz Horizontal and Vertical polarization
No branching loss
Standard ASN can be used
Frequency bands: any frequency in which ASN is available
Ethernet dual pipe or single pipe
9.6.4
2X(1+0) system with hybrid coupler, two channels
Fig.41 - Frequency arrangements
Fig.42 - Layout of 2x(1+0) two channels with hybrid coupler
82
MN.00224.E - 011
The solutions ALCplus2e 2x(1+0) with hybrid coupler two channels, adjacent and not adjacent, have the
following characteristics:
No XPIC,
Single polarization antenna,
Channel bandwidth: 14MHz, 28MHz, 40MHz, 56 MHz Horizontal and Vertical polarization
Hybrid coupler losses: <4dB at TX and <4dB at RX (according frequency)
Two standard ASN ODUs with same code
9.6.5
2X(1+0) with circulator, low losses
Fig.44 - Layout of 2x(1+0) with circulator
MN.00224.E - 011
83
The solutions ALCplus2e 2x(1+0) with circulator two channels not adjacent (ACAP) or two channels adjacent (ACCP), have the following characteristics:
No XPIC,
single polarization antenna,
channel bandwidth: 28MHz or 40MHz one polarization
circulator losses <1,5 dB per link (Tx + Rx)
ODU:
AS 28MHz single channel ACAP at 7, 13, 15 GHz, and AS 40MHz single channel ACAP 6U, 11 GHz
High power ASN7HP 28MHz single channel ACCP, 7,1-7,4 and 7,4-7,7 GHz, other frequencies
available on request
9.6.6
4X(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler two CCDP channels
Fig.46 - Layout 4x(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler
84
MN.00224.E - 011
The solutions ALCplus2e 4x(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler two not adjacent channels or CCDP adjacent channels have the following characteristics:
XPIC,
channel bandwidth: 14MHz, 28MHz, 40MHz, 56 MHz Horizontal and Vertical polarization
Hybrid coupler losses: <4dB at TX and <4dB at RX (according frequency)
Four standard ASN ODUs same code
Ethernet combined into 2 dual pipes or 4 single pipes
9.6.7
4X(1+0) with XPIC, circulator, two CCDP channels
Fig.48 - Layout of 4x(1+0) with circulator
MN.00224.E - 011
85
The solutions ALCplus2e 4x(1+0) with XPIC, circulator coupler, two not adjacent channels or CCDP adjacent channels have the following characteristics:
XPIC,
channel bandwidth: 28MHz or 40MHz, two polarizations
circulators losses <1,5 dB per link (Tx+Rx)
ODU:
AS 28MHz single channel, two not adjacent channels at 7, 13, 15 GHz, and AS 40MHz single
channel, two not adjacent at 6U, 11 GHz
High power ASN7HP 28MHz single channel, CCDP, 7,1-7,4 and 7,4-7,7 GHz, other frequencies
Ethernet combined into 2 dual pipes or 4 single pipes
9.6.8
8X(1+0) with XPIC and multicirculator
See Fig.49 and Fig.50.
28
28
86
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.50 - 8x(1+0) with XPIC and multicirculator

The solutions ALCplus2e 8x(1+0) with XPIC, Multicirculators and 4 adjacent CCDP channels have the following characteristics:
XPIC,
channel bandwidth: 28MHz two polarizations CCDP
256QAM modulation, no ACM
branching loss <5 dB per link (TX + RX)
ODU:
-
High power ASN7HP 28MHz single channel CCDP, 7,1-7,4 and 7,4-7,7 GHz, other frequencies
same output power on all 8 ODUs
Ethernet: 4 dual pipes or 8 single pipes
A reflector must be mounted on multicirculator ports without ODU.
9.6.9
MULTICIRCULATOR FREQUENCY RESTRICTIONS
See Fig.51.
MN.00224.E - 011
87
Fig.51 - Slot numbering into multicirculator ODUs

7GHz 7L band frequencies are:
CH1: 7121 MHz
CH2: 7149 MHz
CH3: 7177 MHz
CH4: 7205 MHz
CH5: 7233 MHz
CH1: 7317 MHz
CH2: 7345 MHz
CH3: 7373 MHz
CH4: 7401 MHz
CH5: 7429 MHz
It is possible to select 4 frequency low or high . But the following limitation apply:
Dont use CH1 together with CH5.
Dont use CH1 together with CH5.
Channel arrangements into the multicirculator slots follow Tab.14
88
MN.00224.E - 011
Tab.14
9.7
Channel numbers
Channel numbers
CH 1,2,3,4
7L band
CH 2,3,4,5
7L band
SLOT1
CH4/CH4
CH5CH/5
SLOT2
CH3/CH3
CH4/CH4
SLOT3
CH2/CH2
CH3/CH3
SLOT4
CH1/CH1
CH2/CH2
SYNCHRONIZATION
Refer to Fig.52.
Into ALplus2e a synchronisation circuit, called SETS, gets the synchronisation signal from the following different sources:
radio A
radio B
STM1(1)
STM1 (2)
tributary A/B
tributary A/B as T3
tributary nE1
node1
node2
Lan A (Lan1,2,3,4) Gbit Electrical, (LAN 3, 4) Gbit Optical
Lan B (Lan1,2,3,4) Gbit Electrical, (LAN 3, 4) Gbit Optical
Internal source
The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required internal synchronisation signal T0.
Trib A or B selected as T3 can be the source of T4 signal (2MHz) for other equipment like for example into
nodal structure.
If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source is used for the local restart of STM1 generation.
Synchronization quality is connected to synchronization source (SSM).
All ALCplus2e SSM characteristics will be available from second FW release.
ALCplus2e manages quality information (synchronization status message SSM) from the following sources:
2MHz: from TribA/B selected as T3
MN.00224.E - 011
89
E1: tribA or triB for one 2Mbit/s within the 16 E1 available; quality info uses a spare bit of G.704
time slot 0 frame B.
STM1: Quality info is into S1 byte
Nodal interface: proprietary field into frame (to be announced)
Ethernet (ITU G.8264): a dedicated slow protocol transfers quality info (second FW release)
Radio: with a proprietary message.
ALCplus2e synchronization follows G813, G823, G8262 and G781.
(Sync transmitted via Radio frame timing)
Remote
Local
SETS
SETS
NBUS
STM-1
NBUS
LAN3, 4
TRIB A=
2MHz/2Mbit
STM-1
LAN3, 4
TRIB A=2MHz/2Mbit
TRIB B=2Mbit
TRIB B=2Mbit
TRIB 1-16=2Mbit
TRIB 1-16=2Mbit
Fig.52 - Synchronization circuit
9.8
ALCPLUS2E NODE
A node can be made up of max 8 subracks of ALCplus2e IDU so that we can have:
up to 8 maximum independent radio directions, with max 82E1 per direction
up to 8 STM1 MST or MSP
up to 8 x 16E1 = 128E1
up to 8 x 2 x 1Gbit Lan ports.
On the front panel of ALCplus2e there are two NBUS ports (1 and 2) which must be connected to the
other IDU subrack as in Fig.35 for E1 traffic and Ethernet traffic.
For Ethernet traffic Lan1 and Lan2 must be connected as in Fig.35 Lan1 and Lan2 connection can be made
with normal Lan cables CAT5e/CAT6.
NBUS connection among the IDUs are made by cables of CAT7 quality, only by proprietary SIAE cable to
insert into the NBUS connectors (1 and 2) on the front panel. See Tab.15 for cable length and SIAE code.
Warning: for NBUS do not use normal Lan cables.
For any IDU into WebLCT it is necessary to define how many IDU are into the Node from 2 to 8. Into WebLCT each IDU must be defined as node number 1, 2...8.
90
MN.00224.E - 011
NBUS can operate in Protected mode or in Not Protected mode. Each NBUS carries 126 E1s.
In case of Not Protected mode, all the 126 E1s of the NBUS are used to connect a subrack to the others
for a total amount of 252 E1 connections available on NBUSes from one IDU.
In case of Protected mode, the unused connections, are used as protection of the connections between the
other IDUs; for example 63 E1s are used between Node1 and Node2 and the other 63 E1s are used as
protection of the connections between the other nodes, the connections used as protection pass into others
IDUs as passthrough without any need to be programmed. The troubles in the connections between the
NBUS buses are identified by alarms.
In case of protected modality, if the cable carrying the traffic is broken, an alarm is issued on the relevant
NBUS port, the equipment software switches the traffic on the other operating NBUS cable.
For Ethernet traffic Lan1 and Lan2 must be connected as in Fig.35.
With SCT/LCT program it is possible to configure a Node made up of some Nodals so into the window of
Node Manager it is possible to program only one big Crossconnect matrix for E1 and only one Ethernet
switch for all Lan traffic.
The software hides all NBUS connection for E1 and Lan connection from an IDU to others IDUs, so to operate on one big Crossconnection matrix and one big Ethernet switch.
For any IDU the Node Manager shows for E1s 16E1, STM1 E1s, radio permanent E1, radio extra E1 and for
Ethernet Lan3, Lan4, radio port Port A.
The Nodal equipment with SDH STM1 interface is a Regenerator Section Termination (RST) and a Multiplex
Section Termination (MST) therefore it generates the STM-1 frame and has an internal synchronization circuit SETS. The synchronization of the Node can be distributed on the NBUS.
The IDUs subracks must be synchronised together via NBUS or other interface.
For each Nodal subrack, the STM-1 interface can be duplicated (1+1 MSP) for the possible protection of
cable. The switching criteria in Rx are:
Unequipped
LOS
LOF
MSAIS
TIM
B2 excessive BER
B2 degraded BER.
9.8.1
Expansion from 2 to 3 IDUs
Suppose that the nodals 1 and 2 already exist and that you must add the nodal 3.
Disconnect the cable between NBUS1 nodal2 and NBUS2 nodal1, the traffic is automatically switched to
the other cable, if necessary.
Disconnect the cable between LAN1 nodal2 and LAN2 nodal1, the traffic is automatically switched to the
other cable, if necessary.
By WebLCT or SCT/LCT, re-program the nodal1 and nodal2 as node with 3 items.
By WebLCT or SCT/LCT, re-program the nodal3 as nodal3, protected and define the node with 3 items.
Connect the NBUS1 of the nodal2 with NBUS2 of nodal3, connect the NBUS1 of the nodal3 with NBUS2 of
the nodal1 as in Fig.35.
Connect the LAN1 of the nodal2 with LAN2 of nodal3, connect the LAN1 of the nodal3 with LAN2 of the
nodal1 as in Fig.35. By SCT/LCT, with Nodal ALCplus2 Manager, Nodal Configuration add nodal3 IP address.
Program the interested cross-connections and Ethernet switch connections with external interfaces of
nodal3, Node Manager will take care of connections on NBUSes and LAN1, 2.
The same procedure can be used even if the added node is different from nodal3.
MN.00224.E - 011
91
9.8.2
Reduction from 3 to 2 IDUs
Suppose that the nodals 1, 2 and 3 already exist and that the nodal 3 must be removed.
By SCT/LCT, with ALCplus2/ALCplus2e Node Manager, delete all the cross-connections to the external interfaces of nodal3.
Remove the cables of the NBUS and LAN going to nodal3.
Connect nodal2 NBUS1 to nodal1 NBUS2 as in Fig.35.
Connect nodal2 LAN1 to nodal1 LAN2 as in Fig.35.
The same procedure can be used even if the deleted nodal is different from nodal3.
9.9
SWITCH FOR ETHERNET PORTS
Into WebLCT Configurator, Ethernet switch can be set as Enhanced = Absent, in this case the ALCplus2e
Ethernet functionalities are fully compatible to ALCplus2. With Enhanced = Present selection new Ethernet
fiunctionalities are present and are described in the following.
The external interfaces (4 operational on 6 present) are placed on the front panel. Internal port is represented by the local radio stream where, through native Ethernet transport, is connected with the remote
equipment.
Inside IDU is present an Ethernet switch with 4 external ports (electrical 1000BaseT or optical 1000BaseX)
and up two internal ports. Port 3 and Port 4 have both interfaces, Port 1 and Port 2 are electrical only.
The internal ports are represented by the local radio stream where through native Ethernet transport is
connected with the remote equipment. There is one internal port for 1+0 and 1+1 radio configuration.
In XPIC and in 2x(1+0) link configurations, two settings are available regarding the internal port:
dual pipe - two internal ports (port A and port B), one for each polarization/direction
single pipe - one internal port (port A) for both polarizations/directions.
For Ethernet switch functionalities, please refer to chapter 8 ALCplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION.
Other functionalities are:
92
monitoring on service type (outer or inner VLAN TAG) counters based on CVLAN or SVLAN (second
FW release)
QinQ selective VLAN based selective VLAN + priority based, port based
8 queues scheduler on Radio Port, with priority managed on all 8 queues, it is possible to select
whenever queue is full:
-
Tail Drop: last come packet is lost
Queue Drop: the queue is deleted, over a defined threshold all packets in the queue are discarded to limit latency time on traffic within this queue
RED (Random Early Discard) random automatic discard of packets, over a defined threshold
there is a defined high percentage of discarded, only for incoming packets to a port without CIR
(that is all packets have same priority)
WRED (Waited Random Early Discard) random automatic discard of packets, over a defined
threshold there is a defined high percentage of discarded, only for incoming packets (green or
yellow coloured) to a port with CIR
Drop profile settable
with MPLS incoming packets it is possible to remap Exp Bits MPLS to 802.1p Ethernet to manage
MPLS priority on Radio Port.
frame fragmentation: packets exiting on radio port are fragmented to reduce Latency Time Jitter
CIR/EIR/Max rate management, at the input of any physical Lan port for the packets exiting from
radio port it is possible to define: CIR Committed Information Rate (minimum guaranteed rate),
MN.00224.E - 011
Excessive Information Rate (maximum bit rate if bandwidth is available) Max Rate (maximum bit
rate, rate control) for any Lan port, for any CVLAN, for any SVLAN
VLAN re-writing with VLAN re-mapping
OAM 802.1ag
LINK CONCATENATION
Link Concatenation is a feature available on SIAE ALCplus2e equipment that allows assigning up to two
physical links to one logical link that functions as a single, higher-speed link.
Link Concatenation works aggregating two radio interfaces (single pipe). With XPIC it aggregates radio
traffic from Vertical polarization and radio traffic from horizontal polarization. Traffic speed on the two polarization can be different.
Algorithm of packets distribution on the two radios are statistically and proportional to traffic capacity giving the maximum throughput from the two radios.
Warning: if the two radio interfaces carry a too unbalanced Ethernet traffic, the combined Ethernet traffic
may be blocked.
ETHERNET PACKET FRAGMENTATION

On radio side it is possible to enable the Packet Fragmentation at 256 or 512 bytes. Smaller packets give
the benefit of lower delay variation (jitter) on the other packets maybe at higher priority.
EPP
Enhanced Packet Processing (EPP) is the possibility to compress the fixed field into the packets. Up to 68
byte of headers can be affected by compression algorithm giving a higher benefit to small packets.
VLAN REWRITING
In the direction from Lan ports to Radio ports the Vid of tagged packets can be rewritten according the
maps defined into WebLCT.
Vlan rewriting is provided only if into 802.1q Management it is selected Fallback.
With Fallback, Traffic Treatment=Transparent Port to Port Transport, Provider=Disable we can make a table with: Input CVLAN Vid to Output CVLAN Vid
With Fallback, Traffic Treatment=Transparent Port to Port Transport, Provider=Enable C_Vid Based we can
make a table with: Input CVLAN Vid to Output CVLAN Vid and output SVLAN Vid
With Fallback, Traffic Treatment=Transparent Port to Port Transport, Provider=Enable C_Vid Priority we
can make a table with: Input CVLAN Vid and Input priority to Output SVLAN Vid.
ENHANCED ETHERNET PRIORITIZATION BASED ON MPLS EXP BITS

In the direction from Lan ports to Radio ports MPLS packets are analysed in their Exp (Experimental) 3 bits
and sent into one of the 8 queues available to radio.
A programmable map into WebLCT defines for each value of Exp bits which queue (from 0 to 7 Max priority)
the packet will enter.
Another programmable map into WebLCT defines for each value of Exp bits which value of 802.1p priority
bit will be written into the Vlan Tag.
MN.00224.E - 011
93
CIR/EIR RATE MANAGEMENT / INPUT FILTER POLICY (e.g. LAN1)

In the direction from Lan ports to Radio ports.
Some definitions:
UNI
User Network Interface
CoS
Class of Service
EVC
Ethernet Virtual Connection
CIR
Committed Information Rate
EIR
Excess Information Rate
CBS
Committed Burst Size
EBS
Excess Burst Size
CF
Coupling Flag
CVID
Customer VLAN Identifier
SVID
Service VLAN Identifier
Committed Information Rate (CIR): The bandwidth that the service provider guarantees to the customer, regardless of network conditions.
Excess Information Rate (EIR): The bandwidth allowance for best effort delivery, for which service
performance is not guaranteed and traffic may be dropped if the network is congested.
The combination of CIR and EIR rates is typically referred to as PIR, or Peak Information Rate, which
represents the total burstable bandwidth sold to the customer.
Committed Burst Size (CBS): The maximum size, expressed in bytes, of a burst of back-to-back Ethernet frames for guaranteed delivery.
Excess Burst Size (EBS): The maximum size of a burst of back-to-back Ethernet frames permitted into
the network without performance guarantees. EBS frames may be queued or discarded if bandwidth is not
available.
According to MEF 10.2 (Metro Ethernet Forum) specifications, the bandwidth profile service attribute (Input Filter Policing), which includes some or all of the above categories, can be defined per UNI, per EVC or
per CoS identifier (CoS ID; EVC.CoS). For any given frame, however, only one such model can apply. The
service provider meets the bandwidth guarantees by reserving appropriate network resources and employing a two-rate/three-colour (trTCM) rate-limitation methodology as part of its traffic engineering policy to
ensure compliance by user traffic.
Green = Trasmitted:
CIR and CBS.
Yellow = Low Priority (dropped in case of congestion):
EIR and EBS.
Red = Dropped:
traffic exceeding EIR and EBS is dropped.
CIR (green)
CBS (green)
EIR (yellow)
EBS (yellow)
dropped (red)
dropped (red)
For any port it is possible to add a Input Filter Policy table with this selections:
Disable
Uni Port Based
EVC C_Vid Based
COS C_Vid + Priority Based
EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based
COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based
According the status of 802.1q Management> 802.1q settings =
94
Disable: you can select only Uni Port Based with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.
Fallback: two selections 1) EVC C_Vid Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with CIR, EIR, CBS and
EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with priority range,
CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.
MN.00224.E - 011
Secure: two selections 1) EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based: applied to a SVLAN S_Vid and a CVLAN C_Vid
with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a
SVLAN S_Vid and CVLAN C_Vid with priority range, CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.
Into ALCplus2e there is a total of 64 instances of Input Filter Policing for all the four ports into any radio
port.
Any CVID can be used into only one port.
Into same port same CVID can be reused but with different priority.
Priority Management (e.g. LAN1)

In the direction from Lan ports to Radio ports. Priority Management is dependant on the status of 802.1q
Management> 802.1q settings:
Disable: you can select only Uni Port Based with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.
Fallback: two selections 1) EVC C_Vid Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with CIR, EIR, CBS and
EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with priority range,
CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.
Secure (C_Vid Filtering): five selections 1) Port Default: priority defined by Default port Priority, all
packets entering this port have the same priority; 2) Native 802.1p (C_Vid): priority defined by
802.1p field in the CVLAN C_Vid; 3) Native TOS/DSCP: priority defined by Level 3 IP TOS/DSCP; 4)
Native MPLS: priority defined by MPLS Exp bits; 5) 802.1p(C_PCP) rewrite with MPLS: priority defined by PriorityLan to Radio > MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite (tab) map translation.
Secure (S_Vid Filtering, Provider=on): six selections 1) Port Default: priority defined by Default port
Priority, all packets entering this port have the same priority; 2) Native 802.1p (S_Vid): priority
defined by 802.1p field in the SVLAN S_Vid; 3) Native TOS/DSCP: priority defined by Level 3 IP
TOS/DSCP; 4) Native MPLS: priority defined by MPLS Exp bits; 5) 802.1p(C_PCP) rewrite (of CVLAN) with MPLS: priority defined by PriorityLan to Radio > MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite (tab) map translation; 6) 802.1p(S_PCP) rewrite (of SVLAN) with MPLS: priority defined by PriorityLan to Radio >
MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite (tab) map translation.
802.1q MANAGEMENT (e.g. Lan1)

Direction from Lan ports to Radio ports. Here you can select the input 802.1q: Disable, Fallback, Secure
mode.
You can select the Traffic Treatment with two possibilities: 1) Transparent Port to Port Transport; 2) Transparent Bridge Port Based.
1. Transparent Port to Port Transport : this is a setting for a simple application with 4 segragated connections Lan1 to remote Lan1, Lan2 to remote Lan2, Lan3 to remote Lan3, Lan4 to remote Lan4
with tagged and untagged traffic; some settings are needed locally and remote. Via radio (PortA)
the QinQ is used. From this configuration it is possible to add VLAN tags into Vlan Configuration
Table, prioritizing and OAM.
2. Transparent Bridge Port Based: this is a setting to create connections from radio port to Lan1,2,3,4
and from Lan1,2,3,4 to radio port.
With Provider> Enable C_Vid Based: into a tagged packet it is possible to rewrite from a defined Input
C_Vid to a defined Output C_Vid and add an Output S_Vid (a Service Vlan Identifier).
With Provider> Enable C_Vid + Priority: into a tagged packet, with a defined Input C_Vid and a defined
Input Priority it is possible to add an Output S_Vid (a Service Vlan Identifier).
A packet that locally is entering untagged, can be tagged on remote radio, with Untag to Tag checked.
MN.00224.E - 011
95
Queue Management Lan to Radio (e.g. Port A Enh.)

On radio Port A (and PortB if configured as 2x(1+0)) there are 8 Queues. Queue 8 has maximum priority.
For each queue length 128/256/512/1024 Kbit can be defined. Small queues have lower delay. Larger
queues have few drops.
Starting from lower priority queue, it is possible to use WFQ (Wait Fair Queue) exit policy. WFQ counts the
number of transmitted packets. For each Queue set as WFQ the queue priority can be defined changing
Weight value.
Fig.53 - RED curve

Drop type defines the drop policy, it can be:
Tail: this is the simplest dropping policy, last packet is dropped if queue is full;
Queue: if queue is full, all packets in the queue are dropped; packets are too old to be useful, so
all packets in the queue are dropped to reduce time delay at minimum;
See Fig.53.
96
RED (Random Early Drop): no packet are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches
Smin(G, Green), packets are dropped randomly until a percentage of Pmax and an Occupation %
of Smax(G) limits are reached, all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);
RED Gentle (Enable): no packets are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G,
Green); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G), packets
are dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and
Smax(G)/Pmax(G); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G) the percentage of randomly dropped packets is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/
100% ;
WRED (Weighted Random Early Drop): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets,
one line for Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy
(Lan1,2,3,4);
no green packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G, Green);
no yellow packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin (Y, Yellow);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/
Pmax(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) yellow packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/
Pmax(Y);
all green packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);
all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(Y);
MN.00224.E - 011
WRED Gentle (Enable): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets, one line for
Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy
(Lan1,2,3,4);
for Green packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/
Pmax(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G), the percentage of dropped green packets
is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/100%;
for Yellow packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(Y);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/
Pmax(Y);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(Y), the percentage of dropped green packets
is defined by the straight line between Smax(Y)/Pmax(Y) and Sgentle(Y)/100%;
WRED and WRED Gentle are very efficient to get the most from the radio link available traffic avoiding the
stop and go beavior (SAW trend) typical of congested TCP/IP traffic.
Warning: RED and WRED impact only TCP/IP traffic, not UDP traffic.
9.10
LAG - LINK AGGREGATION
Link Aggregation (LAG) is a feature available on ALCplus2e equipment that allows assigning up to four
physical links to one logical link (trunk) that functions as a single, higher-speed link. In ALCplus2e LAG is
named Trunking and two different implementations are possible:
Line trunking: it works by aggregating LAN interfaces.
Radio trunking: it works by aggregating radio interfaces.
Radio Trunking is available only when the Nodal Ethernet functionality is enabled. The nodal Ethernet configuration can be deployed on all the ALCplus2e IDU models.
9.10.1
Line Trunking
Line Trunking is available on the ALCplus2e IDU. ALCplus2e support IEEE 802.3ad LACP (Link Aggregation
Control Protocol). See Fig.54.
Fig.54 - Line trunking
MN.00224.E - 011
97
LACP allows a network device to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the
peer (directly connected device that also implements LACP). In addition to the increased capacity of the
logical link, LACP provides additional advantages:
failover detection when a link fails, allowing for a trunk reconfiguration in order to avoid systematic
packet loss (after the reconfiguration the packets will be lost only if the throughput exceed the trunk
capacity).
it introduces an agreement between the two LACP peers before to start data transmission over the
trunk. This prevent anomalous behaviour in case of cabling or configuration mistakes.
LACP works by sending frames (LACPDUs) over the links belonging to the trunk. Also the equipment deployed on the other end of the trunk will send LACP frames over the same links: this enables the two units
to establish the trunk. LACP can be configured two modes: active or passive. In active mode it will always
send frames along the configured links. ALCplus2e implements an "active" LACP.
Each IDU allows to define up to 4 different trunks on its LAN interfaces. A Line Trunk can aggregate up to
4 LAN interfaces with the following restrictions:
all the LAN interfaces must be defined with the same speed (either 10, 100 or 1000 Mbit/s).
all the LAN interfaces must be set in Full Duplex mode
all the interfaces must belong to the same IDU, even if the IDU is deployed in Nodal Ethernet configuration.
When a Trunk is defined on ALCplus2e, the end-to-end traffic is transmitted over all the aggregated lines.
As a results, the overall capacity of the trunk can be theoretically equal to the number of aggregated lines
multiplied by the capacity of a single line. In the example of Fig.27, four 100Mbs connection are grouped
into the same trunk, carrying all the capacity in transit from a radio link to another. In this configuration,
the theoretical maximum capacity that can transit on this trunk is 400 Mbit/s.
The packets carried by the trunk are assigned to each line depending on their Source MAC (SA) and Destination MAC (DA) Addresses (MAC hashing).
A possible problem that could occur when Link Aggregation protocols are used is a change in the transmission order of packets belonging to the same logical session. The MAC hashing method prevents such a
problem: the traffic transmitted from one host to another one in the network (fixed SA and DA) is always
sent over the same physical line of the trunk, avoiding any order change.
If a line of the trunk fails (for example due to a cable disconnection), the LACP protocol automatically reconfigure the trunk group into a lower order trunk. So doing, the traffic that before was carried over the
failed line, now will be re-distributed over one of the remaining trunk lines, ensuring continuity to the traffic
transmission. The typical LAG reconfiguration time in case of a LAN cable failure is below 1 second.
9.10.2
Radio Link Trunking
Radio Link Trunking is a feature available on ALCplus2e equipment when deployed in Nodal Ethernet configuration.
This feature allows to bundle up to 4 radio links to increase the capacity of an Ethernet connection between
two radio sites (see Fig.28).
Each Nodal Ethernet stack can belongs to one Radio Trunk. Each IDU of the trunk sends over the air only
a portion of the traffic, according to the same hashing rule used for the line trunking (see paragraph 8.6.1
Line Trunking). The traffic received from the radio trunk is sent towards the IDU where is located the outgoing interface according to standard MAC learning/switching mechanisms.
Resiliency between the radio links aggregated into the trunk is managed by means of a proprietary protocol. If a radio link of the trunk fails (due to fading or equipment failure), this protocol automatically reconfigure the trunk group into a lower order trunk. In this way, the traffic that before was carried over the
failed link, now will be re-distributed over one of the remaining trunk lines, ensuring continuity to the traffic
transmission. The typical Radio Trunk reconfiguration time is about 600msec.
It is important to note that also if it could be possible to aggregate up to four 340Mbit/s radio links (by
using 56 MHz frequency channel with 256 QAM modulation), the maximum capacity that can be carried
over the radio link cannot exceed 1Gbit/s in each direction of transmission (referring to Fig.28, from Site
A to Site B and vice-versa).
98
MN.00224.E - 011
Regarding multicast/broadcast, the total traffic entering the stack (sum of the packets entering from LAN3/
LAN4 interfaces and from the radio ports) cannot exceed 1Gbit/s. This because also the traffic received
from the radio trunk is flooded towards all the IDUs belonging to the Nodal Ethernet stack (MAC learning
cannot be performed over multicast packets).
9.11
LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP
ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) is a feature available on ALCplus2e IDU that allows to protect a GE interface
against cable failure or accidental disconnection. With ELP it is possible to connect an ALCplus2e IDU to
another network element by using two GE interfaces. Both interfaces are active but just one is enabled to
forward and receive traffic (forwarding state), while the other does not allow any traffic to pass (blocking
state). If the forwarding interface goes down, the other one passes to the forwarding state. The typical
switching time is around 1.5 sec. This feature does not imply the use of any protocol, but is simply based
on the status of the physical interfaces. As a consequence, no particular protocol support is required on
the connected equipment: it is simply required to enable the two GE interfaces.
When the Nodal Ethernet configuration is used, ELP can be used to protect the traffic of two GE interfaces
belonging to two different IDUs of the stack. In this way the traffic can be protected against IDU failure,
in addition to the cable protection.
This feature is particularly useful when the Nodal stack is connected to an external equipment like a core
router (see the example of the following Fig.29).
It is recommended to disable any Spanning Tree protocol on the external equipment: this could cause longer traffic recovery times.
9.12
ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE)
As native Ethernet is originally designed for LAN (local Area Network), OAM is not included into the native
Ethernet network equipment. In order to provide a carrier grade service, the OAM protocol can be used in
any point-to-point Ethernet link (made up of a single radio link or many radio links). The aim of this protocol is to check and monitor the functionality of the service that the provider guarantees on the network.
9.12.1
Service Layer OAM
The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and reporting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional features, like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.
ALCplus2e supports CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.
Ethernet Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators. Since the spectrum of application
can include many applications a more hierarchical structure is needed.
MN.00224.E - 011
99
The Standards define:
Maintenance Domains (MD): these specify the Domains of operators, users and service providers.
Levels from 0 to 7 are possible depending on the type of service to be monitored. Customer Domain
is the higher which includes both ends of the Ethernet service (from one End user to the other End
user), Standard Default values for Customer Domain are 7, 6 and 5. Service Provider Domains
should have a MD lower than the Customer Domain since include the whole network except the End
Users. Standard default values for Provider Domains are 3 and 4. Operator Domains are lower than
Service Provider Domains since just a part of the network is included. Standard Default values for
operator domains are 0, 1 and 2. A domain is transparent to all messages with higher priority while
blocking all lower priority messages. Fig.30 shows the hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains.
ALCplus2e equipment belongs to one Maintenance Domain.

At each end of the Maintenance Domain two MEPs (Maintenance End Point) will be specified. One MEP is
local, the other one is in the remote equipment. The MEPs are "markers" that defines the end of a domain
and are in charge of originating OAM frames.
In a domain also MIPs (Maintenance Intermediate Points) can be specified. The MIPs are passive checkpoints. The MEPs and MIPs configuration are discussed in details in the following points. The choice of the
domain that is the Domain Label (name) is left to the user. Particular attention must be paid to use exactly
the same MD label (and level) in each equipment where the MD is specified, i.e. different equipment with
same value of MD domain but different MD labels (or levels) belongs to different Domains.
A Maintenance Association (MA) is one association which correlates the VLAN to the MD in which
the MEPs and MIPs have to be defined.
When a specified traffic needs to be monitored, then it is necessary to relay the VLAN to a Domain
and to the corresponding MEPs or MIPs through the MA. Before creating the Maintenance Association, the VLAN, either SVLAN (Service VLAN Tag o Stacked VLAN Tag) or C-VLAN, has to be specified
in the VLAN Table. In each SIAE equipment it is possible to set up to 32 different MA. Particular
attention must be paid to use the same MA label in each equipment where the MA is specified, i.e.
different MA labels on the same VLAN correspond to different MA associations.
At the Edge of a MD there are MEPs (Maintenance End Points) and in the middle there could be MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points). MEPs are the units in charge of managing the CFM to correctly
monitor the status of the Ethernet service provided. MIPs are passive check-points that answer to
polling coming from MEPs. MEPs will forward OAM messages coming from higher domains and will
discard OAM messages generated from lower domains.
Each interface can be configured as MEP, Port A interface (radio interface) included. Once chosen
the interface, depending on the network topology, the direction of the MEP has to be specified. Two
Directions are possible, MEP "up" and MEP "Down". With MEP "Down" configured the OAM PDUs are
sent from the interface in the direction outside the equipment, i.e. the OAM PDUs are sent from the
interface on the cable toward next equipment. With MEP "Up" configured the OAM PDUs are sent
from the interface toward the inside of the equipment and will follow the VLAN table previously configured. MEPs are distinguished from each other through a MEP ID, therefore MEPs belonging to
same MA must have different MEP Ids. In order to configure a MIP the MA has to be enabled on the
equipment. Up to 32 MIPs or MEPs can be configured on each equipment.
The protocols belonging to the Connectivity Fault Management implemented in SIAE equipment are following listed:
100
Continuity Check Protocol: this protocol enables the sending of a periodic message (like a Heartbeat
message) which enables the other MEPs deployed in the network to distinguish the status of a virtual connection. This message can only be originated by a MEP. Time between messages is adjustable with 1s, 10s, 1min, 10min. These messages do not trigger any automatic reply from the
destination entity.
LoopBack Protocol: it resembles an IP PING message; once this message is sent (e.g. MEP1 sends
a Loopback Message to MEP2). MEP2 replies to MEP1 confirming therefore the status of the connection. This is done to check the status of the connection between the MEP originating the message
and the MEP/MIP to which the message is addressed. This message can only be originated from one
MEP and can be addressed to both MEPs or MIPs. ALCplus2e: The number of Loopback Messages in
ALCplus2e is adjustable from 1 to 5 consecutive Loopbacks. In each equipment, it is possible for
each MEP to check the presence of other MEPs in the same MA. This is done through the "Remote
MEP" application which allows this acknowledgement and distinguishes the other MEP through
means of MEP IDs and MAC address.
Link Trace Protocol: This protocol sends a message similar to the LoopBack protocol. Every equipment that is reached by this message will answer to the sender providing its own MAC Address. In
this way the sender is able to understand of which equipment the MA is composed. E.g. a MEP sends
the Link Trace Message to another MEP belonging to the same Maintenance Association. The MIPs
MN.00224.E - 011
that are eventually deployed in the middle of the path will forward this message and answer to the
initiating MEP with their own MAC Address. By doing so the initiating MEP knows the OAM-devices
deployed in the path and their order.
Remote Defect Indicator: This Feature allows a MEP, in presence of a fault or a defect, to send a
RDI to inform the other MEPs, belonging to the same MA, of the presence of this Defect. The advantages of this procedure are to avoid multiple Alarms created by the same cause and to be able
to check the status of other Remote MEPs. This RDI information is reported in the Continuity Check
Message. ALCplus2e: This feature is present in ALCplus2e equipment and the presence of this alarm
can be checked as well in the Remote MEPs screen on the equipment.
9.12.2
OAM Example with ALCplus2e
As an example, let's consider a network where a sequence of 8 SIAE ALCplus2e Radio links is deployed. In
this case a Maintenance Domain, a VLAN and a Maintenance Association have to be defined. The VLAN carrying the traffic must be present in the VLAN table of each equipment.
Two MEPs at the end of the chains and a variable number of MIPs in the middle has to be defined with
Continuity Check Message (CCM) enabled.
In case of defect or Ethernet problem, the Continuity Check Message will result in an "Inactive" status triggering one Alarm.
By logging on one MEP it is sufficient to configure the Loopback message and Link Trace Message correctly
detects the location of the Bottleneck or defect related to this traffic. If More than one VLAN is present then
more than one MA has to be defined.
9.13
ALCPLUS2E FIRMWARE UPDATES
In this chapter are described the new features available with new firmware releases.
FW update procedure
The order of file download is the following:
1. FW_Boot E82103
2. FW_appl N90656
3. WEBLCT N96109
All the files are in a compressed container called System Version v.XX.YY.ZZ.
If ODU needs a firmware update, it must be done after there three.
9.13.1
MN.00224.E - 011
101
IEEE 1588 Pass Through

When SyncE is not available in all transmission chain, the synchronization protocol IEEE 1588v2 can be
used: this synchronization protocol allows distributing the CK through the network by means of protocol
packets.
The IEEE1588v2 is based on time stamps sent from a Master Clock Source to one or more Slave.
In one link both sides can be elected as Master but not at the same time : if one side is Master, the other
is Slave.
Enabling IEEE 1588 Pass Through an extra queue with maximum priority is generated. The transit delay
on radio link at different modulation is fixed. Jitter on 1588 packets is reduced activating packet fragmentation.
The acknowledgement of the 1588 Frames in ALCplus2e can be done depending on different sections of
the header with different filtering options, listed below, that are mutually exclusive. It is possible to configure:
UDP based PTP Filtering (destination Port) - Default Configuration: the 1588 Frames are filtered
based on the Destination port (319 or 320 depending on the type of 1588 frames)
Ethernet based PTP Filtering: The 1588 frames are filtered based on the Ethertype (Ox88F7)
C-TAG based PTP Filtering: The 1588 frames are filtered amongst all the traffic marked with a precise C-Tag.
S-TAG based PTP Filtering: The 1588 frames are filtered amongst all the traffic marked with a precise S-Tag.
C-TAG+S-TAG based PTP Filtering: The 1588 frames are filtered amongst all the traffic marked with
a precise Combination of C-Tag and S-Tag.
By enabling this "Pass Through" on 1588 Frames, the equipment automatically enables the "Ethernet
Frames Fragmentation" to 256 Bytes.
RMON
RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
SIAE equipment support RMONv1.
SIAE NMS systems collect periodically RMON data and store it into the network database.
The RMON implementation in SIAE Network Elements is classified into two groups:
1. RMON - Statistics
2. RMON - History
From Firmware release 1.3.1, RMON is available also on VLAN basis and Priority basis and can be shown
into SIAE NMS software.
FADE MARGIN
After installation of radio link and before assign traffic to it, it is possible to test and compare the "calculated" fade margin from link budget with "real fade margin verified" supplied as result after the fade margin
test.
This result can be printed and used as a benchmark of the quality of the installation.
In case of 1+1 configuration the test is applied on all the four ODU. Each of the four TX are attenuated one
by one reaching the threshold at opposite RX side (both radios) so measuring the link fade margin.
Service Tag user defined

Into LAN1, 2, 3, 4 ports in the 802.1q Management card, when the 802.1q setting is set "Disabled", the
Service Tag can be defined by the user for each port of the switch.
102
MN.00224.E - 011
New SFP modules

ALCplus2e is now compatible with new SFP modules: 1000BaseLX 40Km and 80 Km. Optical plugin modules must be supplied by SIAE.
See chapter 6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.
9.13.2
Lan Port Speed

Only for electrical LAN port.
In each of the four LAN port the autonegotiation can be limited up to 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 1 Gbps.
Header compression with Ethernet and MPLS

From this firmware release it is available the header compression for packets with Ethernet over MPLS over
Ethernet.
SSM on all LAN ports

From this firmware release it is available the management of SSM, Synchronization Status Messages.
SSM allows:
SSM can be enabled on all the LAN ports in order to distribute the Quality of the clock, according Rec.
G.8264/Y.1364.
VLAN on Management port

VLAN on Management port 1 and on Management port 2 can be defined independently. Management ports
can communicate, without VLAN, with/without VLAN, only with VLAN.
Input Storming Prevention

For Lan ports the PIRL (Port Ingress Rate Limiter) can be defined for Broadcast, Unknown Multicast, Unknown Unicast, Unicast, ARP packets.
SSH security
SSH protocol and SFTP file transfer can be enabled in ALCplus2e.
SFTP can be used to download new system version to the equipment and also to transfer PM, RMON, Alarm
log and Command log.
MN.00224.E - 011
103
9.13.3
New IDUs with updated hardware allow new features that are available with firmware release 1.5.0
STM1 bulk transmission
HW PWE3 ready
STM1 bulk transmission

STM-1 bulk transmission is possible with compatible HW (see detailed IDU part number into IDU composition chapter at the end of the manual)
STM-1 transmission is possible only with channel bandwidth of 56 MHz, 40 MHz, 28 MHz.
One STM-1 stream can be transmitted by 1+0 and 1+1 configurations.
Up two STM-1 streams can be transmitted with 2+0 configuration.
HW PWE3 ready
PWE3 (Pseudowire Emulation Edge to Edge) is a protocol to transfer a point to point TDM connection via
Ethernet network.
PWE3 will be possible only with compatible HW (see detailed IDU part number into IDU composition chapter
at the end of the manual).
9.13.4
New features are available with firmware release 1.5.1
ACM setting
Into ACM settings lower modulation can be selected up to 4QAM up to 4QAMs.
9.13.5
Management of CWDM SFP module from any supplier

This release increases the range of CWDM SFP modules that can be used in the IDU.
ITU_T G8032 Ethernet ring protection

Ethernet Ring Protection Switching, or ERPS, (ITU-T G.8032 Rec.) provides sub-50ms protection and
recovery switching for Ethernet traffic in a ring topology and at the same time ensuring that there are no
loops formed at the Ethernet layer.
SNMP-V3 management
SNMPv3 defines a secure versione of SNMP and facilitates remote configuration of the SNMP entities.
104
MN.00224.E - 011
ACM ramp to max power (requires ODU AS03 N00053 01.03.00 and ODU ASN N00054
02.01.00)
This features allows activating an additional ACM power mode named Ramp to max Power. If no attenuation is applied to the link (i.e. RTPC=0), the Ramp to Max. Power mode has the same behaviour of
the Ramp to Ref. Modulation mode. Both the power modes automatically set the equipment transmitted
power according to the active modulation, as follows:
from Upper Modulation to Reference Modulation: the Tx power increases according to the active
modulation
from Reference Modulation to Lower Modulation: the Tx power keeps constant in order to comply
with the Reference modulation mask.
If the equipment transmitted power is limited by means of a fixed attenuation (i.e. RTPC>0), the Ramp
to Max. Power mode allows the equipment to reach for each modulation the maximum allowed power
(i.e. the highest value between the maximum Tx power of the modulation and the maximum equipment
power set by the user).
More than 64 VLAN (up to 4096)

The maximum number of VLAN managed by IDU is now 4096.
Extended buffer (128Mb) on Ethernet queues of radio port

This release assigns up to 128 Mbit (16 Mbyte) to a single queue.
The following buffer configurations are available on the 8 output queues of the radio port:
each queue is configurable from 128 kbit to 128 Mbit (see the below screenshot of the queue configuration)
every radio port has a total available buffer of 184 Mbit (23 Mbyte), so the sum of the 8 output
queues lengths of a single radio port does not have to exceed this value.
LAN statistics enhanced: extension to 64 bit of priority and service counters

In addition to the Ethernet Counters per Port, it is possible to set on the Radio port the RMON counters per
Service (Vlan) or Priority (Queues). Differently from the previous RMON counters, the Service and Priority
counters can be activated for the following variables.
Octets Tx: total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.
Pkts Tx: total number of packets (all kind of packets) transmitted.
Octets Rx: total numbers of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.
Pkts Rx: total number of packets (all kind of packets) received.
DropEvents: total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the interface due
to lack of resources.
The Service and Priority RMON can be activated and collected from NMS (Network Management System).
The Service and Priority RMON are based on the Advanced Ethernet Counters present on the equipment
and configurable on site. This means that on site it is possible to activate the Advanced Ethernet Counters
but not the Service and Priority RMON.
In any case the NMS has higher priority in respect to the configuration inserted by WebLCT.
This means that the local operator can enable and read the active measure, but when the configuration of
these RMON is done through NMS, the local operator can only read the values of the Advanced Ethernet
Counters.
It is not possible to enable the RMON for Priority and, in the same equipment, the RMON per Vlan.
MN.00224.E - 011
105
Priority RMON: based on the internal Queue of the equipment, not on the value of the Priority: this implies
that:
the maximum number of RMON (Priority) that can be enabled are limited to 8, i.e. the number of
the queues available in ALCplus2e equipment.
if traffic with different priorities are listed in the same queue, the Priority RMON will work with one
Probe on the Queue. I.e. the traffic in the same Queue is seen as Same Priority Traffic and the
Priority RMON counts the frames belonging to the Queue.
In other words, with Priority RMON there is a probe for each queue (8 queues in ALCplus2e). Each probe
counts the variables listed above (Octets Tx, Pkts Tx, Octets Rx, Pkts Rx and Drop Events).
These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.
Service RMON: it allows the equipment to track the variables listed above depending on the Service (Vlan
Tag). This type of RMON can be set only on the Radio interface.
Each equipment can be set to collect RMON up to 32 Services (Vlan Tag) and only on Customer Tag. These
counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.
9.13.6
Ports in secure mode allowing untagged traffic

This feature allows adding/removing a Tag on the Q3 ports (MNGT1 and MNGT2) by configuring the MNGT
ports in Secure Mode while in the past it was only possible to enable the VLAN Tagging in Fallback mode
on MNGT ports.
The Q3 ports could be set in Secure mode (Enable Secure) with specifying the VLAN ID the Ethernet traffic has to be tagged by.
Egress shaping functionality

This feature allows limiting the egress throughput of the ALCplus2e LAN interfaces, by properly exploiting
the buffer of this port.
The egress shaping rate can be configured with the following values:
if Egress Rate < 1Mbit/s: 64kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 512 kbit/s
if Egress Rate > 1 Mbit/s & Egress Rate <10 Mbit/s: values with granularity of 1 Mbit/s
if Egress Rate > 10 Mbit/s (up to 1 Gbit/s): values with granularity of 10 Mbit/s.
In this way each Ethernet port has separate limits for input and output throughput.
Asymmetric Link Loss Forwarding functionality

In some cases, the radio link failure can be unidirectional, for example when the local equipment has an
Rx signal failure but the remote Rx signal is OK (i.e. unidirectional radio fail due to failure of a transmitter).
However, also in these cases there can be the need to shutdown the link in both directions even if there is
only a unidirectional link failure.
Using the bidirectional LLF feature, in case of LLF in the local equipment, the local equipment can notify
this LLF status to the remote equipment, shutting down the link on both directions.
WEBLCT management with HTTPs protocol

This feature allows a secure HTTP connection with WebLCT, in addition to the already existing HTTP connection.
106
MN.00224.E - 011
HTTPS provides a secure client/server connection between the equipment (server) and the user connected
with WebLCT (client). The encryption of communications between client and server allows protecting
against third party intrusions that may read/forge the contents of the communication (Man in the Middle
Attack).
SIAE Implementation:
HTTP/HTTPS protocols have been implemented in an exclusive way, so that, when a user is connected using HTTPS, HTTP requests will be redirected in HTTPS and vice versa. So, when the user
connects to the IP address of the equipment by means of a Web browser, it is automatically connected through HTTP or HTTPS depending on the WebLCT security configuration
C.A. Certificate and SSL Certificate provide the encryption keys for the secure connection. These
certificates can be uploaded on the equipment through Certificate Upload Manager on WebLCT.
The user can switch to HTTPS only if the SSL certificates have been uploaded on the equipment.
HTTPS configuration on SIAE equipment:

In order to switch the WebLCT to HTTPS, the following steps have to be followed:
1. upload the C.A. and SSL Certificates on the equipment
2. enable the HTTPS feature
3. Re-load the equipment web page and make a new HTTPS login.
Management of the following feature keys: Ethernet header compression, G.8032, STM1-bulk, security package.
From this fw release the following functionalities can be enabled by means of a specific SIAE feature key.
Input filtering policing extension on the basis of SVID and SVID+Priority

EVC S-Vid Based (Bandwidth Profile per S_VID): a different profile is defined for different Service VLANs.
Up to 64 VLAN can be managed with different profiles.
COS S_Vid + Internal Priority (Bandwidth Profiles per S_VID+CoS): a different profile is defined for different couples S_VID+priority queue (up to 64 different cases can be managed). In this case the priority
queue from 0 to 7 (i.e. internal switch priority) is considered by the rate limiting algorithm and independently from the enabled QoS management (e.g. IEEE 802.1p, IPv4 ToS/DSCP, IPv6 TC/DSCOP).
Possibility to define two different rules inside the switch, port to port, to forward the
incoming frames: destination address + VID basis (bridge scenario) or VID basis
(pipe scenario).
This new feature allows the user to set the MAC forwarding rule od each LAN interface (i.e. LAN1, LAN2,
LAN3 and LAN4). Two different forwarding rules are available:
Destination Address + VID Basis: packets are forwarded on the basis of their destination MAC address and
VLAN ID. This is most commonly deployed rule (I.e. default setting).
VID Basis: packets are forwarded on the basis of their VLANID. The destination MAC address is NOT considered in this case. This rule is used only in some specific cases.
9.13.7
Management packets with priority 7

All the management packets sent towards MNGT1 and MNGT2 ports and towards radio EOC have priority
1 (802.1p)
MN.00224.E - 011
107
9.14
FIRMWARE UPDATES FOR ALCPLUS2E 1+1 XPIC
In the following are described the new features available in ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC with new firmware releases. Only the main releases are considered (....the firmware releases with new features).
9.14.1
The new features included in this release are the following.
MAC Address Table

The MAC address in the MAC address Table can be managed also in this way
MAC Learning on Vid Basis: MAC address table can be managed depending on Vid
MAC on port basis: MAC address table can be managed depending on port.
Management Port Speed

The two management ports can set in different ways separately:
Full duplex 10M
Half duplex 10M
Full duplex 100M
Half duplex 100M
Auto-Speed-Dplx (the speed is set automatically during the handshake of the interfaces).
Bandwidth available
40 MHz and 56 MHz bandwidth can be selected.
10E1 expansion
IDU with expansion 16E1 an relevant cross-connection matrix can be managed and used.
9.14.2
The new feature included in this release is the following.
SSM management in synchronization sources

The SSM management (quality status of a synch source) is available on the following sources:
108
STM-1
Nodal Bus
MN.00224.E - 011
E1
SSM allows:
9.14.3
OAM
The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and reporting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional features like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.
SIAE ALCplus2e supports CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.
Ethernet Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators.
9.14.4
SSM management is synchronization sources on LAN ports

SSM can be enabled on all the LAN ports in order to distribute the Quality of the clock, according rec.
G.8264/Y.1364.
9.14.5
LAN port Ingress Rate Limiting

New values are available in each LAN port to limit the input throughput (PIRL - Port based Ingress Rate
Limiting).
MN.00224.E - 011
109
up to
126E1
A
D
M
STM1-1
STM1-2
up to 80E1
Cross
Connect
Matrix
permanent
up to 21E1
R
a
d
i
o
up to 32E1
NBUS1
NBUS2
Trib A/B
Port A
Switch
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4
Fig.55 - ALCplus2e block diagram
STM1/3
NMS
to ODU 1B (V)
STM1/4
to ODU 2B (H)
Slave
SPEED
LAN 2
LAN 4
Trib. B
STM1
1
ON
MNGT
LAN 3
Trib. 9-16
2
1
LAN 1
1
SW
Trib. A
LAN 3
STM1/1
48V
NURG URG
LCT
LINK
M 3.15A
250V
NBUS
LAN 4
1
R
GREEN
Trib. 1-8
1
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
to ODU 1A (V)
STM1/2
YELLOW
to ODU 2A (H)
Master
SPEED
LAN 2
LAN 4
Trib. B
STM1
1
ON
MNGT
LAN 3
LINK
LAN 1
LAN 3
Trib. A
M 3.15A
250V
NURG URG
48V
1
LCT
Trib. 9-16
2
NBUS
LAN 4
1
GREEN
Trib. 1-8
1
SW
USER IN/OUT
TEST ON
YELLOW
Fig.56 - ALCplus2e 1+1 layout
110
MN.00224.E - 011
EST
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 4
Trib. 17-24
Trib. 9-16
LAN 4
LAN 1
LAN 3
Trib. A
NURG URG
M 3.15A
250V
48V
1
LCT
R
LINK
Trib. 25-32
2
ON
LAN 3
1
GREEN
Trib. 1-8
2
MNGT
SW
USER IN/OUT
TEST ON
YELLOW
WEST
Fig.57 - ALCplus2e 2+0 layout
MN.00224.E - 011
111
Rx1
DEM
H data
V data
H
XPIC
XPIC
V
Rx2
DEM
Fig.58 - Frequency reuse system
112
MN.00224.E - 011
10
ODU DESCRIPTION
10.1
ODU VERSIONS
Two ODU versions are available: AS and ASN.

In the following pages eventual differences are pointed out.
The ODU (refer to Fig.59) consists of a two shell aluminium mechanical structure, one shell housing all the
ODU circuits, the other forming the covering plate.
On the ODU are accessible:
the N type connector for cable interfacing IDU and ODU
the BNC connector for connection to a multimeter with the purpose to measure the received field
strength
a ground bolt.
The 1+1 configuration consists of two 1+0 ODUs mechanically secured to a structure housing the hybrid
(or branching unit) for the antenna connection.
10.1.1
AS ODU
The AS ODU is shown in Fig.59 (single ODU) and in Fig.60 (1+1 ODU with branching unit). Electrical and
mechanical characteristics are listed in a separate addendum relevant to ODU frequency.
10.1.2
ASN ODU
The ASN ODU is shown in Fig.59 (single ODU) and in Fig.60 (1+1 ODU with branching unit). Electrical and
mechanical characteristics are listed in a separate addendum relevant to ODU frequency.
10.2
DESCRIPTION
The blocks that arrange the ODU are the following:
cable interface
power supply
Tx section
Rx section
1+1 branching unit
MN.00224.E - 011
113
10.3
CABLE INTERFACE
The cable interface permits to interface the cable interconnecting IDU to ODU and viceversa.
It receives/transmits the following signals:
330 MHz (from IDU to ODU)
140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU)
5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
remote power supply.
The 17.5 MHz and 5.5 MHz FSK modulated carriers, carry the telemetry channel. This latter consists of two
388 kbit/s streams one from IDU to ODU with the information to manage the ODU (RF power, RF frequency, capacity, etc...) while the other, from ODU to IDU, sends back to IDU measurements and alarms of the
ODU. The ODU management is made by a P.
10.4
POWER SUPPLY
The battery voltage is dropped from the cable interface and then sent to a DC/DC converter to generate
three stabilized output voltages to be distributed to the ODU circuitry.
10.5
TX SECTION
Refer to block diagram shown in Fig.61.

The 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier from the cable interface (see chapter 10.3 CABLE INTERFACE) is forwarded to a mixer passing through a cable equalizer for cable loss compensation up to 40 dB at 330 MHz.
The mixer and the following bandpass filter give rise to a second IF Tx carrier the frequency of which depends on the go/return frequency value. The mixer is of SHP type.
All the IF and RF local oscillators are P controlled.
The IF carrier is converted to RF and then amplified making use of a MMIC circuit. The conversion mixer is
SSB type with side band selection.
The power at the MMIC output can be manually attenuated by 40 dB, 1 dB step (20dB, 1dB step for ODU
ASN).
The automatic adjustment is performed making use of an ATPC (see paragraph 10.5.1 ATPC operation for
details). The regulated output power is kept constant against amplifier stage gain variation by a feedback
including the AGC.
Before reaching the antenna side the RF signal at the output of MMIC passes through the following circuits:
a tea-clipper plus detector diode to measure the output power
a circulator to protect the amplifier stages against possible circuit mismatch.
a ON/OFF switch for 1+1 operation
an RF passband filter for antenna coupling.
A particular setting of Tx and Rx RF oscillators allows to obtain a RF Loop, managed by Controller module.
The particular way used to perform the RF loop avoids the necessity to switch off the remote Transmitter.
RF Loop is available in AS ODU only.
114
MN.00224.E - 011
10.5.1
ATPC operation
The ATPC regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter depending on the value of the RF level at
the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local terminal as threshold high and low. The
difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher than 3 dB.
As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low (see Fig.64) due to the increase of the
hop attenuation, a microP at the received side of the remote terminal sends back to the local terminal a
control to increase the transmitted power. The maximum ATPC range is 40 dB (ODU AS, 20dB only in ODU
ASN)
If the hop attenuation decreases and the threshold high is crossed then the control sent by the microP
causes the output power to decrease.
10.6
RX SECTION
The RF signal from the Rx passband filter is sent to a low noise amplifier that improves the receiver sensitivity. The following downconverter translates the RF frequency to approximately 765 MHz. The conversion mixer is SSB type. The sideband selection is given through a P control.
A second down converter generates the 140 MHz IF carrier to be sent to the demodulator within the IDU.
The level of the IF carrier is kept constant to 5 dBm thank to the IF amplifier stages, AGC controlled,
distributed in the IF chain.
Between two amplifiers a passband filter assures the required selectivity to the receiver. The filter is SAW
type and the bandwidth depends on the transmitted capacity.
10.7
1+1 TX SYSTEM
The two ODUs are coupled to the antenna side via a balanced or unbalanced hybrid.
1+1 Tx switching occurs in the 1+1 hot standby 1 antenna or 2 antennas versions as shown in Fig.62 and
Fig.63.
The transmitter switchover is controlled by Processor and the attenuation of the stand-by transmitter is
at least 50 dB.
MN.00224.E - 011
115
Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU side flange
ASN version
"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
AS version
Fig.59 - AS and ASN ODUs
116
MN.00224.E - 011
ASN version
Suncover (optional)
AS version
Fig.60 - Final 1+1 assembly with AS and ASN ODU
MN.00224.E - 011
117
Fig.61 - ODU block diagram
118
MN.00224.E - 011
PRx
meas.
BNC
N type
330
MHz
AGC
140
MHz
REC
17.5
MHz
MOD
5.5
5.5
MHz MHz
17.5
MHz
Cable
interface
-48 V
Vdc
Vdc
DEM
17.5
MHz
388
kbit/s
ctrl
Alarm
manag
&
control
variable
bandwidth
(capacity
depending)
388
kbit/s
MUX
DEMUX
Cable
equaliz.
to RF circuitry
to IF circuitry
to radio controller
140
MHz
Alm
comm
loops
ctrl
Rx
IF LO
unit
Tx
IF Rx
ctrl
IF Tx
0 to 40 dB (ODU AS)
0 to 20 dB (ODU ASN)
PTx att.
control
AGC
Rx LO
Tx LO
MMIC
LNA
antenna
side
Tx side
SW control
Rx side
Antenna
side
Tx side
SW control
Rx side
Fig.62 - 1+1 hot standby 1 antenna
Tx side
SW control
First
antenna
Rx side
Tx side
SW control
Second
antenna
Rx side
Fig.63 - 1+1 hot standby 2 antennas
MN.00224.E - 011
119
Remote PRx
dBm
Local
Remote
Rx
Tx
Thresh High
PRx recording
level
PTx actuation
Thresh Low
P
P
PTx control
Transmission
Rx
Tx
of PTx control
Hop attenuation (dB)

Local PTx
dBm
PTx max.
40 dB (ODU AS)
20 dB (ODU ASN)
ATPC range
PTx min.
Hop attenuation (dB)
Fig.64 - ATPC operation
120
MN.00224.E - 011
Section 3.
INSTALLATION
11
INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
11.1
GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION
The equipment is a split mount (indoor-outdoor) radio link system operating in the frequency ranges 4, 6,
7, 8, 13, 15, 18, 23, 25, 28 and 38 GHz, for low, medium and high transport capacity (from 4 up to 622
Mbit/s), designed to establish LAN-LAN connections and PDH/SDH access. For the details related to the
actual used frequency band refer to the label on the equipment.
The system is provided with an integral antenna; however, in case its antenna is not used, it should be
connected to an antenna conforming to the requirements of ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 for the relevant frequency band.
The equipment is composed by the following separate units:
radio unit (outdoor) with or without integral antenna
Baseband (indoor)
Warning: This equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.

Warning: Class 2 radio equipment subject to Authorisation of use. The equipment can operate only at the
frequencies authorised by the relevant National Authority.
Warning: The deployment and use of this equipment shall be made in agreement with the national regulation for the Protection from Exposure to Electromagnetic Field.
Warning: The symbol
indicates that, within the European Union, the product is subject to separate
collection at the product end-of-life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For
more information, please contact the relevant supplier for verifying the procedure of correct disposal.
MN.00224.E - 011
121
11.2
GENERAL
The equipment consists of IDU and ODU(s) units and is mechanically made up of a wired 19 subrack (IDU)
and a weather proof metallic container (ODU). The two units are shipped together in an appropriate cardboard box.
After unpacking, mechanical installation takes place followed by electrical connections as described in the
following paragraphs.
The installation phases of the whole system are described in the following paragraphs and it must be done
only by service person suitably trained.
11.3
11.3.1
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
IDU
On their sides the subracks making up the several IDU versions are provided with two holes for the M6
screws fastening the subracks to a rack or to a 19 mechanical structure. The front of the IDU mechanical
structure is provided with the holes at the sides. This permits to fasten the subrack to a 19 rack by means
of 4 M6 screws.
11.3.2
IDU installation
ALPlus2 - To avoid overtemperature problems the free space below and above an IDU must be 22 mm
(1/2RU) minimum.
ALCPlus2 - IDUs can be stacked.
ALCPlus2e - IDUs can be stacked.
11.4
ELECTRICAL WIRING
The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment responds to the
electromagnetic compatibility standards.
The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on
the equipment front.
Position and pinout of the equipment connectors are available in this section.
Tab.15 shows the characteristics of the cables to be used and the flying connector types.
122
MN.00224.E - 011
Tab.15 - Characteristics of the cables

Interconnecting points
Battery
a.
b.
Type of connector terminating the

cable
Type of cable/conductor
Polarized SUBD 3W3 female con- Section of each wire 2.5

nector
sq.mm a
Tributary signals
SCSI 50 pin male connector
8 conductor cable different

for 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm
signals
User input/alarm output
Female type D connector with 9

pins and shielded holder
9 conductor cable with

double brass sheath type
interconductor DB28.25 or
equivalent
LCT
USB B
Standard printer cable
NBUS
RJ45
F035998 - 0.3m superflex

F03597 - 0.5m
F03580 - 0.75m
F03581 - 1m
F03592 - 2.95m
STM1
Plug-in
Relevant to plug-in module
Optical LAN port
Plug-in
Relevant to plug-in module
Electrical LAN port
RJ45
Standard CAT5 cable
RS232
Female type D connector with 9

pins and shielded holder
9 conductor cable with

double brass sheath type
interconductor DB 28.10 or
equivalent
GND
Faston male type
Section area 6 sq. mm.
For power cable length longer than 20 m. a section of 4 mm is required.

Max length 2.5 m
MN.00224.E - 011
123
11.5
OPTICAL CONNECTORS
In case of necessity of optical connectors, please use the optical plug-in modules supplied by SIAE. Ask
SIAE Microelettronica for different modules.
11.6
CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS
During the final installation, the IDU must be protected by a magneto-thermal switch (not supplied with
the equipment), whose characteristics must comply with the laws in force in one's country.
The disconnection from the supply mains is made disconnecting the connector SUB-D 3W3 from the IDU.
11.7
11.7.1
IDU-ODU INTERCONNECTION CABLE
Electrical characteristics
Cable type
coaxial
Cable impedance
50 ohm
Insertion loss
24 dB at 330 MHz
Return loss (connectors included)
better than 22 dB (from 100 MHz to 400 MHz)
Max total DC resistance
4 Ohm
Shielding effectiveness
90 dB
11.7.2
Connectors
N-type male connectors on both sides.
11.7.3
Max length
With the 1/4 cable, the max length is 300m for all modulation profile.
With 1/8 cable, any length that respects max 24dB at 330 MHz and a Max total DC resistance of 4 Ohm.
11.7.4
Suggested cable
RG8 or 1/4 cable on any coaxial cable that respect the previous electrical characteristics.
124
MN.00224.E - 011
11.8
GROUNDING CONNECTION
Fig.65 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.
Indoor
ODU
unit
1
IDU
unit
(+) (-)
Station
ground
Local
ground
ground
rack
Legend
1. IDU grounding point, copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 4 sq.
mm. The Faston is available on the IDU both sides.
2. ODU grounding M6 bolt copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 16
sq. mm (V60052)
3. IDUODU interconnection cable type Celflex CUH 1/4 or RG8 cable terminated with Ntype male
connectors at both sides.
4. Grounding kit type Cabel Metal or similar to connect the shield of interconnection cable.
5. Matching cable (tail) terminated with SMA male and N female connectors.
6. Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area
2.5 sq. mm. Length 10 m.
7. Grounding cords connected to a real earth internal of station. The cross section area of the cable
must be 16 sq. mm
Fig.65 - Grounding connection
11.9
IDU-ODU CABLE GROUNDING KIT INSTALLATION
11.9.1
Grounding kit K09283F (for RG8 or 1/8 cable)
The kit is made up by:
grounding kit
sealant (in a small sachet)
a short tape (to define the part of the jacket to remove from the cable)
MN.00224.E - 011
125
a transparent plastic bag, with instructions printed over, which contains all the items.
In order to install the grounding kit, follow the instructions supplied with the kit itself and position the kit
in the proper points along the IDU-ODU cable (position and number of the points can vary depending on
local rules and/or customer request).
After grounding kit installation, it is necessary to seal it. Please, use two kinds of tape in the following order:
self amalgamating waterproof tape against water and moisture
black PVC tape against sun UV
Procedure for both tapes:
apply the first (of two) layer of sealing tape overlapping the IDU-ODU cable jacket by 3 cm on each
ends. The layer must cover 3cm of cable before the grounding clamp, the clamp itself and 3 cm
after the clamp.
every wrapping must overlap the previous.
The grounding bolt (opposite to the grounding clamp of the kit) must remain without sealing.
11.9.2
Grounding kit ICD00072F (for any cable with shield)
Fig.66
The kit is made up by:
a copper plate connected to a M8x20 grounding bolt
50 cm of tin copper tube of 3mm of diameter
30 cm of vinyl mastic self amalgamating waterproof tape
2 m of black PVC tape against sun UV.
In order to install the grounding kit, follow the instructions supplied with the kit itself and position the kit
in the proper points along the IDU-ODU cable (position and number of the points can vary depending on
local rules and/or customer request).
The installation procedure is the following:
1. remove 52mm of jacket from the cable that has to be grounded
2. insert one end of the tin copper tube of 3 mm of diameter in the relevant hole over the plate copper
bar of the grounding kit
126
MN.00224.E - 011
3. the grounding kit must be placed as Fig.67 (the plate copper bar must be higher point of the grounding kit)
4. put the plate copper bar over the shield of the cable and tie firmly the plate to the cable using the
tin copper tube. When the tin copper tube is over, wedge its end inside a notch of the plate in order
to fix it
5. apply two layers of vinyl mastic self amalgamating waterproof tape overlapping the IDU-ODU cable
jacket by 3 cm on each ends as in Fig.67. Every wrapping must overlap the previous.
6. Apply two layers of black PVC UV proof tape overlapping the waterproof tape layers as in Fig.67.
Every wrapping must overlap the previous.
7. Insert the grounding bolt in the closest grounding point.
The grounding bolt (opposite to the grounding clamp of the kit) must remain without sealing.
Fig.67 - Grounding kit positioning
11.10 SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Gas dischargers are present both in IDU and ODU.
Characteristics
-
DC spark-over voltage
Nominal impulse discharge current (wave 8/20 ms) 20kA
Single impulse discharge current (wave 8/20 ms)
25kA
Performances
in accordance to EN 301 489.
MN.00224.E - 011
150V 20%
127
12
ALPLUS2 CONNECTORS
12.1
IDU FRONT PANEL
The front panel of the ALplus2 modular IDU is made up by the front panels of the modules LIM, RIM and
Controller. See Fig.68.
12.1.1
LIM connectors
Ethernet port 1 electrical, 10/100/1000BaseT
RJ45 (see Tab.16)
Ethernet port 1, 100/1000BaseX
SFP-LC
Ethernet port 2 electrical, 10/100/1000BaseT
RJ45 (see Tab.16)
Ethernet port 3, 100/1000BaseX
SFP-LC
Electrical port 1 and port 2 can be configured MDI or MDIX via WebLCT.
STM-1 1 in/out
SFP
STM-1 2 in/out
SFP
SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3
Trib 1-8, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm E1 in/out
50 pin SCSI female

(Tab.17 for 75Ohm and Tab.18
for 120Ohm)
Trib 9-16, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm E1 in/out
50 pin SCSI female

(Tab.17 for 75Ohm and Tab.18
for 120Ohm)
E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present in the same connector (different pins).
12.1.2
Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU
SMA (max tightening torque = 0.5 Nm)
-48 Vdc power supply
SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)
12.1.3
128
RIM connectors
Controller connectors
LCT, management
USB type B (receptable)
RS232, management
SUB-D male 9 pin (see Tab.19)
USER IN/OUT
SUB-D male 9 pin (see Tab.20)
MNGT/1, management
RJ45 (see Tab.21)
MN.00224.E - 011
MNGT/2, management
RJ45 (see Tab.21)
Port MNGT/1 and port MNGT/2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically.
CH1 service channel
not connected
CH2 service channel
RJ45 (see Tab.22)
2 Mbit/s wayside, 120 Ohm E1 in/out
RJ45 (see Tab.23)
12.2
IDU BODY CONNECTORS
Ground connection
6.3 mm male (Faston).
Ethernet
Port 2 Port 3 2xSTM-1
Port 1
1
ON
48V
PoE
FAIL
10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX
STM1
Trib: 1-8
RS232
USER IN/OUT
MNGT/1
Trib: 9-16
LINK IDU ODU

ACT
LINK
ACT
LCT
ACT
LINK
48V
REM TEST
MNGT/2
Management/
Management/
Configuration
Configuration
4 user IN
2 alarm OUT
WAY
SIDE
CH1
CH2
SPEED
Power
supply
IDU-ODU
cable
16E1
2Mb/s
ON/OFF
CH1, CH2 2 Mbit/s

service
wayside
channel
(CH1 not connected)
Fig.68 - IDU ALplus2 front panel
Tab.16 - 10/100/1000BaseT, RJ45

Pin RJ45
MN.00224.E - 011
Function
10/100BaseT
1000BaseT
Twisted pair IN_P
BI_DB+
Twisted pair IN_N
BI_DB-
Twisted pair OUT_P
BI_DA+
nc
BI_DD+
nc
BI_DD-
Twisted pair OUT_N
BI_DA-
nc
BI_DC+
nc
BI_DC-
129
Tab.17 - 8xE1, 50 pin SCSI female 75 Ohm

Pin
75 Ohm
48
Ground A
23
Tributary 1/9 input
50
Ground A
25
Tributary 1/9 output
47
Ground A
22
Tributary 2/10 input
45
Ground A
20
42
Ground A
17
43
Ground A
18
40
Ground A
15
39
Ground A
14
36
Ground B
11
37
Ground B
12
34
Ground B
33
Ground B
29
Ground B
31
Ground B
28
Ground B
26
Ground B
Note: Join pin 44 with ground A pins, join pin 32 with ground B pins.
25
.........................
.........................
50
26
Fig.69 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female
130
MN.00224.E - 011
Tab.18 - 8xE1, 50 pin SCSI female 120 Ohm)
MN.00224.E - 011
Pin
120 Ohm
49
Tributary 1/9 input
23
Tributary 1/9 input
44
Ground A
24
25
44
Ground A
21
22
44
Ground A
46
20
44
Ground A
16
17
44
Ground A
19
18
44
Ground A
41
15
44
Ground A
13
14
44
Ground A
10
11
32
Ground B
38
12
32
Ground B
35
32
Ground B
32
Ground B
131
Pin
120 Ohm
32
Ground B
30
32
Ground B
27
32
Ground B
Tributary 8/16output
32
Ground B
25
.........................
.........................
50
26
Fig.70 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female
Tab.19 - RS232 SUB-D 9 pin male
132
Pin
Description
DCD (IN)
RD (IN)
TD (OUT)
DTR (OUT)
GND
Not connected
RTS (OUT)
CTS (IN)
Not connected
MN.00224.E - 011
Tab.20 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT)

Pin
Description
C relay contact- branch 1
NA/NC relay contact - branch 1
C relay contact - branch 2
NA/NC relay contact - branch 2
User input 01
User input 02
User input 03
User input 04
Ground
Tab.21 - MNGT/1 and MNGT/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45)
Pin
Description
Tx+
Tx-
Rx+
--
--
Rx-
--
--
Tab.22 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45)
MN.00224.E - 011
Pin
Description
D-V11-Tx
D+V11-Tx
C-V11-Tx
C+V11-Tx
D-V11-Rx
D+V11-Rx
C-V11-Rx
C+V11-Rx
133
Tab.23 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out (RJ45)
134
Pin
Description
Tx-C (IN) common
TX-F (IN) 120 Ohm
GND
TX-F (IN) 75 Ohm
Rx-C (OUT) common
Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm
GND
Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm
MN.00224.E - 011
13
ALCPLUS2 CONNECTORS
13.1
IDU FRONT PANEL
The front panel of the ALCplus2 IDU is made up by various connectors depending on IDU version: in the
following type of connectors and relevant pin-out are listed. On the body of each IDU there is the ground
connection: 6.3mm male (Faston).
13.2
ALCPLUS2 1+0/1+1 (GAI0157/GAI0152)
In Fig.7 and Fig.8 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are available:
MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically
RJ45 (Tab.21)
LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT

Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT
RJ45 (Tab.16)
LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX
SFP-LC
Trib A, B
RJ45 (Tab.24)
LCT, management
USER IN/OUT
SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1

1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+11
Tab.24 - Trib A, B connector
PIN RJ45
Function
Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm
Rx-C (OUT) 120/75 Ohm common
GND
Tx-F (IN) 120 Ohm
Tx-C (IN) 120/75 Ohm common
Tx-F (IN) 75 Ohm
GND
Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm
In 1+1 the two power supply connectors are in parallel
MN.00224.E - 011
135
Tab.25 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT
13.3
PIN RJ45
Function
C relay contact
NO relay contact
User Input 01
User Input 02
Ground
Do not use
NC relay contact
Not connected
Do not use
ALCPLUS2 16E1 1+0/1+1 (GAI0155/GAI0156)
In Fig.9 and Fig.10 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are presents:
MNGT1, 2 management
RJ45 (Tab.21)

DI or MDIX via WebLCT
RJ45 (Tab.16)
SFP-LC
Trib A, B
RJ45 (Tab.24)
LCT, management
USER IN/OUT
Trib 1/8, 9/16

E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present
in the same connectors (different pins)
13.4
50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for 75 Ohm

and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)

SMA

ALCPLUS2 NODAL 1+0/1+1 (GAI0163/GAI0162)
In Fig.13 and Fig.14 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are present:
136
MNGT1, 2 management
RJ45 (Tab.21)
MN.00224.E - 011

RJ45 (Tab.16)
STM-1 1, 2 in/out
SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3 SFP
SFP-LC
Trib A, B
RJ45 (Tab.24)
N-BUS 1, 2 connection among IDUs only

through SIAE cable
see Tab.15 for cable length and

SIAE code
LCT, management
USER IN/OUT
Trib 1/8, 9/16

13.5

SMA

ALCPLUS2 32E1 1+0/1+1 (GAI0169/GAI0168)
MNGT1, 2 management
RJ45 (Tab.21)

RJ45 (Tab.16)
STM-1 1, 2 in/out
SFP
SFP-LC
Trib A, B
RJ45 (Tab.24)

through SIAE cable

SIAE code
LCT, management
USER IN/OUT
Trib 1/8, 25/32

50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for

75 Ohm and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)

SMA

MN.00224.E - 011
137
14
ALCPLUS2E CONNECTORS
14.1
IDU FRONT PANEL
The front panel of the ALCplus2e IDU is made up by various connectors depending on IDU version: in the
following type of connectors and relevant pin-out are listed. On the body of each IDU there is the ground
connection: 6.3mm male (Faston).
14.2
ALCPLUS2E 1+0 (GAI0178), 2+0/1+1 (GAI0175), 2+0/XPIC

(GAI0172)
In Fig.7 and Fig.8 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are available:
MNGT1, 2 management
RJ45 (Tab.21)

RJ45 (Tab.16)
SFP-LC
Trib A, B
RJ45 (Tab.24)
LCT, management
USER IN/OUT

1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1/2+0

Tab.26 - Trib A, B connector
138
PIN RJ45
Function
Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm
Rx-C (OUT) 120/75 Ohm common
GND
Tx-F (IN) 120 Ohm
Tx-C (IN) 120/75 Ohm common
Tx-F (IN) 75 Ohm
GND
Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm
In 1+1 the two power supply connectors are in parallel
MN.00224.E - 011
Tab.27 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT
14.3
PIN RJ45
Function
C relay contact
NO relay contact
User Input 01
User Input 02
Ground
Do not use
NC relay contact
Not connected
Do not use
ALCPLUS2E 18E1 2XSTM1 NODAL (GAI0176), 2+0/1+1

(GAI0173), 2+0/XPIC (GAI0170)
MNGT1, 2 management
RJ45 (Tab.21)

RJ45 (Tab.16)
STM-1 1, 2 in/out
SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3 SFP
SFP-LC
Trib A, B
RJ45 (Tab.24)

through SIAE cable

SIAE code
LCT, management
USER IN/OUT
Trib 1/8, 9/16


SMA

MN.00224.E - 011
139
14.4
ALCPLUS2E 34E1 2XSTM1 1+0 (GAI0177), 2+0/1+1

(GAI0174), 2+0/XPIC (GAI 0171)
MNGT1, 2 management
RJ45 (Tab.21)

RJ45 (Tab.16)
STM-1 1, 2 in/out
SFP
SFP-LC
Trib A, B
RJ45 (Tab.24)

through SIAE cable
LCT, management
USER IN/OUT
Trib 1/8, 25/32

140

SIAE code
50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for

75 Ohm and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)

SMA

MN.00224.E - 011
15
INSTALLATION NOTE ON FREQUENCY REUSE

SYSTEMS (XPIC)
15.1
FREQUENCY REUSE
The ALS with frequency reuse is double carrier systems with one carrier on vertical path and one carrier
on horizontal path. One carrier can have a radio frame up to 341 Mbit/s for a total of 682 Mbit/s.
For frequency reuse systems to assume the achievement of guaranteed performances of XPIC functionalities some cares shall be taken for IDU-ODU cabling. ALS XPIC systems use IDU ALCplus2e; ODU can be
AS version or ASN version in accordance with necessity.
15.2
CHARACTERISTICS
15.2.1
Antennas
Antennas will be double polarization type.
15.2.2
RF channel
RF channel shall be the same for vertical polarization path and horizontal polarization path.
15.2.3
ATPC
Low ATPC level shall be 15 dB higher than BER 10-6 threshold.
15.2.4
IDU-ODU cable
The IDU-ODU cable length difference shall be:
cable from RT1A to IDU-ODU SMA connector 1 and cable from RT1B to IDU-ODU SMA connector 2
shall have the same length with the following tolerance:
-
6 m for 14 MHz bandwidth systems
3 m for 28 MHz bandwidth systems
1.5 m for 56 MHz bandwidth systems
MN.00224.E - 011
141
16
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU

WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
16.1
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:
1+0 version
-
antisliding strip (see Fig.71)
supporting plate plus 60114 mm pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.72)
adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.73)
Band-it fixing system (see Fig.76)
antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.74)
support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.72)
connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.74)
kit for ground connection making part of ODU
1+0 version (6 GHz only)

Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32409) must be used (see Fig.82). The
flange is UDR70.
1+1 version
-
antisliding strip (see Fig.71)
supporting plate plus pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.72)
adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.73)
hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.75)
flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.74)
kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.

flange is UDR70.
Warning: in order to avoid damages to flexible waveguides, dont fold or twist them more than values specified as limit in installation instructions of the waveguide supplier.
In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.30 shows the maximum bending radius.
142
MN.00224.E - 011
16.2
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
N.2 13mm torque wrench
N.1 15 mm torque wrench
N.1 3 mm Allen wrench
Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.
16.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:

3
Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the support plate by Band-it
Version 1+1: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
Installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)
ODU grounding
1+0 version Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

Fig.71 Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position
of the supporting plate (see next step)
Fig.72 Adhere the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole
through the fixing bracket for 60114 mm pole (see Fig.72). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting
plate. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm.
Warning: As shown in Fig.73 an adapting kit must be used for the 219 mm pole. It consists of an additional
plate to enlarge the standard supporting plate dimension and relevant Ubolt for 219 mm pole fixing.
Fig.74 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:
Tab.28 - Torques for tightening screws
Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.74 Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be
mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.74) or vertically as function of convenience.
Fig.75 Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available
bolts and nuts. Fig.75 shows the possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
In case of 219 mm pole, an adapting kit is supplied for the purpose.
MN.00224.E - 011
143
1+0 version Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate by Band-it
In case of 1+0 ODU installation, a Band-it pole mounting kit can be used: through slots (see Fig.76) on
the supporting plate two metallic bands secure the plate on the pole. Band characteristics are:
thickness
0.76 mm
width
19 mm.
It is also possible to use the anti-sliding system (optional).
1+1 version Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

Fig.71 Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position
of the supporting plate (see next step)
Fig.72 Position the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole
through the fixing bracket for 60114 mm pole (see Fig.72). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting
plate kit. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm.
Fig.77 Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts
available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides.
Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange
as shown in Fig.80. This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.
Installation of the ODU

1. Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4
to the Oring of Fig.79.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange.
2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.
3. Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side
flange (see Fig.79) to antenna side flange (see Fig.74 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see
Fig.77 1+1 version).
Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.78 depending on the polarisation.
4. With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise and then insert
the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support
(see Fig.74 1+0 version or Fig.77 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.79)
5. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rotation stops.
6. Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.74 1+0 version or Fig.77 1+1
version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.
Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.80. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.
144
MN.00224.E - 011
16.4
GROUNDING
The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.81.

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm.
Tab.30 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency
Frequency
Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending
out rebending
rebending
rebending
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
E-plane a
H-plane b
E-plane a.
H-plane b.
6 GHz or 7 GHz
low
200 (7,9)
500 (19,8)
300 (11,9)
600 (23,7)
7 GHz high
200 (7,9)
500 (19,8)
250 (9,9)
600 (23,7)
11 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
13 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
15 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
18 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
23 GHz
110 (4,3)
230 (9,1)
130 (5,1)
250 (9,9)
38 GHz
80 (3,1)
140 (5,5)
90 (3,6)
150 (5,9)
a.
Bending E-plane
Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)
b.
Bending H-plane
Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)
MN.00224.E - 011
145
Plastic blocks
Antisliding strip
Fig.71 - Antisliding strip
146
MN.00224.E - 011
Use 17 mm wrench
(32Nm torque)
Supporting plate
Use 15 mm wrench
(32Nm torque)
Fig.72 - 60114 mm pole supporting plate fixing
MN.00224.E - 011
147
Fig.73 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole
148
MN.00224.E - 011
In option
Antenna side flange
Support with ODU fast

lockinh mechanism
Reference tooth
Reference tooth
1
1
Position of antenna
side flange
1. 13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque
Fig.74 - Mounting position
MN.00224.E - 011
149
Adapting kit for 219 mm pole
Fig.75 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism
150
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.76 - Band-it pole mounting kit
MN.00224.E - 011
151
Use 13 mm wrench
(18 Nm torque)
Hybrid with ODU fast

locking mechanism
Reference tooth
Reference tooth
Optional vawe
guide
1
RT1
RT2
Fig.77 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
152
MN.00224.E - 011
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.78 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side.
MN.00224.E - 011
153
Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU side flange
ASN version
"N"
Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

"BNC"
Ground bolt
AS version
Fig.79 - ODU body reference tooth
154
MN.00224.E - 011
ASN version
Suncover (optional)
AS version
Fig.80 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version
MN.00224.E - 011
155
1
2
3
4
5
ASN version
AS version
Fig.81 - ODU grounding
156
MN.00224.E - 011
Spring
Washer
Screw M5x25
UDR70 antenna flange
Screw M4x8
Fig.82 - Kit V32409
MN.00224.E - 011
157
UDR70 flange
Screw M4x18
Spring
Washer
O-Ring
Hybrid 6 GHz
(balanced or
unbalanced)
Fig.83 - Kit V32415
158
MN.00224.E - 011
17
INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU

17.1
INSTALLATION KIT
1+0 version
-
wall supporting plate with additional contact surface extension plates (see Fig.84)
antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.85)
support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.85)
(see Fig.85)
kit for ground connection making part of ODU

flange is UDR70.
1+1 version
-
supporting plate with additional contact surface extension tools (see Fig.84)
hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.87)
(see Fig.85)
kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.

flange is UDR70.
In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.33 shows the maximum bending radius.
17.2
N.2 13mm torque wrench
N.1 3 mm allen wrench.
MN.00224.E - 011
159
17.3
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:
version 1+0: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate
version 1+1: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate
installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)
ODU grounding.
1+0 version Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

Fig.84 Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface.
Fig.84 Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws.
Use the expansion plug suitable to the wall. Test the installed bracket with a load of 50kg. No deformation
should be noted.
Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.85 Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be
mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.85) or vertically as function of convenience.
Fig.86 Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available
bolts and nuts. Fig.86 shows three possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
1+1 version Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

Fig.84 Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface.
Fig.84 Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws.
Warning: Use the expansion plug suitable to the wall. Test the installed bracket with a load of 50kg. No
deformation should be noted.
Fig.87 Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts
available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides.
Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange
as shown in Fig.90 This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.
160
MN.00224.E - 011
Installation of the ODU

1. Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4
to the Oring of Fig.89.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange.
2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.
3. Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side
flange (see Fig.89) to antenna side flange (see Fig.85 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see
Fig.87 1+1 version).
Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.88 depending on the polarisation.
4. With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise and then insert
the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support
(see Fig.85 1+0 version or Fig.87 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.89)
6. Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.85 1+0 version or Fig.87 1+1
version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.
Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.90. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.
MN.00224.E - 011
161
17.4
GROUNDING
The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.91.

Frequency
out rebending
out rebending
rebending
rebending
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
E-plane a
H-plane b
E-plane a.
H-plane b.
6 GHz or 7 GHz
low
200 (7,9)
500 (19,8)
300 (11,9)
600 (23,7)
7 GHz high
200 (7,9)
500 (19,8)
250 (9,9)
600 (23,7)
11 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
13 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
15 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
18 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
23 GHz
110 (4,3)
230 (9,1)
130 (5,1)
250 (9,9)
38 GHz
80 (3,1)
140 (5,5)
90 (3,6)
150 (5,9)
a.
Bending E-plane
Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
b.
Bending H-plane
Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
162
MN.00224.E - 011
Extension plate
Supporting plate
M8 bolt and nut
Another possible fixation
Fig.84 - Wall supporting plate
MN.00224.E - 011
163
In option
Antenna side flange
Support with ODU fast

locking mechanism
Reference tooth
Reference tooth
1
1
13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque
Position of antenna
side flange
Fig.85 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism
164
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.86 - Mounting possible positions
MN.00224.E - 011
165
Use 13 mm wrench
(18 Nm torque)
Hybrid with ODU fast

locking mechanism
Reference tooth
Reference tooth
Optional wave
guide
RT1
RT2
Fig.87 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate
166
MN.00224.E - 011
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.88 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side.
MN.00224.E - 011
167
Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU side flange
ASN version
"N"
"BNC"

Ground bolt
AS version
168
MN.00224.E - 011
Suncover (optional)
ASN version
AS version
Fig.90 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version
MN.00224.E - 011
169
1
2
3
4
5
ASN version
AS version
1. Bolt
2. Spring washer
3. Flat washer
4. Earth cable collar
5. Flat washer
170
MN.00224.E - 011
Spring
Washer
Screw M5x25
UDR70 antenna flange
Screw M4x8
Fig.92 - Kit V32409
MN.00224.E - 011
171
UDR70 flange
Screw M4x18
Spring
Washer
O-Ring
Hybrid 6 GHz
(balanced or
unbalanced)
Fig.93 - Kit V32415
172
MN.00224.E - 011
18

WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA
18.1
FOREWORD
The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 versions.
18.2
INSTALLATION KIT
1+0 version
60 to 114 mm pole mounting kit consisting of:

-
centring ring and relevant screws (see Fig.94)
antislide strip (see Fig.95)
pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.96)
ODU with Oring and devices for ground connection
1+1 version
pole mounting kit from 60 to 114 mm for 1+1 consisting of:

-
centring ring and relevant screws (see Fig.94)
antislide strip (see Fig.95)
pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.96)
hybrid mechanical body (see Fig.105)
polarization twist disk (see Fig.107)
2 ODUs with Orings and devices for ground connection.
MN.00224.E - 011
173
18.3
N.1 3 mm allen wrench.
18.4
Installation procedure proceeds according with the following steps:
1+0 version
1. installation onto the pole of the support system
2. installation of the antenna
3. installation of ODU
4. antenna aiming
5. ODU grounding
1+1 version
1. installation onto the pole of the support system
2. installation of the antenna
3. installation of hybrid circuit
4. installation of the two ODUs
5. antenna aiming
6. ODU grounding.
18.4.1
Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna
Fig.94 Set the antenna in such a position as to be able to operate on its rear side. Locate the five threaded
holes around antenna flange. Mount centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with 3 calibrated bolts.
Caution: centring ring should be mounted so that the screws do not stick out.
Define if the antenna will be mounted with vertical or horizontal polarization. Check that free drain holes
stay at bottom side. Mount bolt type M10x30, in position A leaving it loose of 2 cm approx. With horizontal
polarization mount bolt type M10x30 in position D, leaving it loose of 2 cm approx.
Fig.95 Mount antislide strip onto the pole. Place blocks as in Fig.95 following antenna aiming direction.
Tighten the strip with screwdriver.
Fig.96 Mount pole supporting system with relevant pole fixing brackets following antenna aiming direction as indicated by arrow. Antislide strip should result at the centre of supporting plate. Supporting system
174
MN.00224.E - 011
should lean against antislide clamp with the tooth as in Fig.97. Position the antenna in such a way that bolt
in position A or D of Fig.94 cross through hole E of Fig.98. Secure the support system to the pole by means
of the pole fixing brackets and relevant fixing bolts.
Fig.99 Rotate the antenna body until the remainder three antenna holes coincide with the three support
holes. Secure the antenna to the support by tightening the relevant passing through bolts.
18.4.2
Installation of ODU
1+0 version
1. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the Oring (4) of Fig.102 by protecting finger
hands with gloves.
2.
Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The ODU handle
can assume position of Fig.100 depending on the polarization.
3. Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange
(see Fig.101). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise
and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth
on the support (see Fig.101) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.102).
Fig.103 and Fig.104 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respectively.
5. Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.101.
1+1 version
Fig.105 Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to Orings (1). Insert Orings (1) and (6) into
twist polarization disk (2).
Vertical polarization
Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing marker (4), on disk, close to V mark.
Horizontal polarization
Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing reference (4), on disk, close to H mark.
In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.106.
Caution: Twist disk has two planes. Take care of position marker (4) on twist disk. The position of marker
(4) plane should be in contact to hybrid like in figure. Tighten progressively and alternatively screws (7)
with the same number of spring washers (8) with the following torque:
Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.107 Fix hybrid to support system with four bolts (1) taking care of RT1/RT2 position shown by labels
of Fig.107. Tighten progressively and alternatively four bolts (1).
MN.00224.E - 011
175
18.4.3
ODU installation
The installation procedure of the two ODUs is the same.

1. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the Oring (4) of the Fig.102 by protecting finger
hands with gloves.
2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. For 1+0 the
ODU can assume position of Fig.100 depending on the polarisation. For 1+1 the handle ODU position is always placed at the right side (horizontal polarization).
3. Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange
(see Fig.101). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise
and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth
on the support (see Fig.101) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.102).
Fig.103 and Fig.104 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respectively for 1+0 version.
Fig.108 shows ODU housing final position for 1+1 version.
5. Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.101.
18.5
ANTENNA AIMING
Antenna aiming for 1+0 version and 1+1 version is the same. The antenna aiming devices allow to perform
the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming position:
-
Horizontal
15 operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.109, only after having loosen
the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.110.
vertical
15 operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.109

only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.110 and (4) and (5) of
Fig.109.
For adjustment from 0 to +30 extract nut (1) Fig.110 and position it in
hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.110 and position it in hole (6). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.110 and (4) of Fig.109.
For adjustment from 0 to 30 extract nut (1) of Fig.110 and position it in
hole (3), extract nut (2) of Fig.110 and position it in hole (5). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.110 and (4) of Fig.109.
For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10, are available on support.
The bigger marker gives 0 starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming
position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.110 and
(4) and (5) of Fig.109 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9),
(10) of Fig.110 for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and
32 Nm torque.
18.6
COMPATIBILITY
The pole installation kit of the ODU unit in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is compatible with integrated antenna
complying with SIAE standard with measures 0.2 m, 0.4 m, 0.6 m, 0.8 m of diameter.
176
MN.00224.E - 011
18.7
GROUNDING
See Fig.111.
On ODU grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and flat washers as shown. Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm.
horizontal polarization
3 mm allen key
2,5 Nm torque
2
3
A
C
1. Antenna
2. Calibrated Allen screw
3. Centring ring
Fig.94 - Centring ring position
MN.00224.E - 011
177
1. Steel belt
2. Plastic blocks
Fig.95 - Antislide strip
178
MN.00224.E - 011
2
Antenna aiming direction
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
1
3
3
1. Pole fixing brackets
2. Tooth
3. Bolt
4. Pole support system
Fig.96 - Support mount on pole
MN.00224.E - 011
179
Antenna aiming direction
1. Tooth
Fig.97 - Supporting system position
Fig.98 - Hole E
180
MN.00224.E - 011
D
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
A, B, C, D Bolt slots
Fig.99 - Antenna installation on pole support
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.100 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.
MN.00224.E - 011
181
13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque
H
H
H
H
1
1
H
H
H
H
H: Reference tooth
Fig.101 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence
182
MN.00224.E - 011
Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU side flange
ASN version
"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
AS version
MN.00224.E - 011
183
5
30
Fig.103 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization
5
30
5
30
Fig.104 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization
184
MN.00224.E - 011
7
8
1
2
4
1. Oring
2. Polarization twist disk
3. Hybrid mechanical body
4. Position marker of twist disk
5. Reference label for twist disk
6. Oring
7. Allen screws
8. Spring washer
Fig.105 - Hybrid and polarization disk
MN.00224.E - 011
185
Fig.106 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13GHz and 15 GHz)
186
MN.00224.E - 011
1
RT1
2
1
RT2
13 mm wrench
18 Nm torque
1. Bolts
2. Spring washer
Fig.107 - Hybrid mount on pole support
MN.00224.E - 011
187
ASN version
AS version
Fig.108 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version
188
MN.00224.E - 011
4
5
1. Marker
2. Vertical adjustment
3. Horizontal adjustment
4. Bolt
5. Fixing nut
Fig.109 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments
MN.00224.E - 011
189
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
11
10
9
5
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
1., 2., 3., 4. Horizontal aiming block bolts

5., 6., 7. Vertical aiming block bolts
8., 11. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to 30
9., 10. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to +30
Fig.110 - Antenna aiming block
190
MN.00224.E - 011
1
2
3
4
5
ASN version
AS version
1. Bolt
2. Spring washer
3. Flat washer
5. Flat washer
MN.00224.E - 011
191
19

WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307,
V32308, V32309)
19.1
FOREWORD
The description concerns pole mounting of ODU, in 1+0 and 1+1 version, using following installation kits:
-
V32307
for ODU with frequency from 10 to 13 GHz
V32308
V32309
Differences regard the dimensions and the presence of the centring ring (see Fig.112):
-
V32307
centring ring for antenna flange from 10 to 13 GHz
V32308
centring ring for antenna flange from 15 to 38 GHz
V32309
no centring ring (and relevant screws).
19.2
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.
1+0 version
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:

-
centring ring and relevant screws
pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets
1+0 ODU support and relevant screws
1+1 version
192

-
1+0 ODU support
hybrid and relevant screws
polarization twist disk and relevant screws
MN.00224.E - 011
19.3
N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
N.1 13 mm spanner
N.2 17 mm spanner.
19.4
Installation procedure is listed below:
1+0 version
1. antenna polarization
2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna
3. installation of 1+0 ODU support
4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
6. antenna aiming
7. ODU grounding
1+1 version
5. installation of hybrid
6. installation of ODUs
7. antenna aiming
8. ODU grounding.
MN.00224.E - 011
193
19.5
19.5.1
1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES
Setting antenna polarization
Fig.112 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws
around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange according on: horizontal wave guide > vertical polarization, vertical wave guide > horizontal polarization. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).
19.5.2
Installation of the centring ring on the antenna
Fig.112 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the
antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use
3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).
19.5.3
Installation of 1+0 ODU support
Fig.112 Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four
M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed,
must be mounted with the two bushes around.
19.5.4
Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
Fig.112 Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10
screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side,
the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.
19.5.5
Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)
Fig.113 Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 on the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves.
Fig.114 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise into the support and search
for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.115) and reference tooth on the ODU body.
Fig.116 When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation
is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations.
Fig.115 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm
spanner, torque = 6Nm).
194
MN.00224.E - 011
19.5.6
Antenna aiming
Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same.
Horizontal aiming: 5 operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.117 with a 17 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot.
Vertical aiming: 20 operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.117 with a 13 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support.
Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.
19.5.7
ODU grounding
ODU grounding is achieved with:
M8 screw without washers
M6 screw with washer
as shown in Fig.118.
19.6
In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph 19.5 1+0
MOUNTING PROCEDURES.
19.6.1
Installation of Hybrid
Fig.119 The polarization disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow
Corning 4 on the Orings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the position marker down. Insert the Oring into polarization twist disk.
Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark.
Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark.
shown in Fig.120.
Tighten progressively and alternatively the screws and the spring washer with following torque:
Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.121 Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten
progressively and alternatively the bolts.
MN.00224.E - 011
195
19.6.2
Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)
For both ODUs.

Fig.113 Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves.
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise and then insert the ODU body
into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization
twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization.
Fig.122 When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rotation stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position.
Fig.115 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm
spanner, torque = 6 Nm).
Warning: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The
Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.
Four 13mm
screws
Centring ring
(not present in V32309)
Three 3mm Allen screws

(not present in V32309)
Antenna
1+0 support
Two bushes
Fig.112 - 1+0 pole mounting
196
MN.00224.E - 011
Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU wave guide
"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.114 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.
MN.00224.E - 011
197
3
1
2
1
5
4
4
1
5
1
2
3
1. 6 mm Allen screw
2. Bush (diagonally placed)
3. 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm)
4. Reference point for horizontal polarization
5. Reference point for vertical polarization
Fig.115 - 1+0 support
198
MN.00224.E - 011
1+0 ODU HP with handle on the right:

1+0 ODU standard with handle on the left:

vertical polarization
Fig.116 - ODU housing final position for both polarization
MN.00224.E - 011
199
Horizontal aiming:
two 17mm block screws
Vertical aiming:
13mm block screws
Pole support
17mm nut for horizontal

adjustment of antenna
Internal 5mm Allen

screw for vertical
adjustment of antenna
Fig.117 - Antenna aiming
200
MN.00224.E - 011
1
2
3
4
5
ASN version
AS version
1. Bolt
2. Spring washer
3. Flat washer
5. Flat washer
MN.00224.E - 011
201
7
8
1
2
4
1. Oring
6. Oring
7. Allen screws
8. Spring washer
Fig.119 - Hybrid and twist disk
202
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.120 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz)
MN.00224.E - 011
203
Fig.121 - Hybrid installation
204
MN.00224.E - 011
ASN version
AS version
Fig.122 - 1+1 ODUs installation
MN.00224.E - 011
205
20

WITH RFS INTEGRATED ANTENNA
20.1
FOREWORD
The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 version.
20.2
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.
1+0 version

-
1+0 ODU support and relevant screws
1+1 version
20.3
206

-
1+0 ODU support
hybrid and relevant screws
polarization twist disk and relevant screws
N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
MN.00224.E - 011
N.1 13 mm spanner
N.2 17 mm spanner.
20.4
Installation procedure is listed below:
1+0 version
6. antenna aiming
7. ODU grounding
1+1 version
5. installation of hybrid
6. installation of ODUs
7. antenna aiming
8. ODU grounding.
20.5
20.5.1
Setting antenna polarization
Fig.112 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws
around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange according on: horizontal wave guide > vertical polarization, vertical wave guide > horizontal polarization. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).
MN.00224.E - 011
207
20.5.2
Installation of the centring ring on the antenna
Fig.112 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the
antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use
3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).
20.5.3
Installation of 1+0 ODU support
Fig.112 Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four
M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed,
must be mounted with the two bushes around.
20.5.4
Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
Fig.112 Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10
screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side,
the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.
20.5.5
Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)
Fig.113 Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 on the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves.
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise into the support and search
for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.115) and reference tooth on the ODU body.
Fig.116 When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation
is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations.
Fig.115 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm
spanner, torque = 6Nm).
20.5.6
Antenna aiming
Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same.
Horizontal aiming: 5 operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.117 with a 17 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot.
Vertical aiming: 20 operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.117 with a 13 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support.
Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.
208
MN.00224.E - 011
20.5.7
ODU grounding
ODU grounding is achieved with:
M8 screw without washers
M6 screw with washer
as shown in Fig.118.
20.6
In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph 19.5 1+0
MOUNTING PROCEDURES.
20.6.1
Installation of Hybrid
Fig.119 The polarization disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow
Corning 4 on the Orings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the position marker down. Insert the Oring into polarization twist disk.
Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark.
Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark.
shown in Fig.120.
Tighten progressively and alternatively the screws and the spring washer with following torque:
Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.121 Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten
progressively and alternatively the bolts.
20.6.2
Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)
For both ODUs.

Fig.113 Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves.
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise and then insert the ODU body
into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization
twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization.
MN.00224.E - 011
209
Fig.122 When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rotation stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position.
Fig.115 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm
spanner, torque = 6 Nm).
WARNING: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The
Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.
Centering ring
Three 3 mm
Allen screws
Four 13mm screws
Antenna
1+0 support
Fig.123 - 1+0 pole mounting
210
MN.00224.E - 011
Reference tooth
O-ring
ODU wave guide
"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.125 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.
MN.00224.E - 011
211
2
1
1
4
3
3
1
4
2
1. 6 mm Allen screw M10
2. 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm)
3. Reference point for horizontal polarization
4. Reference point for vertical polarization
Fig.126 - 1+0 support
212
MN.00224.E - 011
1+0 ODU with handle on the left:

vertical polarization
1+0 ODU with handle on the right:

Fig.127 - ODU housing final position for both polarization
MN.00224.E - 011
213
Pole support
Vertical aiming
2
1
Horizontal aiming
Fig.128 - Antenna aiming
214
MN.00224.E - 011
1
2
3
4
5
ASN version
AS version
1. Bolt
2. Spring washer
3. Flat washer
5. Flat washer
MN.00224.E - 011
215
7
8
1
2
4
1. Oring
6. Oring
7. Allen screws
8. Spring washer
Fig.130 - Hybrid and twist disk
216
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.131 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz)
MN.00224.E - 011
217
Fig.132 - Hybrid installation
218
MN.00224.E - 011
AS version
ASN version
Fig.133 - 1+1 ODUs installation
MN.00224.E - 011
219
21
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF ODU ASN

WITH STANDARD LOCK
21.1
ODU COUPLING KIT
Two versions of ODU can be connected to ALplus2/ALCplus2 IDU: ODU AS and ODU ASN. Both versions
need to be completed with a coupling kit to be connected to the mechanical structure for the installation.
21.1.1
ODU AS
ODU AS is factory assembled with a Fast Lock coupling kit (see Fig.134); for the installation it needs Oring and grounding bolt only.
21.1.2
ODU ASN
ODU ASN can mount two different coupling kits in order to obtain a Fast Lock ASN or a Standard ASN. After
having mounted the proper coupling kit the ODU needs O-ring and grounding bolt.
21.1.2.1
Fast lock coupling kit
The Fast Lock coupling kit is the same used in ODU AS and so after kit, O-ring and grounding bolt assembly,
the ASN Fast Lock can be installed in the same way of ODU AS.
Coupling kit assembly procedure

See Fig.135 - Put the Fast Lock coupling kit on the ODU.
Align the four holes of the coupling kit with the four nut screws on the ODU. Insert and tighten the four
screws.
21.1.2.2
Standard coupling kit
The standard coupling kit is mounted on ASN ODU by means of four screws.
Coupling kit assembly procedure

See Fig.136 - Put the standard coupling kit on the ODU.
Align the four holes of the coupling kit with the four nut screws on the ODU. Insert and tighten the four
screws.
220
MN.00224.E - 011
21.2
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA
21.2.1
ODU AS and ODU ASN (Fast Lock)
The installation of ODUs with Fast Lock coupling kit is described in previous chapters.
21.2.2
ODU ASN (Standard Lock)
Mounting kit 1+0 version
Centring ring and relevant screws
M10 bolts
ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection
Centring ring and relevant screws
M10 bolts for hybrid and ODU mounting
Hybrid mechanical body
Polarization twist disk (see Fig.139)
2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.
21.2.2.1
1+0 ODU
Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
provided by antenna producer. Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on requested polarization.
After the antenna is installed onto the pole, the ODU must be installed, see Fig.137.
Position the three holes circular flange (1) on the antenna flange and align the three holes on the
circular flange with the three relevant holes on the antenna flange
Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws (2) using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2 Nm)
Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm bolts (3). The sliding surfaces
should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease gun. It
should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be worn where repeated
or prolonged contact can occur.
Screw partially the four M10 bolts (3) on the antenna back plate: each bolt should be tightened to
have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14mm (the thickness of hook (4), use 15mm spanner)
Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange
Position the ODU (5) vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder:
-
vertical polarization: the handle (6) of the ODU is at the bottom left corner
MN.00224.E - 011
221
horizontal polarization: the handle (6) of the ODU is at the bottom right corner
After the right position has been found, rotate 30 counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts
Rotate 30 clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt
When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15mm spanner,
torque=46mm)
Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit
The ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable.
21.2.2.2
1+1 ODU
Install The antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
by antenna producer. Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on requested polarization.
After the antenna is installed onto the pole, follow the procedure below, see Fig.138.
Mounting the hybrid (3) on the back of the antenna:
Position the three holes circular flange (1) on the antenna flange and align the holes on the circular
flange with the relevant holes on the antenna flange
Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws (2) using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2mm)
Prepare the polarization disk (see Fig.139) with the two O-rings: seal and lubricant grease Dow
Corning 4 must be applied to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves; each O-ring must be inserted in the proper track on each surface of the disk
Mount always (with vertical and with horizontal polarization) the polarization disk on the hybrid
flange (antenna side) as shown in Fig.139 and tighten the four screws (only three screws in 13 GHz
and 15 GHz hybrid). The polarization disk must br oriented depending on requested polarization by
antenna feeder (position V or H as shown in Fig.139. Torque values as in 21.3.2.2.
Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
1 Nm
Mount the hybrid on the back of the antenna by means of four M10 bolts (4) (torque = 46 Nm)
Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:
222
Screw partially four M10 bolts (4) on the hybrid flange (ODU side): each bolt should be tightened
to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm, use 15 mm spanner
Position the ODU (5) vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle (6) of the
ODU is at the bottom right corner
ODU to the antenna flange in order to have the four slots (7) of the Standard Lock cross between
the four bolts on the hybrid
MN.00224.E - 011
When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
= 46Nm)
Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable
Repeat for the other ODU on the other side
Optional: sun cover kit. Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable.
21.3
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
Diameter of the pole
21.3.1
60-114 mm
ODU AS and ODU ASN (Fast Lock)
The installation of ODUs with Fast Lock coupling kit is described in previous chapters.
21.3.2
ODU ASN (Standard Lock)
Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)
1 antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency, with relevant screws
M10 25mm bolts for ODU mounting
ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection
Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)
M10 25mm bolts for hybrid and ODUs mounting
Hybrid mechanical body
Polarization twist disk (see Fig.139)
2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.
MN.00224.E - 011
223
21.3.2.1
1+0 ODU
See Fig.140.
Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15mm spanner, torque =
46Nm).
Fix the antenna side flange (4) with the proper screws (in Fig.140 the antenna flange is shown in
two different positions depending on the polarization), the screw holes side is the side where the
waveguide must be installed.
On the supporting plate, on the opposite side respect to the antenna flange just mounted, insert in
holes (5) on the supporting plate the four 25mm M10 bolts (3): screw them partially, each bolt
should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm (the thickness of
hook (4), use 15mm spanner).
insert it in the proper track on the ODU flange.
Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the supporting plate and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna flange:
-
vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner
horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner
ODU to the supporting plate in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts
=46 Nm).
21.3.2.2
1+1 ODU
See Fig.141.
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15 mm spanner, torque = 46
Nm)
Mount the hybrid (4) on the back of the antenna by means of four 25 mm M10 bolts (5) (use 15
mm spanner with torque = 46 Nm) in the holes (6).
Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:
224
Screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts positioning them in the holes (7) on the hybrid flange (ODU
side): each bolt should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm,
use 15 mm spanner
Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle of the ODU
is at the bottom right corner
After the right position has been found, rotate 30 counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to
the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts
on the hybrid
MN.00224.E - 011
= 46 Nm)
Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
Repeat for the other ODU on the other side
MN.00224.E - 011
225
21.3.2.3
Waveguide towards the antenna
After having installed the ODU in 1+0 configuration or in 1+1 configuration, the waveguide towards the
antenna must be installed.
1+0: the waveguide must be fixed to the antenna flange on the supporting plate of the ODU. In
case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding can damage the waveguide, see Tab.38 for details.
1+1: the waveguide must be fixed to the hybrid. In case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding
can damage the waveguide, see Tab.38 for details.

Frequency
out rebending
out rebending
rebending
rebending
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
E-plane a
H-plane b
E-plane a.
H-plane b.
6 GHz or 7 GHz
low
200 (7,9)
500 (19,8)
300 (11,9)
600 (23,7)
7 GHz high
200 (7,9)
500 (19,8)
250 (9,9)
600 (23,7)
11 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
13 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
15 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
18 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
23 GHz
110 (4,3)
230 (9,1)
130 (5,1)
250 (9,9)
38 GHz
80 (3,1)
140 (5,5)
90 (3,6)
150 (5,9)
a.
Bending E-plane
Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
b.
Bending H-plane
Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
226
MN.00224.E - 011
O-ring
ODU AS
Eyelet terminal
Grounding bolt
Fig.134 - AS and ASN ODUs
MN.00224.E - 011
227
Fast lock coupling flange
Screws
O-ring
ODU ASN
Eyelet terminal
Grounding bolt
Fig.135 - ODU ASN with fast lock coupling flange
228
MN.00224.E - 011
Standard coupling flange
Screws
O-ring
ODU ASN
Eyelet terminal
Grounding bolt
Fig.136 - ODU ASN with standard coupling flange
MN.00224.E - 011
229
2 (Torque 2Nm)
M10
3 (Torque 46Nm)
Fig.137 - 1+0 ODU installation
230
MN.00224.E - 011
5
3
4
Fig.138 - 1+1 ODU installation
MN.00224.E - 011
231
Fig.139 - Polarization disk
114-60
3
1
4
5
4
Fig.140 - 1+0 antenna flange
232
MN.00224.E - 011
7
4
3
Fig.141 - 1+1 antenna flange
MN.00224.E - 011
233
22
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF 8+0 ODU

22.1
GENERALS
To install the ODUs of 8+0 system you need the following components:
diameter of the pole: 60-114 mm
V60100-1 ASN support kit (60-114)
2x V60361 4+0 7GHz Multichannel support
8x ASN 7GHz Single channel ODU
8x V60049-10 kit with 4 M10 screws and O-ring
2 x same length flexible waveguide
dual Polarization High XPD Antenna with pole support
The 8 IDU-ODU coax cables plus tail must have the same length with a tolerance of 1.5 m.
22.2
N+0
See Fig.142.
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15 mm spanner, torque = 46
Nm)
See Fig.143.
Mount the multichannel support (4) on the back of the supporting plate (1) by means of four 25
mm M10 bolts (5) (use 15 mm spanner with torque = 46 Nm) in the holes (6).

Mounting each ODU on the multichannel support:
Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm M10 bolts (8). The sliding surface should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease gun.
It should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be worn where repeated or prolonged contact can occur. Screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts (8) positioning them
in the holes (7) on the multichannel support (ODU side): each bolt should be tightened to have the
square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm, use 15 mm spanner (9)
See Fig.145.
234
Install ODUs frequency according frequency organization into SLOTs
Apply silicon grease e.g. DOW CORNING 4 to the O-ring (10) and insert in the proper track on the
ODU flange
MN.00224.E - 011
Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the multichannel feeder: vertical polarization must be used, the handle of the
ODU is at the bottom left corner
After the right position has been found, rotate 30 counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to
the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts
on the hybrid
= 46 Nm)
Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
Repeat for the other ODUs
Waveguides towards the antenna

See Fig.147.
After having installed the ODU in 8+0 configuration, the waveguides towards the antenna must be installed. The waveguides must be fixed to the antenna flange and on the two multichannel support. An excessive folding can damage the waveguide, see Tab.39 for details.
See Fig.146.
On optional kit V60366 must be installed onto Multichannel support port where ODU are not installed because of maintenance or because of N+0 less than 8+0 (e.g. 7+0).
On Fig.149 measures are displayed in mm.
MN.00224.E - 011
235
GROUNDING
The ODUs must be grounded as per Fig.144.
Frequency
out rebending
out rebending
rebending
rebending
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
E-plane a
H-plane b
E-plane a.
H-plane b.
6 GHz or 7 GHz
low
200 (7,9)
500 (19,8)
300 (11,9)
600 (23,7)
7 GHz high
200 (7,9)
500 (19,8)
250 (9,9)
600 (23,7)
11 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
13 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
15 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
18 GHz
130 (5,1)
280 (11,0)
150 (5,9)
300 (11,9)
23 GHz
110 (4,3)
230 (9,1)
130 (5,1)
250 (9,9)
38 GHz
80 (3,1)
140 (5,5)
90 (3,6)
150 (5,9)
a.
Bending E-plane
Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
b.
Bending H-plane
Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
236
MN.00224.E - 011
3
2
Fig.142 - 1+1 ASN support kit (60-114) code V60100-01
MN.00224.E - 011
237
1
4
7
Fig.143 - 7GHz multichannel support, code V60361
238
MN.00224.E - 011
7
8
Fig.144 - ODU with screws and O-ring from code V60049-10
MN.00224.E - 011
239
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 4
10
Slot 3
Fig.145 - Mounting ODUs onto multichannel support
240
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.146 - Mounting multichannel short V60366 onto multichannel support
MN.00224.E - 011
241
Fig.147 - Mounting flexible waveguides from antenna to multichannel support
242
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.148 - 8+0 layout
MN.00224.E - 011
243
1009
751
1494
433
646
1264
599
1310
300
350
636
406
258
R482
315
1262
839
433
114
R1291
100
105
Fig.149 - 8+0 layout and measures in mm
244
MN.00224.E - 011
Section 4.
LINE-UP
23
LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP
23.1
LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP
The lineup consists of the following steps:
on site radio terminal installation (user connections and ODU installation as described in the relevant chapters)
equipment switchon
equipment configuration (through PC software)
antenna alignment for maximum received RF signal level
network element configuration
check measurements.
Equipment installation is described in Section 3. INSTALLATION.
23.1.1
Equipment configuration
In order to have the link working properly, in the local and remote equipment the same parameters have
to be set:
system layout (1+0, 1+1 hot stand-by, 1+1 frequency diversity.....) (Equipment - Configuration)
ACM Engine (Equipment - Modulation&Capacity): during Line-up ACM Engine must be disable
Bandwidth&Modulation (Equipment - Modulation&Capacity): during Line-up set the reference

Mod&Cap
link ID (Equipment - General)
RF channel (Equipment-Radio-Radio Branch1A/2A-Tx Frequency Selector)
MN.00224.E - 011
245
The software to run is Web LCT Console and Web LCT on Internet Explorer with Flash player.
You can download Web Lct Console program and Flash Player from http://www.siaemic.com.
Traffic (Baseband - Tributary)

Used tributaries must be enabled on local and on remote equipment.
23.1.2
Antenna alignment and received field measurement
Purpose of antenna alignment is to maximize the RF received signal level.

Proceed as follows:
connect a multimeter to BNC connector on the ODU for AGC measurement
adjust antenna pointing as soon as the maximum AGC voltage value is achieved.
The relationship between AGC voltage and received field is shown by Fig.150.
The received field level has a tolerance of 4 dB in the full temperature range.
23.1.3
Network element configuration
A factory default address is assigned to each network element that must normally be reconfigurated on
site following the network administrator rules.
For this purpose it is required to connect the PC, where the WEB LCT program has been installed, to the
network interfaces: this has to be done via USB cable or Ethernet cable.
Warning: the checks that follow require the knowledge of the program use.
Run the program and perform the connection to equipment by choosing from menu Option the connection made via USB cable.
Perform the login to the equipment by entering:
4
Equipment IP address
User ID (default: SYSTEM)
Password: (default: siaemicr)
Proceed to program what above mentioned following this path:
IP Address: select Port Configuration. Enter the required port addresses in the available communication ports.
Routing Table and Default Gateway: select Routing table: add the routes and default gateway if necessary.
Warning: the routing policy depends on the routing type: static IP/OSPF/ISIS. The relevant routing
rules must be normally given by network administrator.
246
Remote Element Table: select Remote Element Table. Add station name. Add local equipment IP
address, add remote equipment IP address selecting Remote Link.
Agent IP Address: select Equipment Properties. Assign the address in accordance to the address of
Ethernet port.
If the connection is made via USB cable, the IP address is automatically achieved.
MN.00224.E - 011
23.1.4
Few considerations about addresses
Here are listed few observation to follow during the address/netmask setup:
1. PPP connection (RS232 and LCT ports) - PC address can be selected among:
a. Ethernet port address +1
b. broadcast address -1
c. a given address.
For a correct management, solutions b) and c) must be different than Ethernet port address.
2. PPP connection (RS232 and LCT ports) - if Unnumbered is used, the netmask relevant RS232 and
LCT ports must be equal or wider than the Ethernet port netmask
3. PPP connection (RS232 and LCT ports) - never assign network addresses to RS232 or LCT ports
(check that they are hosts).
23.1.5
Radio checks
It is advisable to perform the following measurements to check the correct operation of the radio hop:
transmitted power
received power
RF frequency
S/N measurement
All these checks make use of the WLC program.
Transmitted power, received RF level, RF frequency

-
run WLC program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.
on top of the window Tx/Rx power and frequency values are displayed. In case of Tx power and
frequency setup proceed to Branch 1/2 and Power/Frequencies submenus.
S/N measurement
-
Run WLC program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.
On the left side select S/N meas. 1 or S/N meas.2

In alternative it is possible to use the PRBS function if one or 2 Mbit/s line is free.
Perform the S/N measurement and check that values comply with the requirements.
23.1.6
ACM setting
In order to enable the ACM features in the radio links, the following parameters must be set on both ends
just to have the same configuration.
ACM parameters can be set in WEB LCT in Modulation and Capacity card in the window.
Mod.Cap/LinkID in case of ALplus2 and ALCplus2
BW&Mod/LinkID in case of ALCplus2e
ACM engine
Enabled - the link uses different ACM profiles
Disabled - the link uses the reference modulation only
MN.00224.E - 011
247
The ACM can vary modulation profiles between two extremes defined by the operator through software
configuration:
Upper modulation: when propagation, into the given radio channel is in the better condition (high
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the maximum throughput defined at Upper Modulation: the
highest modulation profile that ACM can employ
Lower modulation: when propagation into the given radio channel is in the worst condition (low Rx
S/N), the radio link is working at the minimum throughput, defined at Lower Modulation: the lowest
modulation profile that ACM can employ
Reference Modulation defines the spectrum mask of the Tx signal.

When more then one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected reference modulation (i.e.: 4QAM and 4QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically selected (i.e.:
4QAM).
About lower modulation

When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected lower modulation
(i.e: 4QAM and 4QAM strong), the minimum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4QAM
strong).
About upper modulation

When more than ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected upper modulation (i.e.:
4QAM and 4QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4QAM).
Tx Power Constant Peak mode (ALplus2 and ALCplus2)

Tx Power Ramp Up To (ALCplus2e)
Enabled - The Tx power is the maximum allowed in each modulation profile (only if reference modulation is equal to lower modulation)
Disabled - The link uses the same Tx power in each profile (Tx power is the Tx power at upper
modulation)
Bandwidth and Modulation
Transmitted channel bandwidth
Reference modulation, with ACM enabled, or used modulation, with ACM disabled
Permanent TDM
Number of TDM (E1 streams) always transmitted.
Extra TDM
Number of TDM (E1 streams) transmitted besides the permanent TDM, in each ACM profile. In case of Extra
TDM usage, in the Extra TDM Priority card is present the list of which extra TDMs are transmitted.
248
MN.00224.E - 011
3
2,625
2,25
1,875
1,5
1,125
0,75
dBm
0
-100
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
Fig.150 - Detected voltage versus RF received signal
MN.00224.E - 011
249
24
BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS
24.1
SCOPE
This chapter describes the procedure to back up the full equipment configuration. This permits to recover
the original equipment configuration in case of faulty CONTROLLER module replacement with spare.
24.2
24.2.1
CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD USING SCT
Configuration upload
Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools; Equipment Configuration Wizard window will be displayed.
2. Select Upload and then Backup Full Equipment Configuration; Template Selection window will be displayed.
3. Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted).
4. Press OK and then select the equipment to be uploaded from Upload Configuration File window.
5. Press OK and then edit the file name from Save backup as window.
6. Press Save; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup window will appear.
The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the upload
will appear the word done showing the procedure success.
7. Press OK to finish.
24.2.2
Configuration download
Once the spare controller has been installed, or every time you need the primitive configuration, proceed
as follows:
1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. Equipment Configuration Wizard
window will be displayed.
2. Select Download and than Restore Full Equipment Configuration from Equipment Configuration Wizard. Select Backup File window will be displayed.
3. Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. Download Configuration
File window will be displayed.
250
MN.00224.E - 011
4. Select the equipment to download and then press OK; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete
restore window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the download operation. The
word done indicates that download has been successfully.
5. Press OK to finish.
Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.
24.3
CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD USING WEBLCT
24.3.1
Configuration upload
Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1. select Backup/Restore Configuration in the Main menu
2. in the field Backup File name write the name of the configuration file you are going to upload in
the PC, complete with the full path of its folder
3. push Backup. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the Operation Status field.
24.3.2
Configuration download
Once the spare Controller has been installed or every time the saved configuration is necessary, proceed
as follow:
1. select Backup/Restore Configuration in the Main menu
2. select Browse local system in order to locate the configuration file you need and push Open when
it has been found
3. Push Restore. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the operation Status field. During
Restore operation the equipment creates a backup configuration, you can come back to this configuration at the end of the restore pushing Revert.
24.3.3
SD Memory card
A SD card slot is available on the ALplus2 Controller module (on the board) or on the front panel of
ALCplus2.
Using a SD memory card is possible to perform an auto restore of Configuration and of Equipment Firmware
every time a mismatch between running ones and saved occurs.
1. remove the screws of the SD cover
2. insert the SD into the slot
3. select SD Memory Management in the Main menu
4. in the Actions field select the operation you want to perform (......Enable automatic restore (all)
for example)
5. select Execute
6. remove SD
7. close the cover and tighten the screws.
MN.00224.E - 011
251
25
LINE-UP FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC
25.1
LAN SETUP
This paragraph deals with line-up of ALplus2 LIM Ethernet and ALCplus2/ALCplus2e IDU with details of WEB
LCT program related only to Ethernet application.
Differences among the IDUs are pointed out.
Main difference is the number of LAN ports: three in ALplus2 and four in ALCplus2/ALCplus2e, moreover
in ALplus2 the LAN2 port can manage POE functionality besides in ALCplus2/ALCplus2e Sync Signal can be
taken from LAN ports also (see relevant paragraph).
Assuming that the radio link is already in service, with correct frequency, output power and correct antenna
alignment, the line up procedure for two different kinds of connection set up of a radio link ALplus2,
equipped with LIM module with Ethernet ports, is hereafter described:
Local Lan-1 port to remote Lan-1 port connection Lan per port, see Fig.151
from 3 ports to 3 ports connections and segregated traffic for Untagged Traffic, see Fig.159
from 3 ports to 3 ports connections and segregated traffic for Tagged and Untagged Traffic, see
Fig.169.
Settings here below are intended to be done both into local and remote radio equipment. The software to
be used to configure the equipment is WEB LCT. In the following chapter the figures used as example can
differ in the position of main commands depending on WEB LCT release.
25.2
LOCAL LAN-1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN-1 PORT TRANSPARENT

CONNECTION LAN PER PORT
Settings for Untagged and Tagged Traffic
switch
switch
Lan-1
port 1
Lan-2
port 1
AL
radio
Lan-3
Lan-1
Lan-2
AL
radio
Lan-3
Nx2
Mbit/s
Nx2
Mbit/s
Local
Remote
Fig.151 - Local Lan-1 port to remote Lan-1 port connection

The first example is local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port transparent connection for tagged and untagged
traffic please refer to Fig.151.
252
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.152 - Modulation and capacity

Select 1+0 or 1+1 configuration according system requirements.
Please refer to Fig.152. First selection is channel bandwidth and modulation, in this example we selected
28MHz and 16QAM.
ACM Engine, Upper Modulation, Lower Modulation, Permanent Traffic and extra TDM Capacity at any modulation must be the same local and remote.
The throughput at any modulation with 28 MHz bandwidth is shown in Fig.153 with View Current Config
button of Fig.152.
Fig.153 - View Current Configuration
MN.00224.E - 011
253
So with 4QAMstrong modulation the Ethernet capacity is 20 Mbit/s and with 256QAM modulation the Ethernet capacity is 140 Mbit/s.
Fig.154 - Switch general settings

See Fig.154 for general settings of the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan-1 and
Internal Port A, see Fig.155.
Please notice the MAC Address Aging Time reduced, only for this test at 15 sec.
The other ports should be disabled. The correct cable crossover arrangement must be selected too (see
Fig.155). Enable LLF, if needed, only at the end of link line up.
Select Master or Slave Role for 1000BaseT interface.
Switch connections are done with Lan per port selections. Referring to Fig.156, incoming traffic at Lan-1
exits at internal Port A and as in Fig.157 and in Fig.158 incoming traffic at internal Port A exits at Lan-1
port. This connection are done for all Untagged packets and all Tagged packets with Vlan Id not described
into Vlan Configuration Table.
If Vlan Configuration Table is blank all Tagged traffic follows the rules of Lan per port.
Possible selections of Ingress Filtering Check:
"Disable 802.1q": no check of Virtual Lan tag is done and all packets follow Lan per port settings
"Fallback": if Tagged packets have their Vlan Id into Vlan Configuration Table they follow the connection described into the table, otherwise they follow the Lan per port settings as Untagged packets
"Secure": no Untagged packet transits; only Tagged packets with Vlan Id listed into the table can
transit.
For all previous configuration "Disable 802.1" should be selected. With Egress Mode as Unmodified the outgoing packets at Lan-1 port exit Untagged or Tagged exactly as they were Untagged or Tagged at the incoming port.
254
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.155 - Lan-1 interface settings
Fig.156- Vlan settings for LAN-1
MN.00224.E - 011
255
Fig.157 - Vlan settings for Port A
Fig.158 - Priority setting for Lan-1 and Port A
256
MN.00224.E - 011
25.3
FROM 3 PORT TO 3 PORT CONNECTIONS
Settings for Untagged traffic.
switch
switch
port 1
Lan-1
port 1
AL
radio
Lan-2
Lan-1
Lan-2
AL
radio
Lan-3
Lan-3
Nx2
Mbit/s
Nx2
Mbit/s
Remote
Local
Fig.159 - 3 ports to 3 ports connections with segregated traffic

In this example 3 local port must communicate with corresponding 3 remote ports. All the ports share the
same radio channel but traffic originated and directed to Lan1 should be kept separated from traffic from
Lan2 and Lan3 and viceversa.
Lan-1 to Lan-1, connection must transfer untagged packets.
Lan-2 and Lan-3 have the same requirements. Please refer to Fig.159.
Fig.160 - Modulation and capacity

28MHz and 16QAM.
MN.00224.E - 011
257
button of Fig.160.


See Fig.162 for Switch general settings of the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan1, Lan-2, Lan-3 and Internal Port, see Fig.163.
Please notice the MAC Address Aging Time reduced, only for this test, at 15 sec. The correct cable crossover
arrangement must be selected too (see Fig.163). Enable LLF if needed only at the end of link line up.
Select Master or Slave Role for 1000BaseT interface.
258
MN.00224.E - 011
For Untagged traffic, connections are done with Lan per port selections. Referring to Fig.164 incoming traffic at Lan-1 exits at internal Port A and into Fig.167 incoming traffic at internal Port A exits at Lan-1 port.
This connection are done for all Untagged traffic and all Tagged packets with Vlan Id not described into
Vlan Configuration Table.
If Vlan Configuration Table is blank all Tagged traffic follows the rules of Lan per port.
Possible selections of Ingress Filtering Check:
"Disable 802.1q": no check of Virtual Lan tag is made and all packets follow Lan per port settings
"Fallback": if Tagged packets have their Vlan Id into Vlan Configuration Table they follow the connection described into the table, otherwise they follow the Lan per port settings as Untagged packets
"Secure": no Untagged packet transits; only Tagged packets with Vlan Id listed into the table can
transit.
Fig.163 - Lan-1 interface settings

All the used ports must be Enabled.
The correct Cable Crossover arrangement must be selected too.
Untagged traffic transits only if the selection for Ingress Filtering Check is disabled at each input port and
a separated Vlan for Untagged traffic is set up for each port.
Each port of the switch must be associated with a different Default VLAN ID, Lan-1 with Default VID 4001,
Lan-2 with Default VID 4002, Lan-3 with Default VID 4003, for Lan-1 see Fig.163 and Fig.164.
Untagged packets coming at physical ports are tagged on common radio channel but tagged with different
Vlans. At receiving end packets are distributed at their ports and untagged.
Vlan Configuration Table will be defined in order to group traffic from Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3 to Port A.
The Vlan Configuration Table must be programmed as in Fig.168.
MN.00224.E - 011
259
Fig.164 - Lan1 Vlan settings
260
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.167 - Port A Vlan settings
MN.00224.E - 011
261
Fig.168 - Vlan Configuration Table
25.4
FROM 3 PORT TO 3 PORT CONNECTIONS
Settings for Tagged Traffic, QinQ
switch
switch
port 1
Lan-1
port 1
AL
radio
Lan-2
Lan-1
Lan-2
AL
radio
Lan-3
Lan-3
Nx2
Mbit/s
Nx2
Mbit/s
Local
Remote
Fig.169 - 3 ports to3 ports connections with segregated Tagged and Untagged traffic
In this example 3 local port must communicate with corresponding 3 remote ports. All the ports share the
same radio channel but traffic originated and directed to Lan1 should be kept separated from traffic from
Lan2 and Lan3 and viceversa.
Lan-1 to Lan-1, connection must transfer tagged and untagged packets. Lan-2 and Lan-3 have the same
requirements. Please refer to Fig.169.
262
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.170 -Modulation and Capacity

28MHz and 16QAM.
button of Fig.170.
MN.00224.E - 011
263

See Fig.172 for Switch general settings of the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan1, Lan-2, Lan-3 and internal Port A, see Fig.155.
For already Tagged traffic we need to add a second Vlan Tag to the packets creating the Vlan of Vlan into
radio channel, so we need a Max packet size of 2048.
Settings are as reported in Fig.173, Fig.174, Fig.175, Fig.176, Fig.177.
264
MN.00224.E - 011
MN.00224.E - 011
265
Fig.176 - Port A Vlan settings
Fig.177 - Vlan Configuration Table
266
MN.00224.E - 011
26
HOW TO CHANGE ADDRESS ON REMOTE EQUIPMENT WITHOUT LOSING THE CONNECTION
26.1
TOOLS
The following procedure can be done with SCT/LCT or with Web LCT and similar windows.
26.2
PROCEDURE
1. Set new addresses on remote equipment

2. Clear the Stored Routing Table on remote equipment and add new lines to it
3. Set the new Agent and restart remote equipment
4. Configure Local equipment
5. Prepare Subnetwork on local equipment, capture the remote equipment and send it the new subnetwork
Select the remote equipment

Select menu Equipment -> Configuration Setup -> Port Configuration
MN.00224.E - 011
267
Fig.178 - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Communication setup
Configuration
Configure:
IP Ethernet ->Ip address and netmask (see Fig.179)
Lct PPP -> Ip address and netmask (see Fig.180)
PPP Radio -> Ip address and netmask (see Fig.181)
If you have other port to configure ex. PPP RS232 - 2Mbit/s EOC etc. configure it with IP and netmask
268
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.179 - IP Ethernet
Fig.180 - LCT PPP
MN.00224.E - 011
269
Fig.181 - PPP Radio

At the end select Set Values -> Confirm and Store -> Confirm.
270
MN.00224.E - 011
Select the equipment

Select menu Equipment -> Configuration Setup -> Stored Routing Table
Fig.182 - Store Routing Table

In this menu delete all lines and default gateway, push Apply and then Save.
MN.00224.E - 011
271
Fig.183 - Stored Routing Table

Add new routine lines (relevant the new addresses configuration) pushing the Add button.
When the Stored Routing Table is complete, push Apply and then Save.
Select the remote equipment

Select menu Equipment -> Properties. Set new Agent (equal to Ethernet port address).
Push Restart and then Confirm.
After the restart, the Remote Equipment disappears from SCT display.
Configure the local equipment

Configure the local equipment with the same procedure seen before. Then restart the local equipment.
Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

To see both local and remote equipment the new subnetwork (station and equipment) must be prepared.
Select menu Tools -> Subnetwork Configuration Wizard.
272
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.184 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard
MN.00224.E - 011
273
Fig.185 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard - Actual Configuration
Push Add Station, write its name and push OK.
274
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.186 - Add new station

Select this new station and push Add Element.
The Ip Address to set is the Agent (equal to Ethernet port address).
MN.00224.E - 011
275
Fig.187 - Add New Network Element
After having set the Equipment Address, push OK.

The new element is created inside the previously created station
This step must be done for local and remote equipment.
276
MN.00224.E - 011

Select the local equipment (the one with System (Local))
MN.00224.E - 011
277
Send the configuration to local equipment.

When the remote equipment appears in Actual Configuration, prepare again the network configuration you
have set before (or select the local equipment, push Retrieve) and send the configuration to remote equipment.
278
MN.00224.E - 011
27
LINE-UP OF THE NODE WITH NODAL IDU
27.1
OVERVIEW
The following paragraph deals with the activation of the Node with Nodal IDU unit with details of the SCT/
LCT program relevant to the functionalities offered by the cross-connection matrix and Ethernet switch in
relation to the achievable connections.
Supposing that the radio links are already commissioned, the following items are described:
tributary - radio cross-connection
tributary - tributary cross-connection
ethernet switch.
27.2
NODE CONNECTIONS
The connections among the IDUs in the node are the following:
connections for E1: Nbus cables are used (connectors NBUS1 and NBUS2 are involved)
connections for Ethernet: Ethernet cables are used (ports LAN1 and LAN2 are involved).
The number of IDUs in the node is between 2 and 8.

In Fig.190 there is an example of connection between one IDU and the adjacent IDUs in the same node.
Remember that in a node for Ethernet Traffic can be used port 3 and port 4 only because port LAN1 and
LAN2 are used for nodal connections.
MN.00224.E - 011
279
From LAN1 of IDU8
IDU1
Max 8
IDU2
IDU3
From NB1 of IDU8
LAN1
LAN2
NB1
NB2
LAN1
LAN2
NB1
NB2
LAN1
LAN2
NB1
NB2
Node traffic transport:

- TDM (E1) --> NBUS cable
- LAN --> LAN cable
...........................
IDU8
LAN1
LAN2
From LAN2 of IDU1
NB1
NB2
LAN1 and LAN2 are used for cabling
From NB2 of IDU1
Fig.190 - ALCplus2 node connections
27.3
EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
The operations to enable the functionalities offered by the internal cross-connection matrix and Ethernet
switch are the following:
280
run the software SCT, select tools and Subnetwork Configuration Wizard
insert all the Nodal IDU present into the Node, all these Nodals must be reachable and connected
select Network, Nodal ALCplus2 Manager as in Fig.191
configure the Node with Station name, Node name, define is Nodal cables are Protected or Not
Protected
configure the Node indicating the number of IDU setting the Node for E1 TDM traffic, Number of
TDM Elem.
configure the Node indicating the number of IDU setting the Node for E1 TDM traffic, Number of
ETH Elem.
insert the IP number of the IDU setting the Node and press Apply Config button
at this point there are Cross-connections and Ethernet LAN details.
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.191 - Nodal ALCplus2 Manager
27.4
TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION
The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are:
to run the software WebLCT, open Equipment Menu, TDM Tributaries, E1 and select the type
of used tributary
to enable the E1 and/or STM-1 tributaries (transport of 63 E1 each) involved by the cross-connection
MN.00224.E - 011
281
to route an E1 stream to remote equipment, a Tributary-Radio cross-connection must be created,

the enabling of the stream itself is not sufficient, the cross-connection can be done directly into Nodal ALCplus2 Manager
in case of STM-1 streams, configure the parameters VC4 (Label - TUG Structure) and any VC12 (Label: Asynchronous) and the synchronization parameters (WebLCT, Equipment Menu, Synchronisation).
27.5
CONFIGURATION OF THE CROSS-CONNECTION MATRIX
The operations to configure a cross-connection can be done IDU by IDU into WebLCT or easier into the
Nodal ALCplus2 Manager:
run the software SCT, open Network, Nodal ALCplus2 Manager and press Cross-connection
select the type of cross-connection:

-
tributary - radio: cross-connection between the tributaries available on the front side of IDUs
(E1, STM-1, IDU1 to IDU8) and the tributaries available on the radio link, IDU1 to 8 Radio Extra
E1 and Permanent E1
tributary - tributary: cross-connection between the tributaries available on the front side of IDUs
(E1, STM-1, IDU1 to 8).
27.5.1
Tributary - Radio Cross-connection
select the type of tributary to use on the front side of the IDU: the relevant E1 streams will be displayed in the window together with the number of E1 streams relevant to the radio link
select which radio link you want to use in cross-connection (up to eight available)
move the symbol of the E1 stream (the number corresponds to the physical position in the connector of the IDU) by dragging and dropping from a type of tributary to the position to use in the radio
frame, see Fig.192.
the tributaries in the radio frame (link direction A or others) can be involved in a tributary loop towards the corresponding remote radio by means of a double click on the relevant box that points
out the position in the frame, see Fig.193
the tributaries on radio side can transit directly from a radio link to the other without need to pass
from the tributaries on matrix side: by means of dragndrop, a box relevant to an E1 on radio side
is moved from a link to the other link. The two involved links must be selected in the fields 1st Radio
and 2nd Radio. A passthrough (transit) cross-connection is so executed: see Fig.194
to delete a cross-connection, move it to the trash
to activate the configuration, press Apply and Confirm.
27.5.2
Tributary - Tributary Cross-connection
282
select the two types of tributary (1st tributary and 2nd tributary) on the front side of the IDUs module to use as ends: the relevant E1 streams will be displayed in the top and bottom part of the window
MN.00224.E - 011
move the symbol of the E1 stream (the number corresponds to the physical position in the connector on the IDU) by means of the dragndrop from a tributary type to another, see Fig.195
to delete a cross-connection, move to the trash
to activate the configuration, press Apply and Confirm.
This type of cross-connection includes even those relevant to the transport of E1 streams from a nodal IDU
to another one belonging to the same node.
NBUS connections are not displayed.
27.6
ETHERNET SWITCH
For Ethernet connections the Nodals are as one big switch with two Lan ports and a radio Ethernet port for
any IDU.
Connections between the IDU are not shown into SCT but are programmed automatically by SCT in order
to create the big switch.
Setting of the Ethernet switch is performed through Nodal ALCplus2 Manager which then programs any
Nodal part of the switch.
All settings of Ethernet switches part of the Node can be done directly into Nodal ALCplus2 Manager.
See from Fig.196 to Fig.207.
Fig.192 - Drag and drop E1 stream
MN.00224.E - 011
283
Fig.193 - VC auto loop
284
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.194 - Pass-through cross-connection
MN.00224.E - 011
285
Fig.195 - Drag and drop E1 stream
286
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.196 - Ethernet switch settings
MN.00224.E - 011
287
288
MN.00224.E - 011
MN.00224.E - 011
289
290
MN.00224.E - 011
MN.00224.E - 011
291
292
MN.00224.E - 011
MN.00224.E - 011
293
294
MN.00224.E - 011
MN.00224.E - 011
295
296
MN.00224.E - 011
MN.00224.E - 011
297
28
EXAMPLE OF ALCPLUS2 NODE EXPANSION
28.1
INTRODUCTION
The goal of this chapter is to define a procedure to add one (or more) ALCplus2 IDU to an existing node of
similar IDUs, carrying live traffic. This procedure is applicable to the following IDUs:
GAI0162
GAI0163
equipped with system versions 01.01.xx.

In the following paragraphs some screenshots are provided, related to a 3-IDU node expanded to a 4-IDU
node, as an example. The example can be easily applied to a N-IDU node (i.e. a node composed by a number of IDUs equal to N) expanded to N+K-IDU node: the 3 to 4 IDU case corresponds to the N=3 K=1 case.
This procedure does not provide specific guidance about the GEthernet traffic: with this respect the node
expansion shall be treated as an usual case of interconnection between Ethernet Switches, implementing
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
Attention: this procedure covers also the case when you want to withdraw one (or more) IDU from the
node.
28.2
PRECONDITIONS
The SCT distribution to be used to perform this task shall be 4.6.8 or greater.
All the IDUs are reachable by the PC running the SCT/Web browser. All the operations performed via SCT/
WebLCT shall be done logged as 'System' into the relevant equipment.
The existing node is composed by IDUs configured as "AlcPlus2 (Protected)". See hereafter the screenshots
relevant to an example.
298
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.208 - Node composition
MN.00224.E - 011
299
Fig.209 - Node composition
28.3
NBUS AND INTRA-NODE GE CABLING RULES
In a N-IDU node, the NBUS cabling shall be as follows:
IDU 1 NBUS 1 shall be connected to IDU 2 NBUS 2
IDU 2 NBUS 1 shall be connected to IDU 3 NBUS 2
IDU J NBUS 1 shall be connected to IDU J+1 NBUS 2
IDU N NBUS 1 shall be connected to IDU 1 NBUS 2.
In a N-IDU node, the intra-node GEth. cabling shall be as follows:
300
IDU 1 LAN1 port shall be connected to IDU 2 LAN2 port
IDU 2 LAN1 port shall be connected to IDU 3 LAN2 port
IDU J LAN1 port shall be connected to IDU J+1 LAN2 port
IDU N LAN1 port shall be connected to IDU 1 LAN2 port.
MN.00224.E - 011
28.4
NODE EXPANSION FROM N TO N+K ELEMENTS
28.4.1
Step 1
Install the K new IDUs in the same rack where the existing node is installed (or in an adjacent rack, provided that the NBUS cables length is compatible with the installation). Do not connect the N-BUS cables
to the new IDUs.
Configure the new IDUs as "AlcPlus2 (Protected)", with the following parameters:
Nodes Id: from N+1 to N+K, depending on the IDU position inside the node
Number of nodes: N+K
28.4.2
Step 2
Interconnect the new IDUs with the nodal bus, as per rule in 28.2 PRECONDITIONS. Do not connect the
new IDUs to the existing IDUs.
28.4.3
Step 3 (traffic affecting)
Disconnect the N-BUS 2 from IDU 1.

Depending on the number and kind of interconnections among the IDUs, there will be errors and/or AIS
on some of the E1, due to the traffic protection intervention on the N-BUS. The typical duration of the traffic
interruption, measured at E1 level, is around 1s.
Alarms will appear: some possibly related to E1 traffic (depending on the existing interconnections) and at
least two one related to the nodal bus interruption. The E1 related alarms will disappear as soon as the
protection on the N-BUS will take place. The N-BUS related alarms will remain. See screenshots hereafter
as an example.
MN.00224.E - 011
301
Fig.210 - Current alarms
28.4.4
Step 4
Change configuration of IDU 1 and IDU N, modifying the 'number of nodes' parameter from N to N+K.
Change configuration of IDUs from number 2 to number N-1, modifying the 'number of nodes' parameter
from N to N+K.
28.4.5
Connect the N-BUS from IDU N to IDU N+1 as per rule in paragraph 28.2 PRECONDITIONS. Connect the
N-BUS from IDU N+K to IDU 1, as per rule in paragraph 28.2 PRECONDITIONS.
The N-BUS related alarms shall disappear.
302
MN.00224.E - 011
28.5
NODE REDUCTION FROM N+K TO N ELEMENTS
Basically this procedure consists in reverting the steps done to expand the node.
28.5.1
Disconnect the N-BUS from IDU N to IDU N+1 and from IDU N+K to IDU 1.
The N-BUS related alarms shall appear in IDU 1, IDU N, IDU N+1 and IDU N+K.
28.5.2
Step 2
Change configuration of IDU 1 and IDU N, modifying the 'number of nodes' parameter from N+K to N.
Change configuration of IDUs number 2 to number N-1, modifying the 'number of nodes' parameter from
N+K to N.
28.5.3
Connect the N-BUS from IDU N to IDU 1, as per rule in paragraph 28.2 PRECONDITIONS.
At the end of a transitional period the N-BUS related alarms shall disappear.
28.5.4
Step 4
Withdraw the IDUs from N+1 to N+K.
MN.00224.E - 011
303
29
LINE-UP RADIO TRUNKING (LINK AGGREGATION RADIO SIDE)
29.1
RADIO TRUNKING MODE (INTERNAL PORT - PORT A)
This mode is available only for equipment belonging to an ALCplus2 node and interconnected by nodal Bus
Ethernet. The radio Trunking mode allows aggregating some radio streams of a nodal system.
The functionality manages an aggregation group (Trunk): Enable-Trunk1.
To insert a radio port of a switch in the Trunk, it is necessary to enable the radio Trunking mode for this
port (Enable-Trunk1). In this mode, up to 4 radio ports can be aggregated.
The use of the radio Trunking mode is alternative to the use of the Spanning Tree protocol.
29.1.1
To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the trunking

mode
Operations available only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to the other
node elements by the nodal Bus Ethernet.
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens.
2. Bring in front of page the STP/Trunking tab. The tab points out the status of the port in relation to
the Trunking modality or to the Spanning Tree protocol.
Fig.211 reports an example of the tab when the Trunking modality is active.
Fig.211 - STP/Trunking tab (Trunk active) (Port A contextual area)
304
MN.00224.E - 011
Trunk Value:
Disable. Trunking mode disabled
Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled at radio port level.
If the STP protocol is enabled the parameter Trunk is automatically forced to the value Disable. To modify
the value, it is first necessary to disable the Spanning Tree protocol. STP Parameters relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol.
29.1.2
To enable/disable the Trunking mode for the internal port
Operations available only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to other elements of the node through nodal Bus Ethernet. The Trunking modality cannot be enabled when the Spanning Tree protocol is enabled.
Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens.
Bring in front of page the STP/Trunking tab. The Trunk parameter points out the enabling status of
the Trunking mode for the selected port (see Fig.211).
To change the parameter, select the value:
Disable. Trunking mode disabled.
Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled at radio port level.
Press Apply and confirm.
MN.00224.E - 011
305
30
LINE-UP LINE TRUNKING (LINK AGGREGATION

LINE SIDE)
30.1
LINE TRUNKING MODE
This mode is available for a connection between IDU and ODU and from a node to other node connected
via Lan ports.
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command.
The LAN <port number> contextual area opens.
2. Bring in front of page the STP/ELP/Trunking tab.
The tab points out the status of the port in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection, to the Spanning Tree
protocol or to the Trunking modality. Fig.212 reports an example of the tab when the Trunking modality is
active.
Fig.212 - Trunking tab (Trunk active)

Parameter:
Status. Status of the port as regards the LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol):
Up. Protocol active.
Down. Protocol inactive.
Partner Id. MAC Address of the remote equipment located at the other end of the Ethernet connection (remote switch).
Tx Pck Cnt. LACP packets transmitted to the remote switch.
Rx Pck Cnt. LACP packets received from the remote switch.
Value:
306
Disable. Trunking mode disabled.
MN.00224.E - 011
Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN port is aggregated to the equipment
LAN ports, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk1.
It is possible to aggregate up to 4 LAN ports for each group (Trunk). Another example is to aggregate two
Lans on Trunk1 and other two Lans on Trunk2. Send Trunk1 to one IDU and Trunk2 to a second IDU.
All the Lan port belonging to a group (Trunk) must have the same speed.
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and it is interconnected to other elements of the node
through nodal Bus Ethernet, this operation is available for the external ports LAN3 and LAN4.
MN.00224.E - 011
307
31
LINE-UP OAM
Please, first read paragraph 8.8 ETHERNET OAM (Operation Administration and Maintenance).
To use the OAM facilities it is necessary to:
assign a Domain with its Level
bind a Maintenance Association to a VLan (that is sufficient to create MIP)
bind a MEP to a VLan.
Do the same on remote equipment. Now it is possible to verify the status of connection with Remote MEP
(Rmep), or send a Loop back Message (Lbm) or send a Link trace Message (Ltm)
31.1
FM DOMAIN
The OAM-FM Domain command manages the OAM domain of an equipment.

In details it is possible:
To verify the characteristics of the OAM domain of an equipment
To define an OAM domain for an equipment
To remove the OAM domain of an equipment
The name or the level of an OAM domain associated to an equipment cannot be modified. In order to modify
one or both the parameters, it is necessary to remove the current domain and to define a new one.
To verify the characteristics of the OAM domain of an equipment
Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > OAM-FM Domain command.
The OAM-FM Domain contextual area opens where the name and level of the OAM domain of the equipment
are displayed Fig.213.
Fig.213 - OAM-FM Domain contextual area
308
MN.00224.E - 011
If the Domain field is empty and available for the setting, this means that no OAM domain is defined for
the equipment. To define an OAM domain for an equipment
Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > OAM-FM Domain command. The OAM-FM Domain contextual area opens (see Fig.213).
Into the Domain box, type the OAM domain name of the equipment (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 45 characters).
Move the cursor Level over a number between 0 and 7 according to the priority level you wish to
assign to the OAM domain (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
Press Create.
The equipment is associated to the set OAM domain.
31.2
OAM-FM MA/MEP
This command is available only if an OAM domain has been defined for the equipment (see Fig.213).
The OAM-FM MA/MEP command manages the maintenance points of the OAM domain of the equipment.
To verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM Ethernet protocol
Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > OAM-FM MA/MEP command.
The OAM-FM MA/MEP contextual area opens, pointing out the status of the VLANs in relation to the OAM
Ethernet protocol.
Fig.214 - OAM-FM MA/MEP contextual area

Every VLAN is represented by a rectangle whose characteristics are described here below see Fig.215.
Fig.215 - Vlan status and commands
MN.00224.E - 011
309
31.3
VLAN IDENTIFIER - VLAN NAME - ETHERNET SWITCH PORT
Status of the port as regards the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the VLAN:
----, the port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan, other possible settings are: Untag, Tagged, Unmodif.
Name of the MA (Maintenance Association) associated to the VLAN.

Identifier of the MEP (Maintenance End Point) associated to the VLAN.
Only one VLAN at a time can be selected.
The Vlan must be into the range 2-4094 to be into OAM functionality.
Push-buttons:
Bind MA. Creates a MA and MIP.
Bind MEP. Creates a MEP.
Unbind. Removes the MA and/or the MEP associated to the VLAN.
The availability of the push-buttons depends on the status of the selected VLAN.
If a MA or a MEP is associated to the VLAN, only the Unbind push-button will be available.
In Fig.214 the arrow shows direction of messages, in this case the messages are sent into the equipment
at Lan 3 port. Further details can be found into Help on-line of WebLct for ALCplus2.
310
MN.00224.E - 011
32
LINE-UP ELP
32.1
ETHERNET LINE PROTECTION (ELP)
The Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) is a function which allows implementing a protection at physical level
(Level 2) between two or more LAN external ports.
When the user enables the Ethernet line protection, even the management of the ELP switch is enabled.
The switch operates in automatic mode: the equipment executes the switch when the LOS alarm is present
on the LAN port in service. When the alarm clears, the controller does not execute the switch again.
The Ethernet line protection is implemented by means of proprietary protocol. As consequence, the ELP
switch is managed without considering alarms or settings executed on the equipment on the other side of
the LAN connection.
In ALCplus2 equipment, the line Ethernet protection can be enabled at equipment level or at node level.
This last chance is available and meaningful only for the equipment belonging to an ALCplus2 node and
which are interconnected to other node elements through the nodal Bus Ethernet.
Fig.216 - ELP Enabling Protection

There are two groups of protection: Protection1 and Protection2. One group may have Lan1Lan4 up to 4
ports. Normal situation is two ports on Protection1 and two ports on Protection2. Protection1 can go to one
IDU Protection2 to a second IDU. Selection between ports is based on priority and cost.
The port with highest priority (that is lowest number) is selected. The port with lowest cost is selected
(ports with same speed, as the protected two, have same cost).
MN.00224.E - 011
311
33
LINE-UP ACL
33.1
ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL)
Access Control List (ACL) permits to define a list of IP address allowed to control the equipment.
It is possible to define some address or a range of address.
It is possible to create a white list or a black list.
Before activating Enable please create the list of allowed IP address, see Fig.217.
After creating a correct list of allowed IP address it is possible to Enable the ACL, see Fig.218.
Warning: with no address into the list and Enable active no computer can access the equipment via Lan.
With USB cable it is always possible to access the equipment.
ACL is effective only on local equipment, remote equipment reached by routing are not affected by local
ACL.
Fig.217 - Inserting allowed IP address
312
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.218 - List of allowed IP address
MN.00224.E - 011
313
34
LINE-UP SYNCHRONISATION
34.1
LINE-UP SYNCHRONISATION
With reference to Fig.219 lets do the examples:
Local
Remote
SETS
SETS
NBUS
STM -1
NBUS
LAN3 , 4
STM-1
TRIBA =
2MHz/2Mbit
LAN3 , 4
TRIBB = 2Mbit
TRIBA = 2MHz/2Mbit
TRIB 1 -16 = 2Mbit
TRIBB = 2Mbit
TRIB 1 -16 = 2Mbit
Fig.219 - Sync transmitted from local to remote radio

Examples:
1. Synchronisation is coming from Lan3 local (working at 14 Gbit) and it is exiting from Lan3 on remote
radio
2. Synchronisation is coming from E1 tributary 1 and it is exiting from E1 tributary 1 on remote radio.
314
MN.00224.E - 011
34.2
SYNCHRONISATION FROM LAN3 AT 1GBIT/S
The starting point is that local SETS circuit is synchronised by an external source which may be one of the
sources shown in the picture so also Lan3 or Tributary 1. Sources can be one or many with different priority.
Synchronization signal is transmitted from local radio to remote radio via radio frame timing.
Remote SETS is synchronised by incoming radio frame generated by local SETS that is with SDH quality.
All local signals are generated by SETS and will have the same frequency precision and stability.
Settings at local radio:
See Fig.220.
With WebLct go to Configurator -> Sync Enable -> Enable, press Apply and Confirm. Now into Equipment
Menu a new item Synchronization is available.
See Fig.221 into Synchronization the system is synchronised from Internal Source.
See Fig.222, now select TE-Lan3 and select Enabled with priority 1 which is the maximum.
See Fig.223, now if Lan3 is connected to a Lan port working at 1Gbit, the SETS is synchronised by Lan 3.
But Lan 3 Interface must be programmed as Slave and external Lan port must be programmed as Master
(for Gbit clock).
Now if local radio is receiving a correct signal, the SETS is synchronized by Lan 3 as in Fig.224
Settings at remote radio:
On remote radio enable synchronization as Fig.220.
On remote radio into Synchronization SETS folder select Radio and Enable with Priority 1. See Fig.225.
Now if remote radio is receiving a correct signal the SETS is synchronized by radio as in Fig.226.
34.3
SYNCHRONIZATION FROM E1
See Fig.227.
E1 tributary N is used as a signal transfer and a synchronization source for external equipment into remote
site.
Local SETS is synchronised by E1 Trib. 1. Remote radio SETS is synchronised by receiving radio frame.
We must Enable E1 Retiming so the E1 Trib. 1 at remote site can be used by external equipment as an
SDH synchronism source as in Fig.228.
MN.00224.E - 011
315
Fig.220
Fig.221
316
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.222
Fig.223
MN.00224.E - 011
317
Fig.224
Fig.225
318
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.226
Remote
Local
SETS
SETS
Modem
TRIB1
Modem
Memory
TRIB1
E1Trib1 used as 2Mbit timing source on remote for external equipment, needs
E1 retiming = Enabled on remote
Local = SETS synchronised by TRIB1
Remote = SETS synchronised by Radio, TRIB1 distributing synchronisation
(and data) to external equipment
Fig.227 - E1 retiming
MN.00224.E - 011
319
Fig.228
320
MN.00224.E - 011
Section 5.
COMMISSIONING REPORT
35
COMMISSIONING REPORT FOR ALCPLUS2E IDU
35.1
GENERAL INFORMATIONS
This chapter describes how to prepare a commissioning report regarding the installation of a link.
This report helps an installation team in the check of all the steps performed during the job.
35.1.1
Documentation
The site is installed and commissioned according to the following documentation set:
DOCUMENT NUMBER
1
DOCUMENT NAME
MN.00224 User Manual
The site must be installed and commissioned according to the Link document.
Checked
Item
DESCRIPTION
Enclosed copy of the Link project
Enclosed report of the factory test
Enclosed antenna data
MN.00224.E - 011
OK
NOT OK
321
35.1.2
Site Identifiers
Identifier of LOCAL Site

Identifier of REMOTE Site
Link identifier (from/to)
35.1.3
Configurations
Terminal (Site A or Site B)

IDU Part number
IDU Serial number
Equipment Firmware
System Version
N50010 Ver.___.___.___
Web LCT
N96109 Ver.___.___.___
Equipment Modulation/Bandwidth
Equipment Configuration
1+0
2X(1+0) eth S.P.
XPIC
Antenna orientation:
1+1 HSB
1+1 FD
2X(1+0) eth D.P.

East-West
azimuth
Elevation
Polarization (H / V)
Cross
Polarization
Discrimination
(>30dB)(only for double polarization antennas)
Link ID
User Input 1
User Input 2
User Output 1
322
MN.00224.E - 011
35.1.4
Network addresses (DCN)
Equipment provided with IP/OSPF SW stack
Addresses
Agent IP address
Ethernet
IP Address
IP Net Mask
In Band Management
LCT PPP
Radio 1
OSPF Area
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4
Port A
IP Address
IP Net Mask
IP Address
IP Net Mask
PPP Mode
Client
Server
Bridge
Radio 2
IP Address
(East-West)
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Default Gateway
PPP Mode
Client
Server
Bridge
IP Address
IP Net Mask
PPP Mode
Client
EOC Settings
E1 Time Slot n. ________

.
Server
Interface
MN.00224.E - 011
323
Equipment provided with OSI SW stack

ADDRESSES
Agent IP address
Ethernet
LCT PPP
IP over OSI
NSap
IP Address
IP Net Mask
IP Address
IP Net Mask
IP Address
IP Net Mask
EOC radio
User
Network
East-West
Radio 1
Radio 2
Gosip address
Default Gataway
AFI
Domain
.
Area
.
Bridge
System ID
.
Sel.
.
Interface
Test Check
Passed----->
Failed----->
Comments:
Executed by:
Date:
324
for Siae:
MN.00224.E - 011
35.2
SITE INSPECTION
Note: The purpose of this inspection is to be sure that the site is ready for the commissioning of the Radio
Link.
Checked
Item
1
DESCRIPTION
OK
NOT OK
Grounding connections present and properly installed
1.1
Grounding connection of the rack
1.2
Grounding connection of the IDU unit
1.3
Grounding connection of the ODU unit
1.4
Grounding connection of metallic structures for the equipment support

(if foreseen)
Check of the proper installation and tensile stress of the windbracings,

if required
Structure for the support of the ODU unit correctly installed and oriented to the required direction
Grounding Kit cables properly installed
Feeder and tails properly installed and fixed to the supports
Panel for antenna cable ingress drilled and provided with gaskets for
tin passage
Rack properly installed and fixed to wall and/or to floor
Cables in internal site properly fixed and labelled
8.1.
IDU/ODU cables (labelled on both sides)
8.2.
Tributary cables
8.3.
Power cables (cables labelled on both sides, labels on switches)
Notes:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Test Check
Passed----->
Failed----->
Comments:
Executed by:
Date:
MN.00224.E - 011
for Siae:
325
35.3
COMMISSIONING CHECKS
Checked
Item
1
DESCRIPTION
OK
Check of the received material, recording of the possible defects
1.2
Recording of the damages caused by the transport
1.3
Factory Reports enclosed to SSD
Power supply voltage and polarity corresponding to the specifications
Cables connected and waveguide
3.1
IDU/ODU cables
3.2
Tributary cables
3.3
Alarm cables
3.4
Power supply cables
3.5
DCN cables and/or inserted terminations (if used, otherwise present)

Configurations in compliance with the Link documentation
Enabled
Disabled
Trib A
Priority:_____
Trib B
SETS
4.1
Synchronization
E1 retiming enabled
4.2
STM-1 MST mode
4.3
Radio Branch label
4.4
TX SW on rem alarm
4.5
RX alarm Threshold
326
Trib n___
None
Priority:________
STM-1 n.2
Priority:________
Radio 1A
Priority:_____
Priority:_____
LAN A n.__________
Priority:_____
LAN B n. __________
Priority:_____
Trib.A normal
Trib.A T2
Trib.A T3
Trib.B normal
Trib.B T2
Trib.B T3
Tributary n._______
1+0
1+1 MSP
Branch 1 Name:_____________
Enable
Priority:_____
STM-1 n.1
Radio 2A
E1 Source type
NOT OK
Equipment setup
1.1
Disable
1+1 MSP no ALS
Branch 2 Name:______________
Check Period_____
Alarm Thr_____
-_______dBm
Radio parameters
5.1
Set TX and RX frequencies Branch 1
5.2
Set TX and RX frequencies Branch 2 (1)
TX1 (MHz):
RX1 (MHz):
TX2 (MHz):
RX2 (MHz):
MN.00224.E - 011
5.3
RF channel number Branch 1
5.4
RF channel number Branch 2 (1)
5.5
TX Power set by webLCT - Branch 1
dBm
5.6
TX Power set by webLCT - Branch 2 (1)
dBm
ATPC
6.1
TX Power control Branch 1
Manual
Automatic (ATPC) Range(dB)__
6.2
TX Power control Branch 2 (1)
Manual
Automatic (ATPC) Range(dB)__
6.3
ATPC PRX threshold Branch 1
High:_________
Low________
6.4
ATPC PRX threshold Branch 2 (1)
High:_________
Low________
Modulation / Bandwidth and ACM

Branch 1
MHz/QAM
Branch 2a
MHz/QAM
7.1
Reference Bandwidth and Modulation
7.2
ACM engine
7.3
TX power ramp up to
QAM
7.4
Upper Modulation
QAM
7.5
Lower Modulation
QAM
7.6
Permanent TDM Traffic
Enabled
Disabled
Radio 1A TDM number

Radio 2A TDM numbera.
Radio 1A Extra TDM n. Radio 2A Extra TDM n.a.
Modulation
4QAM-st
4QAM
8PSK
7.7
ACM table profiles
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Received signal level
8.1
RSL in reference mod. - Branch 1
dBm
8.2
RSL in reference mod. - Branch 2
a. b.
dBm
8.3
RSL in max. mod. - Branch 1
b.
dBm
8.4
RSL in max. mod. - Branch 2
a. b.
dBm
9
9.1
9.2
RX quality Link
Maximum Modulation with ACM Branch 1
Maximum Modulation with ACM Branch 2
QAM
a. c.
QAM
9.3
S/N max. Mod. in ACM - RX Branch 1
b. d
dB
9.4
S/N max. Mod. in ACM - RX Branch 2
a. b. d.
dB
MN.00224.E - 011
327
10
1+1 Coupler (if present)
10.1
Hybrid type
10.2
Attenuation Branch 1 by factory report (dB)
dB
10.3
Attenuation Branch 2 by factory report (dB)
dB
11
Balanced
General settings
11.1
Web LCT Measurements Resolution
11.2
Radio Switch TX Preferential
11.3
Set Active manual operation timeout = 2 s.
12
Unbalanced
___________dB
Auto
Branch 1 (if unbalanced hybrid)

WAIT TIME = 30s
Cross Connection list
a.
Only in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) configurations.
b.
Checked by WebLCT indication, in compliance with User Manual Addendum.
c.
Checked by WebLCT indication, in compliance with the project report.
d. In case of ACM enabled, indicate S/N measure related to the upper modulation scheme in compliance
with the project report.
Test Check
Passed----->
Failed----->
Comments:
Executed by:
Date:
328
for Siae:
MN.00224.E - 011
35.4
COMMISSIONING MEASURES
Configure the Link as defined in the following figure.
35.4.1
Tributary connections stability
Fig.229
Connect an E1 Transmission analyser to the DDF and check NO ERRORS or ALARMS for each E1 tributaries.
Connect all Ethernet tributaries to the router/switch and check NO ALARMS (i.e LAN LOS) for each ETH
tributaries.
Checked
Item
1
DESCRIPTION
OK
NOT OK
Check NO ERRORS or ALARMS for each E1, STM-1 and ETH tributaries.
Check mechanical stability of the connections.
E1 TRIBUTARY
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
ERRORS / ALARMS
E1 TRIBUTARY
ERRORS / ALARMS
E1 TRIBUTARY
ERRORS / ALARMS
STM-1
ERRORS / ALARMS
ETH TRIBUTARY
ALARMS
Test Check
Passed----->
Failed----->
Comments:
Executed by:
Date:
MN.00224.E - 011
for Siae:
329
35.4.2
Link Fade Margin
Configure the Link as defined in the following figure:
Fig.230
Disable the ACM Engine and set the modulation scheme in compliance with the reference modulation by
project.
SIAE Microelettronica radio systems have an embedded PTX manual attenuation (up to 20dB for the ODU
Universal ASN, using the automatic Fade Margin procedure by webLCT, and up to 40 for the ODU Advanced
AS-03) in order to attenuate via SW the transmit power and therefore the received field in the opposite
station. If the TX internal attenuation is not enough to verify the Link Fade Margin, there are two solutions:
insert a fixed or variable attenuator between the ODU and the antenna (recommended solution).
verify the Link Fade Margin in the maximum modulation available, only if the Link project report
include all parameters about this modulation (Calculated Fade Margin, RX threshold, etc.).
Fill the following table

.
DESCRIPTION
Fade Margin results
(based on automatic FM procedure by webLct)
Calculated Fade Margin [Real FM]
dB
Value returned from LOCAL TX1 to REMOTE RX1 [Real FM verified]
dB
dB
a.
dB
a. b
dB
a.
b.
in 1+1 HSB configuration.

in 1+1 FD or 2x(1+0) configuration.
Test Check
Passed----->
Failed----->
Comments:
Executed by:
Date:
330
for Siae:
MN.00224.E - 011
35.4.3
Loops and maintenance
Fig.231
All available line loops are explained in the following Figure.
Fig.232
Line Local Loop

Enable tributary PPI 1 and connect a PDH analyser (Tx, Rx) on the local NE tributary E1#1. Set E1#1 to
"Line Loop On".
Fig.233
After the loop no errors are reported on PDH analyser.
Remote Local Loop

Enable tributary E1#1 (on local and remote NE) and connect a PDH analyser (Tx, Rx) on the local NE tributary E1#1. Set on Remote NE E1#1 to "Remote LoopOn".
Fig.234
MN.00224.E - 011
331
IF Loop
Enable tributary PPI 1 (on local and remote NE) and connect a PDH analyser (Tx, Rx) on the local NE tributary E1#1 (PPI 1).
Set on IF Loop to "On"
Fig.235
RF Loop
Enable tributary PPI 1 (on local and remote NE) and connect a PDH analyser (Tx, Rx) on the local NE tributary E1#1 (PPI 1).
Set on RF Loop to "On". (RF loop is available only on AS-03 ODU)
Test Check
Passed----->
Failed----->
Comments:
Executed by:
Date:
332
for Siae:
MN.00224.E - 011
35.5
ETHERNET TEST
IDU Settings
To verify the Ethernet performances set both equipment following this table:
GENERAL Switch Parameters
Max Packet size
2048 byte
MAC Learning Vid Basis
Enable
Aging Time
300
QinQ Eth Type
0x9100
Radio Packet Fragment
Disabled
PORT PARAMETERS
Interface
Port
Rate Control M/S Autoneg Master/Slave Flow Control Cable crossover
Lan 1
Full Rate
Port A
Enable
Enable
Master
Disable
Mac Learning Speed/Duplex
Auto
Enable
Auto
Enable
PORT BASED VLAN

Lan 1
Lan 1
Lan 2
Lan 3
Lan 4
Port A
Port B
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Lan 2
Disable
Lan 3
Disable
Disable
Lan 4
Disable
Disable
Disable
Port A
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Port B
---
---
---
---
MN.00224.E - 011
Disable
---
333
Ethernet Tributary test

Connect the PC as shown in the following figure and set IP Ethernet Address in the same subnetwork of
the MNGT/1 IP Ethernet of the remote terminal.
Connect, by means of a CAT5 cable, LAN1 port to MNGT/1 IP Ethernet port of the remote terminal.
A ping test between the PC and the MNG/1 port of the remote terminal, connecting them directly through
a CAT-5E cable, is required.
Fig.236
RESULT
OK
NOT OK
PING test
Test Check
Passed----->
Failed----->
Comments:
Executed by:
Date:
334
for Siae:
MN.00224.E - 011
35.5.1
Link Residual BER test
Configure the Link as defined in the following figure:
Fig.237
Checked
Item
3
DESCRIPTION
NOT OK
Link Residual BER via internal PRBS test set (by Web LCT)
3.1
Unprotected system 1+0:
measure >12 hours
3.2
Protected system 1+1:
measure >12 hours on Branch 1 (manual switch)
3.3
4
OK
measure >12 hour on Branch 2 (manual switch)

Measure Report (if available)
Values accepted for 12h measure

NO ERRORS
(Guaranteed RBER limit < 1e-12)
Test Check
Passed----->
Failed----->
Comments:
Executed by:
Date:
MN.00224.E - 011
for Siae:
335
35.6
FINAL CHECK LIST
Checked
Item
a.
ALARM CABLING (IF REQUIRED)
OK
Alarm cable terminated on terminal block
Alarms cabled in compliance with the specifications in rule
Check of the functionality of the alarm cabling forcing the error condition on
the equipment
NOT OK
Alarm list to cable on Customer's demand
Checked
Item
1
DESCRIPTION
OK
Not OK
Completed equipment
1.1
All the connectors properly tightened
1.2
Antenna fixing properly tightened
1.3
Radio Link System on
1.4
Installation, Commissioning and Integration completely executed
Test Check
Passed----->
Failed----->
Comments:
Executed by:
Date:
336
for Siae:
MN.00224.E - 011
35.7
FINAL REPORT
35.7.1
Link activation date
Item
1
DESCRIPTION
DATE
dd/mm/yyyy
Radio link activated in service
Notes:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
MN.00224.E - 011
337
35.7.2
Certificate
FINAL TEST CERTIFICATE
This certificates that the equipment listed below with the respective order/s has passed the Final Test.
Order number
Equipment Type:
Site / Terminal ID:
Company
Date
Name
Signature
For SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A
SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A.

Via Michelangelo Buonarroti, 21 - 20093 Cologno Monzese, Milano - Italy - Tel +39 0227325.1 - FAX +39 0225391585
www.siaemic.com
338
MN.00224.E - 011
Section 6.
MAINTENANCE
36
ALARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
36.1
GENERAL
In these pages a description of alarms is given in order to help operators to perform equipment troubleshooting.
36.2
FAULTY CONDITION
A faulty condition is pointed out by LEDs on front panel (alarm area) or by alarms reported by management
software. Power ON LEDs are not considered (equipment are ON).
36.2.1
Front panel LEDs
ALplus2
FAIL: controller self test failed (red LED)
PoE: Power Over Ethernet enabled (green LED)
URG: critical and/or major alarms (red LED)
NURG: minor and/or warning alarms (red LED)
SW: firmware mismatch (red LED)
TEST: local manual operation active (yellow LED).
MN.00224.E - 011
339
ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
FAIL: controller self test failed (red LED)
URG: critical and/or major alarms (red LED)
NURG: minor and/or warning alarms (red LED)
SW: firmware mismatch (red LED)
TEST: local manual operation active (yellow LED).
36.2.2
SCT/WEBLCT alarm window
SCT
Active and old alarms can be monitored in Event History Log area, with alarm correlation between starting
and clearing time. Alarms are from all the equipment reached by SCT.
Active alarms only, can be monitored in Current Alarms window. Alarms are from selected equipment only.
WEBLCT
In Event List area of WEBLCT all alarms are listed, local ones on the left, remote ones on the right (.... if
Remote List is well configured).
Moving the mouse over an alarm, its starting time, severity and group information are pointed out. There
is correlation between starting and clearing time.
36.2.3
Direction of an alarm
When an alarm occurs, its origin can be hardware or can be a problem caused by failures or a bad situation
(propagation and/or configuration mismatch) in previous parts of the equipment: an alarm can be caused
by previous alarms and, not only, the same alarm can produce further alarms.
In this way, it/s important to understand the direction of the problem described by alarms.
Tx direction, from LIM to ODU flange

A problem in LIM can cause alarms in ODU also: when a situation of more alarms is occurring, the most
significant alarm is at the beginning of Tx chain, all the others following are due to this.
Rx direction, from ODU flange to LIM

A problem in ODU, or in far end terminal, can cause alarms in LIM also: when a situation of more alarms
is occurring, the most significant alarm is at the beginning of Rx chain, all the others following are due to
this.
36.2.4
Alarms group
Alarms are divided in groups regarding the module that has generated them or the described function.
340
MN.00224.E - 011
Common
Alarms related to Controller module and EOC channel.
ETH LAN
Alarms (internal and external) regarding Ethernet traffic and relevant ports.
LIM
Alarms coming from LIM failure or from:
Tx direction - external failure (tributary LOS)
Rx direction - alarms in previous module (RIM, ODU) or external failure (bad propagation or remote
alarmed or no remote)
Node
Alarm relevant the connections between the IDUs composing the node.
Performance Monitoring
Alarms regarding all measurements performed in Performance Monitoring section.
Plug-in module
Alarms relevant the plug-in modules used for STM-1 lines.
Port service
Alarms relevant the service ports used in the link.
Radio
Alarms not relevant to a specific module but relevant to the link.
RIM
Alarms coming from RIM failure or from:
Tx direction - alarm in previous module (LIM) or external failure (tributary LOS)
Rx direction - alarms in previous module (IDU-ODU cable, ODU) or external failure (bad propagation
or remote alarmed or no remote)
RT
Alarms coming from RT (ODU) failure or from:
Tx direction - alarms in previous module (LIM, RIM, IDU-ODU cable) or external failure (tributary
LOS)
Rx direction - external failure (bad propagation or remote alarmed or no remote)
MN.00224.E - 011
341
SETS
Alarms (internal and external) relevant to the synchronism sources and their setting.
SNTP
Alarms regarding the SNTP server.
STM1
Alarms (internal and external) relevant to STM1 stream, line side.
36.3
ALARMS
Each alarm is ordered group by group with the following explanations:
hardware causes of the alarm
alarms that could have generated the alarm (if any)
alarms generated by the alarm (if any).
Alarms list is ordered as in the following tables.
36.3.1
Common alarms
Tab.40 -
Common alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e

Alarms that could have
generated the alarm
Alarm
Causes
2Mb/s G704 Line Side AIS
Trib with EOC has AIS
2Mb/s G704 Line Side Fail
Trib with EOC is missing
2Mb/s G704 Radio Side AIS
Trib with EOC has AIS from remote
2Mb/s G704 Radio Side Fail
Trib with EOC is missing from remote
EOC trib LOS
Comm. 2Mb/s EOC Data Link
Trib with EOC is missing
EOC trib LOS
Comm. Radio EOC Data Link
Link EOC is missing
Link ID
Controller waiting for restore
Configuration mismatch (download

backup)
Equip. Man Op
Manual operation active (check list)
LAN Cable Fail
EOC LAN cable missing
RMON (Remote Monitoring)
Statistic Counter Ethernet
Fan
Rear Fans Failure
Rescue setup Active
Equipment in Rescue mode
OAM FM MEP
MEP not receiving
OAM FM MEP config.
MEP not configured properly
342
Alarm generated
EOC trib LOS
Telemetry Fail
MN.00224.E - 011
One Plus One

Configuration Mismatch
Master and Reserve configuration

Mismatch
Note: it can be cleared by

clicking on IDU alignment
button
One Plus One Twin alarmed
Twin Master (or Reserve) radio

alarmed
It may have generated a

switch
Branch 1, 2 XPIC Fail
Branch 1 or 2 XPIC failure
XPIC procedure Radio 1, 2 Xpic

disable (only for 1+0)
Fault Management Procedure active
Remote Xpic procedure Radio Fault Management Procedure active

1, 2 Xpic disable (only for 1+0)
into remote
36.3.2
Internal alarms
Local Xpic off

Remote Tx off
Remote internal alarms
Local Xpic off due to

Remote Tx off
ETH LAN alarms

Tab.41 - ETH LAN alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
36.3.3
Alarm
Causes
Link loss
Loss of Ethernet signal
Sync
Gigabit frame not aligned
Auto Negotiation
Auto negotiation failed
Link loss forwarding
Link loss in remote ports
Master Slave Configuration
Configuration error
Lag Lacp Protocol Down
Link aggregation not working
LIM alarms
Tab.42 - LIM alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
Alarm
Causes
Trib Signal Loss
Enabled trib missing or

disabled trib present
Trib AIS
AIS present in input
Modulator Fail
Modulator fail or without/low quality

input
Demodulator Fail
Demodulator fail or without/low quality input
ODU-IDU communication fail
Signal from ODU missing
Synch
Trib. Retiming not working
Temperature
IDU temperature > 75C
MN.00224.E - 011

generated the alarm
Alarm generated
Fan
343
36.3.4
Node alarms
Tab.43 - Node alarms - ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
generated the alarm
Alarm
Causes
Los
NBUS cable missing
Lof
FAW not recognized
MsAis
MsAIS in NBUS frame payload
Check
Wrong NBUS connection order between IDUs
Config. Mismatch
Wrong Node configuration
36.3.5
Alarm generated
Performance Monitoring alarms
The following list of measurements can generate alarms if their thresholds are exceeded for a configurable
amount of seconds (regarding periods of 15 minutes or 24 hours):
G828 radio
quality measurements on signal radio received
G828 LimA E1 line side
quality measurements on E1 line side
G828 LimA E1 radio side
quality measurements on E1 radio side
Rx Pwr radio
Rx power measurements
Tx Pwr radio
Tx power measurements
ACM radio
ACM profile monitoring
G.829 RST B1
quality measurements on RST (STM1)
G.829 MST B2 M1
quality measurements on MST (STM1)
G.828 VC12
quality measurements on VC12 (STM1)
36.3.6
Plug-in alarms
The following alarms describe the plug-in status:
344
status change
module mismatch
module
los
MN.00224.E - 011
36.3.7
Radio alarms
Tab.44 - Radio alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
generated the alarm
Alarm
Causes
Link ID
Wrong ID received
Link Telemetry Fail
Radio link missing
Link ID
Revertive
Radio link working on reserve branch
Alarms of the preferential

branch
Tx Fail
Tx switch on remote Ber
PRBS Fail
PRBS not receiving
Reduced Capacity
Degraded radio link capacity (Actual

Tx modulation Upper modulation)
36.3.8
Alarm generated
Link Telemetry Fail
Comm, radio EOC
data link
RIM alarms
Tab.45 - Radio alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
generated the alarm
Alarm
Causes
Power Supply
48 Vdc input missing, dc output not

compliant
RF unit not responding
Cable Open
IDU-ODU cable cut or not connected
RF unit not responding/

Comm. fail
Cable Short
IDU-ODU cable damaged (shortened)

Comm. fail
Cable Open and Short

(both active)
Power supply is weak

Comm. fail
MN.00224.E - 011
Alarm generated
345
36.3.9
RT alarms
Tab.46 - RT alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
generated the alarm
Alarm generated
Rx signal lower than Rx threshold
Remote Tx not working/

Bad propagation
LIM quality alarms
Tx power low
RT failure if Tx is ON
Man Op (Tx Off), Modulator

fail
IF fail
RT failure if Tx is ON
Man Op (Tx Off), Modulator

fail
RT VCO fail
RT failure
Rx quality alarm
BER 10-6
Bad propagation
Rx quality warning
BER 10-10
Bad propagation
IF out
Rx IF missing
Alarm
Causes
IDU-ODU communication
RT o relevant RIM damaged
Rx power low
36.3.10
Demod fail
SETS alarms
Tab.47 - SETS alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
36.3.11
Alarm
Causes
T0Fail
T0 missing
FreeRunning
Equipment in FreeRunning status
Holdover
Equipment in Holdover status
SynkLos
Selected Synch missing
SynkDrift
Selected Synch bad quality
SNTP alarms
Tab.48 - SNTP alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
346
Alarm
Causes
Unicast Server Lost
Server is missing
MN.00224.E - 011
36.3.12
STM1 alarms
Tab.49 - STM1 alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
Alarm
Causes
Los
Enabled trib missing or disabled trib

present
Lof
FAW not recognised
B2ExcessiveBer
Excessive BER
B2SignalDegraded
Signal degraded
J0TraceIdentifierMismatch
J0received is not the expected one
MsAis
AIS in Multiplexer section
MsRdi
RDI in Multiplexer section
MN.00224.E - 011

generated the alarm
Alarm generated
EOC alarm
347
348
MN.00224.E - 011
Section 7.
37
37.1
GENERAL
The radio equipment was designed to be easily programmed and supervised.

The following tools are implemented to the purpose:
SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal + WEB LCT Local Craft Terminal. They are used for remote and local
control of a subnetwork consisted of a maximum of 100 radio equipment.
NMS5UX Network Management. It is used for the remote control of an entire network consisted of
different SIAE equipment including radio equipment.
For details refer to relevant documentation. SCT/LCT documentation is available as help online.
37.2
WEBLCT
Equipment can be locally controlled by an embedded Web Server, the WEB LCT, and an http browser running on PC.
It is also available a software named SCT that can manage sub networks of SIAE Network Elements.
The hardware platform used by SCT is based on Personal Computer with at least the following characteristics:
HD with 100 Mbyte of free space
Windows XP/Windows Vista
Flash Player version 8.1 or higher
MN.00224.E - 011
349
Fault Management
The operator can check the status the equipment through an "Alarm Display Panel" that is automatically
updated by the system.
Alarm records are stored by the equipment in an history log together with all information which could be
of interest for the user, among which:
event occurrence date and time
equipment type and address
unit identification information
alarm description
event severity level
The operator can access the history log using different filters.
Equipment Configuration
The configuration parameters the operator can update from the WebLCT are:
System type (protected or not protected)
Channel bandwidth
ACM profiles
RF channel
ATPC enable/disable
ATPC Rx thresholds
RTPC
Rx power alarm threshold
Tributary port enable/disable
STM-1, VC4 and VC12 parameters
E1 cross connection matrix
Ethernet switch parameters
Synchronisation parameters
Alarm enable
Alarm severity
User inputs and relay configuration
TMN port configuration
Equipment Maintenance
The main maintenance parameters that the operator can update from the WebLCT are:
transmitter enable/disable
carrier only
loops5 (see Fig.238)
active state forcing in 1+1 configuration
PRBS
The following figure shows the loops that can be set from the WEBLCT, for any IDU configuration.
5 Line loops can be done for E1, STM-1 and Ethernet interfaces. Internal loops can be done for E1 and
STM-1 interfaces.
350
MN.00224.E - 011
Internal
loop (2)
IDU
Line
loop (1)
1.
2.
3.
4.
ODU
IDU
loop (3)
ODU
loop (4)
Line tributary loop

Internal tributary loop
IDU loop
RF loop
Fig.238 - Loop
Software management
A new firmware or a new WEBLCT release can be downloaded from the WEBLCT itself. Actual software release is reported to the operator.
Performance management
G828, Rx Power, Tx Power and ACM counters are calculated both on radio side and line side
All counters are available on 15 minutes basis and daily, the WEBLCT collects 16 blocks of 15 minutes counters showing in this way the history of 4 hours.
The user can Start and Stop the Performance Monitoring function.
The user can define a threshold for each counter, when the threshold is crossed an alarm is set by the
equipment, the performance alarm severity can be set by the operator.
Fig.239 reports all the Termination points for the performance monitoring supported by ALplus2.
G828 - 2 Mbit/s
radio side
G828 Radio 1
Rx&Tx
Power Radio 1
ODU1
G828 - B1 STM-1
G.829 B2 & M1 STM-1
Line side
IDU
ODU2
G828 - 2 Mbit/s
line side
Rx&Tx
Power Radio 2
G828 Radio 2
Fig.239 - Termination points for the Performance Monitoring
In addition to what shown in the figure above, the following performance monitoring features are available:
RMON for Ethernet port statistics, both on tributary and radio side
ACM performance monitoring counters
MN.00224.E - 011
351
Security Management
The WEBLCT Administrator creates and manages a set of user accounts, the security information (Password and User profile) is used for identification, authentication purpose.
Two operator levels are enabled depending on the profile assigned to the operator:
352
System: read and write user
RLOM: read only user.
MN.00224.E - 011
Section 8.
COMPOSITION
38
COMPOSITION OF ALPLUS2 IDU
38.1
GENERAL
The ALplus2 IDU is available in following versions:
1RU 1+0
1RU 1+1
1RU 2+0
All the units consist of plug-in modules as LIM/RIM/Controller that can individually be replaced.
Module part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.
38.2
IDU PART NUMBER
Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (see Fig.242) attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply informations are also written.
The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning:
MN.00224.E - 011
353
Tab.50- IDU part number
38.3
Digit
Letter/number
Meaning
Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical

structure
AL equipment
Indoor installation
4 to 7
0165
0166
Modular 1+0 - 1 unit - 16E1 + 2xSTM1 + 3GE

Modular 1+1 - 1 unit - 16E1 + 2xSTM1 + 3GE
COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT
1+0/1+1/2+0 Ethernet version

The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules. Each module is identified through internal label indicating the relevant P/N.
The P/Ns are the following:
-
LIM
RIM
CONTROLLER.
SPEED
ON
48V
PoE
FAIL
10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX
STM1
Trib: 1-8
USER IN/OUT
RS232
MNGT/1
Trib: 9-16
LINK IDU ODU

ACT
LINK
ACT
LCT
ACT
LINK
MNGT/2
REM TEST
WAY
SIDE
CH1
CH2
2Mb/s
Fig.240 - IDU GAI0165
ON
48V
PoE
FAIL
10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX
STM1
LINK IDU ODU

ACT
LINK
ACT
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
MNGT/1
Trib: 9-16
Trib: 1-8
ACT
LINK
MNGT/2
REM TEST
48V
WAY
SIDE
CH1
CH2
2Mb/s
SPEED
Fig.241 - IDU GAI0166
354
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.242 - IDU P/N
MN.00224.E - 011
355
39
COMPOSITION OF ALCPLUS2 IDU
39.1
GENERAL
The ALCplus2 IDU is available in many versions depending on he kind and the number of user connections
and facilities. The versions are listed in the following chapter and are offered in two different configuration:
1RU 1+0
1RU 1+1.
All of them consist of a single unit.
Unit part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.
39.2
IDU PART NUMBER
Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (seeFig.242) attached on IDU, top
ALCplus2 1+0 4GE 2xE1
GAI0157 (see Fig.243)
ALCplus2 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1
ALCplus2 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1
ALCplus2 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 Nodal
ALCplus2 1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 Nodal
SPEED
YELLOW
LAN 2
Trib. B
LAN 4
M 3.15A
250VAC
MNGT
LAN 3
LAN 4
LINK
LAN 1
Trib. A
LAN 3
SD
SW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
GREEN
48VDC
NURG URG
LCT
Fig.243 - ALCplus2 1+0
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
LAN 4
2
LAN 3
LAN 4
LCT
LINK
LAN 1
LAN 3
48VDC
NURG URG
1
GREEN
M 3.15A
250VAC
MNGT
Trib. A
1
SD
USER IN/OUT
1
SW
TEST ON
YELLOW
Fig.244 - ALCplus2 1+1
356
MN.00224.E - 011
SPEED
YELLOW
LAN 2
Trib. B
LAN 4
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 9-16
M 3.15A
250VAC
MNGT
LAN 3
LAN 4
LINK
LAN 1
Trib. A
LAN 3
SW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
SD
GREEN
48VDC
NURG URG
LCT
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
LAN 4
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 9-16
2
LAN 3
LAN 4
LINK
LAN 1
48VDC
NURG URG
LCT
1
GREEN
M 3.15A
250VAC
MNGT
Trib. A
LAN 3
SW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
SD
YELLOW
LAN 2
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 4
Trib. 9-16
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 17-24
Trib. 25-32
2
MNGT
LAN 3
ON
LAN 4
NURG
LCT
1
GREEN
LINK
LAN 1
Trib. A
LAN 3
SW
TEST
USER IN/OUT
SD
URG
M 3.15A
250V
48V
SPEED
YELLOW
ON
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 4
MNGT
LAN 3
ON
Trib. 9-16
LAN 1
Trib. 25-32
2
NURG
LCT
LINK
Trib. 17-24
LAN 4
1
GREEN
Trib. 1-8
Trib. A
LAN 3
M 3.15A
250V
48V
1
SW
TEST
USER IN/OUT
SD
URG
ON
YELLOW
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 4
LAN 3
Trib. 9-16
ON
MNGT
M 3.15A
250VAC
NBUS
LAN 4
48VDC
NURG URG
LCT
1
GREEN
Trib. 1-8
1
LINK
LAN 1
Trib. A
LAN 3
SW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
SD
YELLOW
SPEED
LAN 2
LAN 4
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 3
LAN 4
LAN 3
48VDC
NURG URG
LCT
LAN 1
M 3.15A
250VAC
NBUS
1
LINK
Trib. 9-16
ON
MNGT
GREEN
Trib. 1-8
1
Trib. A
1
SD
USER IN/OUT
1
SW
TEST ON
YELLOW
MN.00224.E - 011
357
40
COMPOSITION OF ALCPLUS2E IDU
40.1
GENERAL
The ALCplus2e IDU is available in many versions depending on he kind and the number of user connections
and facilities.
The versions are listed in the following chapter and are offered in two different configuration:
1RU 1+0
1RU 1+1.
Unit part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.
40.2
IDU PART NUMBER
Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (seeFig.242) attached on IDU, top
1+0
EPP
2+0/1+1
EPP
358
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1
GAI0178
See Fig.251
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1
GAI0177
See Fig.252
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL
GAI0176
See Fig.253
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 EPP
GAI0189
See Fig.251
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP
GAI0188
See Fig.252
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL EPP
GAI0187
See Fig.253
ALCplus2 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1
GAI0175
See Fig.254.
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1
GAI0174
See Fig.255
GAI0173
See Fig.256
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 EPP
GAI0186
See Fig.254
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP
GAI0185
See Fig.255

EPP
GAI0184
See Fig.256
MN.00224.E - 011
XPIC
2+0 or
1+0 XPIC
1+1 XPIC
EPP
ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 2xE1
GAI0172
See Fig.254
GAI0171
See Fig.255

NODAL
GAI0170
See Fig.256
ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 2xE1 EPP
GAI0183
See Fig.254

EPP
GAI0182
See Fig.255

NODAL EPP
GAI0181
See Fig.256.
GAI0196
See Fig.257
GAI0209
See Fig.252
GAI0208
See Fig.253
GAI0195
See Fig.257.
GAI0211
See Fig.252
GAI0210
See Fig.253
GAI0194
See Fig.257
GAI0205
See Fig.255
GAI0204
See Fig.256
GAI0197
See Fig.257
GAI0207
See Fig.255
GAI0206
See Fig.257
EPP
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 PWE3
GAI0198
See Fig.257
Hw
PWE3 2+0/1+1
ready
EPP
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 EPP PWE3
GAI0199
See Fig.257
Hw
PWE3
ready
2+0
EPP
ALFCplus2e 2+0 XPIC 4GE 18E1 EPP PWE3
GAI0200
See Fig.257
Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3
transmission
ready
1+0
EPP
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP PWE3
GAI0201
See Fig.252
Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3 2+0/1+1
transmission
ready
EPP
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP

PWE3
GAI0202
See Fig.252
Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3
transmission
ready
EPP
ALCplus2E 2+0 XPIC 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP

PWE3
GAI0203
See Fig.252
1+0
EPP
1+1
EPP
Hw
PWE3
ready
MN.00224.E - 011
1+0
2+0
359
YELLOW
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
LAN 4
M 3.15A
250V
2
LAN 3
LAN 4
LCT
R
GREEN
LINK
LAN 1
48V
NURG URG
SW
Trib. A
LAN 3
MNGT
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
Fig.251 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1
YELLOW
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 4
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 17-24
Trib. 9-16
Trib. 25-32
ON
LAN 3
LAN 4
LCT
GREEN
LINK
LAN 1
SW
Trib. A
LAN 3
48V
M 3.15A
250V
NURG URG
MNGT
R
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
Fig.252 - ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 4
Trib. 1-8
1
LAN 3
Trib. 9-16
ON
MNGT
M 3.15A
250V
NBUS
LAN 4
LCT
GREEN
LINK
LAN 1
48V
NURG URG
1
R
SW
Trib. A
LAN 3
YELLOW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
Fig.253 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL
YELLOW
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
LAN 4
M 3.15A
250V
2
LAN 3
LAN 4
LCT
R
GREEN
LINK
LAN 1
SW
Trib. A
LAN 3
48V
NURG URG
MNGT
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
Fig.254 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1
LAN 2
Trib. B
STM1
LAN 4
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 9-16
Trib. 25-32
2
ON
MNGT
Trib. 17-24
LAN 3
LAN 4
1
GREEN
LINK
LAN 1
SW
Trib. A
LAN 3
48V
1
LCT
M 3.15A
250V
NURG URG
SPEED
YELLOW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
Fig.255 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1
SPEED
LAN 2
LAN 4
Trib. B
STM1
1
Trib. 1-8
1
MNGT
LAN 3
LAN 4
LINK
LAN 1
1
SW
Trib. A
LAN 3
48V
NURG URG
LCT
R
GREEN
M 3.15A
250V
NBUS
Trib. 9-16
ON
YELLOW
TEST ON
USER IN/OUT
Fig.256 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL
SPEED
LAN 2
Trib. B
Trib. 1-8
LAN 4
Trib. 9-16
2
2
MNGT
R
GREEN
LAN 3
LAN 4
LCT
LINK
LAN 1
LAN 3
Trib. A
NURG
URG
M 3.15A
250V
48V
SW
SD
USER IN/OUT
TEST
ON
YELLOW
Fig.257 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1
360
MN.00224.E - 011
41
COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT
41.1
GENERAL
The ODU consists of a mechanical structure that houses all the transceiver circuitry. In 1+1 HSB version
the connection to the antenna is performed through a passive hybrid.
Both transceiver and hybrid are offered in different versions depending on the operating bands, the antenna configuration etc...
A label (see Fig.258) attached on the ODU structure shows the most significant parameters as go/return
frequency value, subband, operating band and part number.
Part number identifies the ODU type. ODU description in the following tables shows frequency, go-return,
channel and capacity if specified.
For example:
ODU AS 11/530 ITU CH9L 2xSTM1 means:

ODU 11 GHz band frequency, 530 MHz go-return, CH9 Low fixed preset, 2xSTM1 capacity
ODU AS 23/1008 SB 2H means:

ODU 23 GHz band frequency, 1008 MHz go-return, 2 high subband.
In Tab.51, Tab.52 and Tab.53 various ODU versions and hybrid part number are listed.
Part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.
Tab.51 - Part number and description
RF band in GHz
MN.00224.E - 011
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS6L CH=1H
GE9185
ODU AS6L CH=1H
GE9185-03
ODU AS6L CH=1L
GE9184
ODU AS6L CH=1L
GE9184-03
ODU AS6L CH=2H
GE9187
ODU AS6L CH=2H
GE9187-03
ODU AS6L CH=2L
GE9186
ODU AS6L CH=2L
GE9186-03
ODU AS6L CH=3H
GE9189
ODU AS6L CH=3H
GE9189-03
ODU AS6L CH=3L
GE9188
ODU AS6L CH=3L
GE9188-03
361
RF band in GHz
362
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS6L CH=4H
GE9191
ODU AS6L CH=4H
GE9191-03
ODU AS6L CH=4L
GE9190
ODU AS6L CH=4L
GE9190-03
ODU AS6L CH=5H
GE9193
ODU AS6L CH=5H
GE9193-03
ODU AS6L CH=5L
GE9192
ODU AS6L CH=5L
GE9192-03
ODU AS6L CH=6H
GE9195
ODU AS6L CH=6H
GE9195-03
ODU AS6L CH=6L
GE9194
ODU AS6L CH=6L
GE9194-03
ODU AS6L CH=7H
GE9197
ODU AS6L CH=7H
GE9197-03
ODU AS6L CH=7L
GE9196
ODU AS6L CH=7L
GE9196-03
ODU AS6L CH=8H
GE9199
ODU AS6L CH=8H
GE9199-03
ODU AS6L CH=8L
GE9198
ODU AS6L CH=8L
GE9198-03
ODU AS6L SB=1H
GE9269
ODU AS6L SB=1H
GE9269-03
ODU AS6L SB=1L
GE9268
ODU AS6L SB=1L
GE9268-03
ODU AS6L SB=2H
GE9271
ODU AS6L SB=2H
GE9271-03
ODU AS6L SB=2L
GE9270
ODU AS6L SB=2L
GE9270-03
ODU AS6L SB=3H
GE9273
ODU AS6L SB=3H
GE9273-03
ODU AS6L SB=3L
GE9272
ODU AS6L SB=3L
GE9272-03
ODU AS6L SB=4H
GE9275
ODU AS6L SB=4H
GE9275-03
ODU AS6L SB=4L
GE9274
ODU AS6L SB=4L
GE9274-03
ODU AS6U CH=1H
GE9291
MN.00224.E - 011
RF band in GHz
MN.00224.E - 011
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS6U CH=1H
GE9291-03
ODU AS6U CH=1L
GE9290
ODU AS6U CH=1L
GE9290-03
ODU AS6U CH=2H
GE9293
ODU AS6U CH=2H
GE9293-03
ODU AS6U CH=2L
GE9292
ODU AS6U CH=2L
GE9292-03
ODU AS6U CH=3H
GE9295
ODU AS6U CH=3H
GE9295-03
ODU AS6U CH=3L
GE9294
ODU AS6U CH=3L
GE9294-03
ODU AS6U CH=4H
GE9297
ODU AS6U CH=4H
GE9297-03
ODU AS6U CH=4L
GE9296
ODU AS6U CH=4L
GE9296-03
ODU AS6U CH=5H
GE9299
ODU AS6U CH=5H
GE9299-03
ODU AS6U CH=5L
GE9298
ODU AS6U CH=5L
GE9298-03
ODU AS6U CH=6H
GE9301
ODU AS6U CH=6H
GE9301-03
ODU AS6U CH=6L
GE9300
ODU AS6U CH=6L
GE9300-03
ODU AS6U CH=7H
GE9303
ODU AS6U CH=7H
GE9303-03
ODU AS6U CH=7L
GE9302
ODU AS6U CH=7L
GE9302-03
ODU AS6U CH=8H
GE9305
ODU AS6U CH=8H
GE9305-03
ODU AS6U CH=8L
GE9304
ODU AS6U CH=8L
GE9304-03
ODU AS6U SB=1H
GE9285
ODU AS6U SB=1H
GE9285-03
ODU AS6U SB=1L
GE9284
ODU AS6U SB=1L
GE9284-03
ODU AS6U SB=2H
GE9287
ODU AS6U SB=2H
GE9287-03
363
RF band in GHz
364
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS6U SB=2L
GE9286
ODU AS6U SB=2L
GE9286-03
ODU AS6U SB=3H
GE9289
ODU AS6U SB=3H
GE9289-03
ODU AS6U SB=3L
GE9288
ODU AS6U SB=3L
GE9288-03
ODU AS6U SB=4H
GE9331
ODU AS6U SB=4L
GE9330
ODU AS7H/245 SB=1H
GE9137
ODU AS7H/245 SB=1H
GE9137-03
ODU AS7H/245 SB=1L
GE9136
ODU AS7H/245 SB=1L
GE9136-03
ODU AS7H/245 SB=2H
GE9139
ODU AS7H/245 SB=2H
GE9139-03
ODU AS7H/245 SB=2L
GE9138
ODU AS7H/245 SB=2L
GE9138-03
ODU AS7H/245 SB=3H
GE9141
ODU AS7H/245 SB=3H
GE9141-03
ODU AS7H/245 SB=3L
GE9140
ODU AS7H/245 SB=3L
GE9140-03
ODU AS7L/161 SB=1H
GE9253
ODU AS7L/161 SB=1H
GE9253-03
ODU AS7L/161 SB=1L
GE9252
ODU AS7L/161 SB=1L
GE9252-03
ODU AS7L/161 SB=2H
GE9255
ODU AS7L/161 SB=2H
GE9255-03
ODU AS7L/161 SB=2L
GE9254
ODU AS7L/161 SB=2L
GE9254-03
ODU AS7L/161 SB=3H
GE9257
ODU AS7L/161 SB=3H
GE9257-03
ODU AS7L/161 SB=3L
GE9256
ODU AS7L/161 SB=3L
GE9256-03
ODU AS7L/196 SB=1H
GE9009
ODU AS7L/196 SB=1H
GE9009-03
ODU AS7L/196 SB=1L
GE9008
ODU AS7L/196 SB=1L
GE9008-03
ODU AS7L/196 SB=2H
GE9011
MN.00224.E - 011
RF band in GHz
MN.00224.E - 011
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS7L/196 SB=2H
GE9011-03
ODU AS7L/196 SB=2L
GE9010
ODU AS7L/196 SB=2L
GE9010-03
ODU AS7L/196 SB=3H
GE9013
ODU AS7L/196 SB=3H
GE9013-03
ODU AS7L/196 SB=3L
GE9012
ODU AS7L/196 SB=3L
GE9012-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=10H
GE9329
ODU AS7M/154 SB=10L
GE9328
ODU AS7M/154 SB=10L
GE9328-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=1H
GE9173
ODU AS7M/154 SB=1H
GE9173-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=1L
GE9172
ODU AS7M/154 SB=1L
GE9172-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=2H
GE9175
ODU AS7M/154 SB=2H
GE9175-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=2L
GE9174
ODU AS7M/154 SB=2L
GE9174-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=3H
GE9177
ODU AS7M/154 SB=3H
GE9177-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=3L
GE9176
ODU AS7M/154 SB=3L
GE9176-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=4H
GE9179
ODU AS7M/154 SB=4H
GE9179-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=4L
GE9178
ODU AS7M/154 SB=4L
GE9178-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=5H
GE9181
ODU AS7M/154 SB=5H
GE9181-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=5L
GE9180
ODU AS7M/154 SB=5L
GE9180-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=7H
GE9323
ODU AS7M/154 SB=7H
GE9323-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=7L
GE9322
ODU AS7M/154 SB=7L
GE9322-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=8H
GE9325
ODU AS7M/154 SB=8H
GE9325-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=8L
GE9324
365
RF band in GHz
366
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS7M/154 SB=8L
GE9324-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=9H
GE9327
ODU AS7M/154 SB=9H
GE9327-03
ODU AS7M/154 SB=9L
GE9326
ODU AS7M/154 SB=9L
GE9326-03
ODU AS7M/161 SB=1H
GE9259
ODU AS7M/161 SB=1H
GE9259-03
ODU AS7M/161 SB=1L
GE9258
ODU AS7M/161 SB=1L
GE9258-03
ODU AS7M/161 SB=2H
GE9261
ODU AS7M/161 SB=2H
GE9261-03
ODU AS7M/161 SB=2L
GE9260
ODU AS7M/161 SB=2L
GE9260-03
ODU AS7M/161 SB=3H
GE9263
ODU AS7M/161 SB=3H
GE9263-03
ODU AS7M/161 SB=3L
GE9262
ODU AS7M/161 SB=3L
GE9262-03
ODU AS7M/168 SB=1H
GE9015
ODU AS7M/168 SB=1H
GE9015-03
ODU AS7M/168 SB=1L
GE9014
ODU AS7M/168 SB=1L
GE9014-03
ODU AS7M/168 SB=2H
GE9017
ODU AS7M/168 SB=2H
GE9017-03
ODU AS7M/168 SB=2L
GE9016
ODU AS7M/168 SB=2L
GE9016-03
ODU AS7M/168 SB=3H
GE9019
ODU AS7M/168 SB=3H
GE9019-03
ODU AS7M/168 SB=3L
GE9018
ODU AS7M/168 SB=3L
GE9018-03
ODU AS8/266 SB=1H
GE9279
ODU AS8/266 SB=1H
GE9279-03
ODU AS8/266 SB=1L
GE9278
ODU AS8/266 SB=1L
GE9278-03
ODU AS8/266 SB=2H
GE9281
ODU AS8/266 SB=2H
GE9281-03
ODU AS8/266 SB=2L
GE9280
ODU AS8/266 SB=2L
GE9280-03
MN.00224.E - 011
RF band in GHz
11
MN.00224.E - 011
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS8/266 SB=3H
GE9283
ODU AS8/266 SB=3H
GE9283-03
ODU AS8/266 SB=3L
GE9282
ODU AS8/266 SB=3L
GE9282-03
ODU AS8/310 SB=1H
GE9145
ODU AS8/310 SB=1H
GE9145-03
ODU AS8/310 SB=1L
GE9144
ODU AS8/310 SB=1L
GE9144-03
ODU AS8/310 SB=2H
GE9147
ODU AS8/310 SB=2H
GE9147-03
ODU AS8/310 SB=2L
GE9146
ODU AS8/310 SB=2L
GE9146-03
ODU AS8/310 SB=3H
GE9149
ODU AS8/310 SB=3H
GE9149-03
ODU AS8/310 SB=3L
GE9148
ODU AS8/310 SB=3L
GE9148-03
ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1H
GE9051
GE9051-01
GE9051-03
ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1L
GE9050
GE9050-01
GE9050-03
GE9053
GE9053-01
GE9053-03
GE9052
GE9052-01
GE9052-03
GE9265
GE9265-03
GE9264
GE9264-03
GE9267
GE9267-03
GE9266
GE9266-03
ODU AS11 - G/R490 CH=9H
GE9129-03
367
RF band in GHz
11
368
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS11 SB=1H
GE9235
ODU AS11 SB=1H
GE9235-03
ODU AS11 SB=1L
GE9234
ODU AS11 SB=1L
GE9234-03
ODU AS11 SB=2H
GE9237
ODU AS11 SB=2H
GE9237-03
ODU AS11 SB=2L
GE9236
ODU AS11 SB=2L
GE9236-03
ODU AS11 SB=3H
GE9239
ODU AS11 SB=3H
GE9239-03
ODU AS11 SB=3L
GE9238
ODU AS11 SB=3L
GE9238-03
ODU AS11/490 CH=10H
GE9131
ODU AS11/490 CH=10L
GE9130
ODU AS11/490 CH=11H
GE9133
ODU AS11/490 CH=11H
GE9133-03
ODU AS11/490 CH=11L
GE9132
ODU AS11/490 CH=11L
GE9132-03
ODU AS11/490 CH=12H
GE9135
ODU AS11/490 CH=12L
GE9134
ODU AS11/490 CH=1H
GE9113
ODU AS11/490 CH=1L
GE9112
ODU AS11/490 CH=2H
GE9115
ODU AS11/490 CH=2L
GE9114
ODU AS11/490 CH=3H
GE9117
ODU AS11/490 CH=3L
GE9116
ODU AS11/490 CH=4H
GE9119
ODU AS11/490 CH=4H
GE9119-03
ODU AS11/490 CH=4L
GE9118
ODU AS11/490 CH=4L
GE9118-03
ODU AS11/490 CH=5H
GE9121
ODU AS11/490 CH=5H
GE9121-03
ODU AS11/490 CH=5L
GE9120
ODU AS11/490 CH=5L
GE9120-03
ODU AS11/490 CH=6H
GE9123
ODU AS11/490 CH=6L
GE9122
ODU AS11/490 CH=7H
GE9125
MN.00224.E - 011
RF band in GHz
11
MN.00224.E - 011
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS11/490 CH=7H
GE9125-03
ODU AS11/490 CH=7L
GE9124
ODU AS11/490 CH=7L
GE9124-03
ODU AS11/490 CH=8H
GE9127
ODU AS11/490 CH=8H
GE9127-03
ODU AS11/490 CH=8L
GE9126
ODU AS11/490 CH=8L
GE9126-03
ODU AS11/490 CH=9H
GE9129
ODU AS11/490 CH=9L
GE9128
ODU AS11/490 CH=9L
GE9128-03
ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=10H
GE9229
ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=10L
GE9228
GE9231
GE9230
GE9233
GE9232
GE9211
GE9210
GE9213
GE9212
GE9215
ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=3H 2XSTM1
GE9333
GE9214
ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=3L 2XSTM1
GE9332
GE9217
GE9216
GE9219
GE9335
GE9218
GE9334
GE9221
GE9220
GE9223
GE9337
GE9222
GE9336
GE9225
369
RF band in GHz
11
13
370
ODU description
Part number
GE9224
GE9227
GE9339
GE9226
GE9338
ODU AS13 CH=1H
GE9151
ODU AS13 CH=1H
GE9151-03
ODU AS13 CH=1L
GE9150
ODU AS13 CH=1L
GE9150-03
ODU AS13 CH=2H
GE9153
ODU AS13 CH=2H
GE9153-03
ODU AS13 CH=2L
GE9152
ODU AS13 CH=2L
GE9152-03
ODU AS13 CH=3H
GE9155
ODU AS13 CH=3H
GE9155-03
ODU AS13 CH=3L
GE9154
ODU AS13 CH=3L
GE9154-03
ODU AS13 CH=4H
GE9157
ODU AS13 CH=4H
GE9157-03
ODU AS13 CH=4L
GE9156
ODU AS13 CH=4L
GE9156-03
ODU AS13 CH=5H
GE9159
ODU AS13 CH=5H
GE9159-03
ODU AS13 CH=5L
GE9158
ODU AS13 CH=5L
GE9158-03
ODU AS13 CH=6H
GE9161
ODU AS13 CH=6H
GE9161-03
ODU AS13 CH=6L
GE9160
ODU AS13 CH=6L
GE9160-03
ODU AS13 CH=7H
GE9163
ODU AS13 CH=7H
GE9163-03
ODU AS13 CH=7L
GE9162
ODU AS13 CH=7L
GE9162-03
ODU AS13 CH=8H
GE9165
ODU AS13 CH=8H
GE9165-03
ODU AS13 CH=8L
GE9164
ODU AS13 CH=8L
GE9164-03
MN.00224.E - 011
RF band in GHz
13
15
MN.00224.E - 011
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS13 SB=1H
GE9021
ODU AS13 SB=1H
GE9021-03
ODU AS13 SB=1L
GE9020
ODU AS13 SB=1L
GE9020-03
ODU AS13 SB=2H
GE9023
ODU AS13 SB=2H
GE9023-03
ODU AS13 SB=2L
GE9022
ODU AS13 SB=2L
GE9022-03
ODU AS13 SB=3H
GE9025
ODU AS13 SB=3H
GE9025-03
ODU AS13 SB=3L
GE9024
ODU AS13 SB=3L
GE9024-03
ODU AS13 SB=4H
GE9277
ODU AS13 SB=4H
GE9277-03
ODU AS13 SB=4L
GE9276
ODU AS13 SB=4L
GE9276-03
ODU AS15 CH=1H
GE9105
ODU AS15 CH=1L
GE9104
ODU AS15 CH=2H
GE9107
ODU AS15 CH=2L
GE9106
ODU AS15 CH=3H
GE9109
ODU AS15 CH=3L
GE9108
ODU AS15 CH=4H
GE9111
ODU AS15 CH=4L
GE9110
ODU AS15/315 /322 SB=3H
GE9205
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1H
GE9201
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1H
GE9201-03
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1L
GE9200
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1L
GE9200-03
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1L
GE9207-03
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=2H
GE9203
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=2H
GE9203-03
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=2L
GE9202
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=2L
GE9202-03
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=3H
GE9205-03
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=3L
GE9204
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=3L
GE9204-03
371
RF band in GHz
15
372
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=4H
GE9207
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=4L
GE9206
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=4L
GE9206-03
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=5H
GE9209
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=5H
GE9209-03
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=5L
GE9208
ODU AS15/315/322 SB=5L
GE9208-03
ODU AS15/420 SB=1H
GE9027
ODU AS15/420 SB=1H
GE9027-03
ODU AS15/420 SB=1L
GE9026
ODU AS15/420 SB=1L
GE9026-03
ODU AS15/420 SB=2H
GE9029
ODU AS15/420 SB=2H
GE9029-03
ODU AS15/420 SB=2L
GE9028
ODU AS15/420 SB=2L
GE9028-03
ODU AS15/420 SB=3H
GE9031
ODU AS15/420 SB=3H
GE9031-03
ODU AS15/420 SB=3L
GE9030
ODU AS15/420 SB=3L
GE9030-03
ODU AS15/420 SB=4H
GE9033
ODU AS15/420 SB=4H
GE9033-03
ODU AS15/420 SB=4L
GE9032
ODU AS15/420 SB=4L
GE9032-03
ODU AS15/490 SB=1H
GE9035
ODU AS15/490 SB=1H
GE9035-03
ODU AS15/490 SB=1L
GE9034
ODU AS15/490 SB=1L
GE9034-03
ODU AS15/490 SB=2H
GE9037
ODU AS15/490 SB=2H
GE9037-03
ODU AS15/490 SB=2L
GE9036
ODU AS15/490 SB=2L
GE9036-03
ODU AS15/490 SB=3H
GE9039
ODU AS15/490 SB=3H
GE9039-03
ODU AS15/490 SB=3L
GE9038
ODU AS15/490 SB=3L
GE9038-03
ODU AS15/490 SB=4H
GE9041
ODU AS15/490 SB=4H
GE9041-03
MN.00224.E - 011
RF band in GHz
15
18
MN.00224.E - 011
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS15/490 SB=4L
GE9040
ODU AS15/490 SB=4L
GE9040-03
ODU AS15/644 SB=1H
GE9313
ODU AS15/644 SB=1H
GE9313-03
ODU AS15/644 SB=1L
GE9312
ODU AS15/644 SB=1L
GE9312-03
ODU AS15/644 SB=2H
GE9315
ODU AS15/644 SB=2H
GE9315-03
ODU AS15/644 SB=2L
GE9314
ODU AS15/644 SB=2L
GE9314-03
ODU AS15/728 CH=1H
GE9105-03
ODU AS15/728 CH=1L
GE9104-03
ODU AS15/728 CH=2H
GE9107-03
ODU AS15/728 CH=2L
GE9106-03
ODU AS15/728 CH=3H
GE9109-03
ODU AS15/728 CH=3L
GE9108-03
ODU AS15/728 CH=4H
GE9111-03
ODU AS15/728 CH=4L
GE9110-03
ODU AS15/728 SB=1H
GE9047
ODU AS15/728 SB=1H
GE9047-03
ODU AS15/728 SB=1L
GE9046
ODU AS15/728 SB=1L
GE9046-03
ODU AS18 CH=10H
GE9073
ODU AS18 CH=10L
GE9072
ODU AS18 CH=11H
GE9075
ODU AS18 CH=11L
GE9074
ODU AS18 CH=12H
GE9077
ODU AS18 CH=12L
GE9076
ODU AS18 CH=13H
GE9079
ODU AS18 CH=13L
GE9078
ODU AS18 CH=14H
GE9081
ODU AS18 CH=14L
GE9080
ODU AS18 CH=15H
GE9083
ODU AS18 CH=15L
GE9082
ODU AS18 CH=16H
GE9085
ODU AS18 CH=16L
GE9084
ODU AS18 CH=17H
GE9087
373
RF band in GHz
18
374
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS18 CH=17L
GE9086
ODU AS18 CH=1H
GE9055
ODU AS18 CH=1L
GE9054
ODU AS18 CH=2H
GE9057
ODU AS18 CH=2L
GE9056
ODU AS18 CH=3H
GE9059
ODU AS18 CH=3L
GE9058
ODU AS18 CH=4H
GE9061
ODU AS18 CH=4L
GE9060
ODU AS18 CH=5H
GE9063
ODU AS18 CH=5L
GE9062
ODU AS18 CH=6H
GE9065
ODU AS18 CH=6L
GE9064
ODU AS18 CH=7H
GE9067
ODU AS18 CH=7L
GE9066
ODU AS18 CH=8H
GE9069
ODU AS18 CH=8L
GE9068
ODU AS18 CH=9H
GE9071
ODU AS18 CH=9L
GE9070
ODU AS18 SB=1H
GE9001
ODU AS18 SB=1L
GE9000
ODU AS18 SB=2H
GE9003
ODU AS18 SB=2L
GE9002
ODU AS18 SB=3H
GE9005
ODU AS18 SB=3L
GE9004
ODU AS18 SB=4H
GE9007
ODU AS18 SB=4L
GE9006
ODU AS18/1010 CH=10H
GE9073-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=10L
GE9072-03
GE9075-03
GE9074-03
GE9077-03
GE9076-03
GE9079-03
GE9078-03
GE9081-03
GE9080-03
MN.00224.E - 011
RF band in GHz
18
23
MN.00224.E - 011
ODU description
Part number
GE9083-03
GE9082-03
GE9085-03
GE9084-03
GE9087-03
GE9086-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=1H
GE9055-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=1L
GE9054-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=2H
GE9057-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=2L
GE9056-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=3H
GE9059-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=3L
GE9058-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=4H
GE9061-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=4L
GE9060-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=5H
GE9063-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=5L
GE9062-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=6H
GE9065-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=6L
GE9064-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=7H
GE9067-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=7L
GE9066-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=8H
GE9069-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=8L
GE9068-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=9H
GE9071-03
ODU AS18/1010 CH=9L
GE9070-03
ODU AS18/1010 SB=1H
GE9001-03
ODU AS18/1010 SB=1L
GE9000-03
ODU AS18/1010 SB=2H
GE9003-03
ODU AS18/1010 SB=2L
GE9002-03
ODU AS18/1010 SB=3H
GE9005-03
ODU AS18/1010 SB=3L
GE9004-03
ODU AS18/1010 SB=4H
GE9007-03
ODU AS18/1010 SB=4L
GE9006-03
ODU AS18/1560 SB=1H
GE9183
ODU AS18/1560 SB=1H
GE9183-03
ODU AS18/1560 SB=1L
GE9182
ODU AS18/1560 SB=1L
GE9182-03
ODU AS23/1008 SB=1H
GE9171
375
RF band in GHz
23
25
32
376
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS23/1008 SB=1H
GE9171-03
ODU AS23/1008 SB=1L
GE9170
ODU AS23/1008 SB=1L
GE9170-03
ODU AS23/1008 SB=2H
GE9049
ODU AS23/1008 SB=2H
GE9049-03
ODU AS23/1008 SB=2L
GE9048
ODU AS23/1008 SB=2L
GE9048-03
ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=1H
GE9241
ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=1H
GE9241-03
ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=1L
GE9240
ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=1L
GE9240-03
ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=2H
GE9243
ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=2H
GE9243-03
ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=2L
GE9242
ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=2L
GE9242-03
ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=3H
GE9245
ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=3H
GE9245-03
ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=3L
GE9244
ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=3L
GE9244-03
ODU AS25 SB=1H
GE9167
ODU AS25 SB=1H
GE9167-03
ODU AS25 SB=1L
GE9166
ODU AS25 SB=1L
GE9166-03
ODU AS25 SB=2H
GE9169
ODU AS25 SB=2H
GE9169-03
ODU AS25 SB=2L
GE9168
ODU AS25 SB=2L
GE9168-03
ODU AS32 SB=1H
GE9317
ODU AS32 SB=1H
GE9317-03
ODU AS32 SB=1L
GE9316
ODU AS32 SB=1L
GE9316-03
ODU AS32 SB=2H
GE9319
ODU AS32 SB=2H
GE9319-03
ODU AS32 SB=2L
GE9318
ODU AS32 SB=2L
GE9318-03
ODU AS32 SB=3H
GE9321
ODU AS32 SB=3H
GE9321-03
MN.00224.E - 011
RF band in GHz
32
38
ODU description
Part number
ODU AS32 SB=3L
GE9320
ODU AS32 SB=3L
GE9320-03
ODU AS38 SB=1H
GE9307
ODU AS38 SB=1H
GE9307-03
ODU AS38 SB=1L
GE9306
ODU AS38 SB=1L
GE9306-03
ODU AS38 SB=2H
GE9309
ODU AS38 SB=2H
GE9309-03
ODU AS38 SB=2L
GE9308
ODU AS38 SB=2L
GE9308-03
Tab.52 - ODU ASN part number and description

RF band in GHz
MN.00224.E - 011
ODU description
Part number
ODU ASN6L SB=1H
GE9501
ODU ASN6L SB=1L
GE9500
ODU ASN6L SB=2H
GE9503
ODU ASN6L SB=2L
GE9502
ODU ASN6L SB=3H
GE9505
ODU ASN6L SB=3L
GE9504
ODU ASN6L SB=4H
GE9507
ODU ASN6L SB=4L
GE9506
ODU ASN6U SB=1H
GE9509
ODU ASN6U SB=1L
GE9508
ODU ASN6U SB=2H
GE9511
ODU ASN6U SB=2L
GE9510
ODU ASN6U SB=3H
GE9513
ODU ASN6U SB=3L
GE9512
ODU ASN7L/161 SB=1H
GE9519
ODU ASN7L/161 SB=1L
GE9518
ODU ASN7L/161 SB=2H
GE9521
ODU ASN7L/161 SB=2L
GE9520
ODU ASN7L/161 SB=3H
GE9523
ODU ASN7L/161 SB=3L
GE9522
ODU ASN7L/196 SB=1H
GE9525
ODU ASN7L/196 SB=1L
GE9524
ODU ASN7L/196 SB=2H
GE9527
377
RF band in GHz
10
13
378
ODU description
Part number
ODU ASN7L/196 SB=2L
GE9526
ODU ASN7L/196 SB=3H
GE9529
ODU ASN7L/196 SB=3L
GE9528
ODU ASN7M/154 SB=1H
GE9535
ODU ASN7M/154 SB=1L
GE9534
ODU ASN7M/154 SB=2H
GE9537
ODU ASN7M/154 SB=2L
GE9536
ODU ASN7M/154 SB=3H
GE9539
ODU ASN7M/154 SB=3L
GE9538
ODU ASN7M/154 SB=4H
GE9541
ODU ASN7M/154 SB=4L
GE9540
ODU ASN7M/154 SB=5H
GE9543
ODU ASN7M/154 SB=5L
GE9542
ODU ASN7M/161 SB=1H
GE9545
ODU ASN7M/161 SB=1L
GE9544
ODU ASN7M/161 SB=2H
GE9547
ODU ASN7M/161 SB=2L
GE9546
ODU ASN7M/161 SB=3H
GE9549
ODU ASN7M/161 SB=3L
GE9548
ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=1H
GE9583
ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=1L
GE9582
GE9585
GE9584
GE9587
GE9586
GE9589
GE9588
ODU ASN10/350 SB=1H
GE9601
ODU ASN10/350 SB=1L
GE9600
ODU ASN13 SB=1H
GE9613
ODU ASN13 SB=1L
GE9612
ODU ASN13 SB=2H
GE9615
ODU ASN13 SB=2L
GE9614
ODU ASN13 SB=3H
GE9617
ODU ASN13 SB=3L
GE9616
ODU ASN13 SB=4H
GE9619
ODU ASN13 SB=4L
GE9618
MN.00224.E - 011
RF band in GHz
15
18
23
25
MN.00224.E - 011
ODU description
Part number
ODU ASN15 315/322 SB=1H
GE9629
ODU ASN15 315/322 SB=1L
GE9628
ODU ASN15/420 SB=1H
GE9647
ODU ASN15/420 SB=1L
GE9646
ODU ASN15/420 SB=2H
GE9649
ODU ASN15/420 SB=2L
GE9648
ODU ASN15/420 SB=3H
GE9651
ODU ASN15/420 SB=3L
GE9650
ODU ASN15/420 SB=4H
GE9653
ODU ASN15/420 SB=4L
GE9652
ODU ASN15/728 SB=1H
GE9691
ODU ASN15/728 SB=1L
GE9690
ODU ASN18/1010 SB=1H
GE9701
ODU ASN18/1010 SB=1L
GE9700
GE9703
GE9702
GE9705
GE9704
GE9707
GE9706
GE9717
GE9716
GE9719
GE9718
GE9721
GE9720
ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=1H
GE9727
ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=1L
GE9726
ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=2H
GE9729
ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=2L
GE9728
ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=3H
GE9731
ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=3L
GE9730
ODU ASN25 SB=1H
GE9737
ODU ASN25 SB=1L
GE9736
ODU ASN25 SB=2H
GE9739
ODU ASN25 SB=2L
GE9738
379
Tab.53 - ODU ASN HP part number and description

RF band in GHz
7GHz
ODU description
Part Number
ODU ASN7M/168 CH=5L
GE2209
ODU ASN7M/168 CH=5H
GE2210
ODU ASN7M/168 CH=4L
GE2207
ODU ASN7M/168 CH=4H
GE2208
ODU ASN7M/168 CH=3L
GE2205
ODU ASN7M/168 CH=3H
GE2206
ODU ASN7M/168 CH=2L
GE2203
ODU ASN7M/168 CH=2H
GE2204
ODU ASN7M/168 CH=1L
GE2201
ODU ASN7M/168 CH=1H
GE2202
ODU ASN7L/196 CH=5L
GE2179
ODU ASN7L/196 CH=5H
GE2180
ODU ASN7L/196 CH=4L
GE2177
ODU ASN7L/196 CH=4H
GE2178
ODU ASN7L/196 CH=3L
GE2175
ODU ASN7L/196 CH=3H
GE2176
ODU ASN7L/196 CH=2L
GE2173
ODU ASN7L/196 CH=2H
GE2174
ODU ASN7L/196 CH=1L
GE2171
ODU ASN7L/196 CH=1H
GE2172
Fig.258 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL
380
MN.00224.E - 011
Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES
42
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 14

Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 14
Fig.3 - Coiled cord ......................................................................................................... 14
Fig.4 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 15
Fig.5 - ALplus2 1+0 ....................................................................................................... 27
Fig.6 - ALplus2 1+1 ....................................................................................................... 27
Fig.7 - ALCplus2 1+0 and ALCplus2e 2E1 1+0................................................................... 27
Fig.8 - ALCplus2 1+1 and ALCplus2e E1 2+0/1+1 and ALCplus2e 2E1 XPIC 2+0.................... 28
Fig.9 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1 ....................................................................................... 28
Fig.10 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1 ..................................................................................... 28
Fig.11 - ALCplus2 1+0 32E1 ........................................................................................... 28
Fig.12 - ALCplus2 1+1 32E1 ........................................................................................... 28
Fig.13 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal..................................................................................... 28
Fig.14 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal..................................................................................... 28
Fig.15 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 ................................................................................... 29
Fig.16 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 ....................................................................... 29
Fig.17 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL ............................................................ 29
Fig.18 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 ............................................................................ 29
Fig.19 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 .............................................................. 29
Fig.20 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL ..................................................... 29
Fig.21 - N+0................................................................................................................. 30
Fig.22 - Synchronisation block diagram ............................................................................ 49
Fig.23 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 54
MN.00224.E - 011
381
Fig.24 - ALplus2 with 16E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram ........................................ 55
Fig.25 - ALPlus2 with 16E1, 2x(1+0) configuration, block diagram ....................................... 56
Fig.26 - Enabling Line Aggregation, Enable trunk1 ............................................................. 61
Fig.27 - Line trunking .................................................................................................... 62
Fig.28 - Radio trunking .................................................................................................. 63
Fig.29 - Line protection through distributed ELP................................................................. 64
Fig.30 - Hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains ...................................................... 66
Fig.31 - ALCplus2 with 32E1 expansion, STM-1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram ............ 72
Fig.32 - ALCplus2 with 16E1 expansion, STM1, NBUS, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram .... 73
Fig.33 - ALCplus2 with 2E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram ........................................ 74
Fig.34 - ALCplus2 with 16E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram ...................................... 74
Fig.35 - Node block diagram in protected configuration ...................................................... 75
Fig.36 - ACAP: Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization ...................................................... 80
Fig.37 - ACCP: Adjacent Channel CoPolarization ................................................................ 80
Fig.38 - CCDP: CoChannel Dual Polarization ...................................................................... 80
Fig.39 - Frequency arrangement ..................................................................................... 81
Fig.40 - Layout of 2x(1+0) with XPIC............................................................................... 81
Fig.41 - Frequency arrangements .................................................................................... 82
Fig.42 - Layout of 2x(1+0) two channels with hybrid coupler............................................... 82
Fig.44 - Layout of 2x(1+0) with circulator......................................................................... 83
Fig.46 - Layout 4x(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler........................................................ 84
Fig.48 - Layout of 4x(1+0) with circulator......................................................................... 85
Fig.50 - 8x(1+0) with XPIC and multicirculator.................................................................. 87
Fig.51 - Slot numbering into multicirculator ODUs.............................................................. 88
Fig.52 - Synchronization circuit ....................................................................................... 90
Fig.53 - RED curve ........................................................................................................ 96
Fig.54 - Line trunking .................................................................................................... 97
Fig.55 - ALCplus2e block diagram .................................................................................. 110
Fig.56 - ALCplus2e 1+1 layout ...................................................................................... 110
Fig.57 - ALCplus2e 2+0 layout ...................................................................................... 111
Fig.58 - Frequency reuse system ................................................................................... 112
Fig.59 - AS and ASN ODUs ........................................................................................... 116
Fig.60 - Final 1+1 assembly with AS and ASN ODU .......................................................... 117
Fig.61 - ODU block diagram .......................................................................................... 118
Fig.62 - 1+1 hot standby 1 antenna ............................................................................. 119
Fig.63 - 1+1 hot standby 2 antennas ........................................................................... 119
Fig.64 - ATPC operation ............................................................................................... 120
Fig.65 - Grounding connection ...................................................................................... 125
Fig.66 ........................................................................................................................ 126
382
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.67 - Grounding kit positioning .................................................................................. 127

Fig.68 - IDU ALplus2 front panel ................................................................................... 129
Fig.69 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female ................................................................. 130
Fig.70 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female ................................................................. 132
Fig.71 - Antisliding strip ............................................................................................... 146
Fig.72 - 60114 mm pole supporting plate fixing ............................................................. 147
Fig.73 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole ............................................................................ 148
Fig.74 - Mounting position ............................................................................................ 149
Fig.75 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism ........................ 150
Fig.76 - Band-it pole mounting kit ................................................................................. 151
Fig.77 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate ................................................. 152
Fig.78 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 153
Fig.79 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 154
Fig.80 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version.................................................................... 155
Fig.81 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 156
Fig.82 - Kit V32409 ..................................................................................................... 157
Fig.83 - Kit V32415 ..................................................................................................... 158
Fig.84 - Wall supporting plate ....................................................................................... 163
Fig.85 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism .......................................................... 164
Fig.86 - Mounting possible positions............................................................................... 165
Fig.87 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate.................................................. 166
Fig.88 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 167
Fig.89 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 168
Fig.90 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version.................................................................... 169
Fig.91 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 170
Fig.92 - Kit V32409 ..................................................................................................... 171
Fig.93 - Kit V32415 ..................................................................................................... 172
Fig.94 - Centring ring position....................................................................................... 177
Fig.95 - Antislide strip.................................................................................................. 178
Fig.96 - Support mount on pole..................................................................................... 179
Fig.97 - Supporting system position ............................................................................... 180
Fig.98 - Hole E............................................................................................................ 180
Fig.99 - Antenna installation on pole support................................................................... 181
Fig.100 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.................................................................... 181
Fig.101 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence ........................ 182
Fig.102 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 183
Fig.103 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization ............................................. 184
Fig.104 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization .......................................... 184
Fig.105 - Hybrid and polarization disk ............................................................................ 185
Fig.106 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13GHz and 15 GHz)........................................... 186
Fig.107 - Hybrid mount on pole support ......................................................................... 187
MN.00224.E - 011
383
Fig.108 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version........................................................ 188

Fig.109 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments.................................................................. 189
Fig.110 - Antenna aiming block ..................................................................................... 190
Fig.111 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 191
Fig.112 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 196
Fig.114 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 197
Fig.115 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 198
Fig.116 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 199
Fig.117 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 200
Fig.119 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 202
Fig.120 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz).......................................... 203
Fig.121 - Hybrid installation .......................................................................................... 204
Fig.122 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 205
Fig.123 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 210
Fig.125 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 211
Fig.126 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 212
Fig.127 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 213
Fig.128 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 214
Fig.130 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 216
Fig.131 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz).......................................... 217
Fig.132 - Hybrid installation .......................................................................................... 218
Fig.133 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 219
Fig.134 - AS and ASN ODUs.......................................................................................... 227
Fig.135 - ODU ASN with fast lock coupling flange............................................................. 228
Fig.136 - ODU ASN with standard coupling flange ............................................................ 229
Fig.137 - 1+0 ODU installation ...................................................................................... 230
Fig.138 - 1+1 ODU installation ...................................................................................... 231
Fig.139 - Polarization disk ............................................................................................ 232
Fig.140 - 1+0 antenna flange ....................................................................................... 232
Fig.141 - 1+1 antenna flange ....................................................................................... 233
Fig.142 - 1+1 ASN support kit (60-114) code V60100-01 ................................................. 237
Fig.143 - 7GHz multichannel support, code V60361 ......................................................... 238
Fig.144 - ODU with screws and O-ring from code V60049-10 ............................................ 239
Fig.145 - Mounting ODUs onto multichannel support ........................................................ 240
Fig.146 - Mounting multichannel short V60366 onto multichannel support........................... 241
Fig.147 - Mounting flexible waveguides from antenna to multichannel support..................... 242
Fig.148 - 8+0 layout.................................................................................................... 243
Fig.149 - 8+0 layout and measures in mm ..................................................................... 244
384
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.150 - Detected voltage versus RF received signal ....................................................... 249

Fig.151 - Local Lan-1 port to remote Lan-1 port connection .............................................. 252
Fig.152 - Modulation and capacity ................................................................................. 253
Fig.153 - View Current Configuration ............................................................................. 253
Fig.154 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 254
Fig.155 - Lan-1 interface settings .................................................................................. 255
Fig.156 - Vlan settings for LAN-1.................................................................................... 255
Fig.157 - Vlan settings for Port A ................................................................................... 256
Fig.158 - Priority setting for Lan-1 and Port A ................................................................. 256
Fig.159 - 3 ports to 3 ports connections with segregated traffic ......................................... 257
Fig.160 - Modulation and capacity ................................................................................. 257
Fig.163 - Lan-1 interface settings .................................................................................. 259
Fig.164 - Lan1 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 260
Fig.167 - Port A Vlan settings........................................................................................ 261
Fig.168 - Vlan Configuration Table ................................................................................. 262
Fig.169 - 3 ports to3 ports connections with segregated Tagged and Untagged traffic ........... 262
Fig.170 -Modulation and Capacity .................................................................................. 263
Fig.176 - Port A Vlan settings........................................................................................ 266
Fig.177 - Vlan Configuration Table ................................................................................. 266
Fig.178 - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Communication setup ............................................ 268
Fig.179 - IP Ethernet ................................................................................................... 269
Fig.180 - LCT PPP ........................................................................................................ 269
Fig.181 - PPP Radio ..................................................................................................... 270
Fig.182 - Store Routing Table ....................................................................................... 271
Fig.183 - Stored Routing Table...................................................................................... 272
Fig.184 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 273
Fig.185 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard - Actual Configuration ..................................... 274
Fig.186 - Add new station............................................................................................. 275
Fig.187 - Add New Network Element .............................................................................. 276
Fig.190 - ALCplus2 node connections ............................................................................. 280
Fig.191 - Nodal ALCplus2 Manager ................................................................................ 281
Fig.192 - Drag and drop E1 stream ................................................................................ 283
MN.00224.E - 011
385
Fig.193 - VC auto loop ................................................................................................. 284

Fig.194 - Pass-through cross-connection ........................................................................ 285
Fig.195 - Drag and drop E1 stream ................................................................................ 286
Fig.196 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 287
Fig.208 - Node composition .......................................................................................... 299
Fig.209 - Node composition .......................................................................................... 300
Fig.210 - Current alarms .............................................................................................. 302
Fig.211 - STP/Trunking tab (Trunk active) (Port A contextual area) .................................... 304
Fig.212 - Trunking tab (Trunk active)............................................................................. 306
Fig.213 - OAM-FM Domain contextual area ..................................................................... 308
Fig.214 - OAM-FM MA/MEP contextual area ..................................................................... 309
Fig.215 - Vlan status and commands ............................................................................. 309
Fig.216 - ELP Enabling Protection .................................................................................. 311
Fig.217 - Inserting allowed IP address............................................................................ 312
Fig.218 - List of allowed IP address................................................................................ 313
Fig.219 - Sync transmitted from local to remote radio ...................................................... 314
Fig.220 ...................................................................................................................... 316
Fig.221 ...................................................................................................................... 316
Fig.222 ...................................................................................................................... 317
Fig.223 ...................................................................................................................... 317
Fig.224 ...................................................................................................................... 318
Fig.225 ...................................................................................................................... 318
Fig.226 ...................................................................................................................... 319
Fig.227 - E1 retiming ................................................................................................... 319
Fig.228 ...................................................................................................................... 320
Fig.229 ...................................................................................................................... 329
Fig.230 ...................................................................................................................... 330
Fig.231 ...................................................................................................................... 331
Fig.232 ...................................................................................................................... 331
Fig.233 ...................................................................................................................... 331
Fig.234 ...................................................................................................................... 331
Fig.235 ...................................................................................................................... 332
386
MN.00224.E - 011
Fig.236 ...................................................................................................................... 334

Fig.237 ...................................................................................................................... 335
Fig.238 - Loop ............................................................................................................ 351
Fig.239 - Termination points for the Performance Monitoring ............................................. 351
Fig.240 - IDU GAI0165 ................................................................................................ 354
Fig.241 - IDU GAI0166 ................................................................................................ 354
Fig.242 - IDU P/N........................................................................................................ 355
Fig.243 - ALCplus2 1+0 ............................................................................................... 356
Fig.244 - ALCplus2 1+1 ............................................................................................... 356
Fig.245 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1.................................................................................. 357
Fig.246 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1.................................................................................. 357
Fig.247 - ALCplus2 1+0 32E1 ....................................................................................... 357
Fig.248 - ALCplus2 1+1 32E1 ....................................................................................... 357
Fig.249 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal ................................................................................. 357
Fig.250 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal ................................................................................. 357
Fig.251 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 ............................................................................... 360
Fig.252 - ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 ................................................................... 360
Fig.253 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL......................................................... 360
Fig.254 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 ........................................................................ 360
Fig.255 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1........................................................... 360
Fig.256 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL.................................................. 360
Fig.257 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 ............................................................................... 360
Fig.258 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL ................................................. 380
MN.00224.E - 011
387
388
MN.00224.E - 011
43
LIST OF TABLES
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................13

Tab.2 - ALCplus2e IDU configurations ...............................................................................23
Tab.3 - ALCplus2e IDU configurations (updated hardware)...................................................24
Tab.4 - Optical interface characteristics .............................................................................33
Tab.5 - Ethernet optical interfaces characteristics, SPF and LLC connectors ............................33
Tab.6 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
(Ethernet only) ...............................................................................................................34
Tab.7 - Estimated Ethernet throughput ............................................................................35
Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e (Ethernet only) ....35
Tab.9 - Rx Alarm Priority .................................................................................................39
Tab.10 - Maximum outage due to the Tx switching .............................................................39
Tab.11 - Tx Alarm Priority ...............................................................................................39
Tab.12 - IMAX and consumption ........................................................................................40
Tab.13 - E1 priority ........................................................................................................52
Tab.14 ..........................................................................................................................89
Tab.15 - Characteristics of the cables.............................................................................. 123
Tab.16 - 10/100/1000BaseT, RJ45 ................................................................................. 129
Tab.17 - 8xE1, 50 pin SCSI female 75 Ohm .................................................................... 130
Tab.18 - 8xE1, 50 pin SCSI female 120 Ohm) .................................................................. 131
Tab.19 - RS232 SUB-D 9 pin male ................................................................................. 132
Tab.20 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT) ....................................................................... 133
Tab.21 - MNGT/1 and MNGT/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection
(RJ45) .........................................................................................................................133
Tab.22 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45) ....................... 133
Tab.23 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out (RJ45).......................................................... 134
Tab.24 - Trib A, B connector .......................................................................................... 135
Tab.25 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT ....................................................................... 136
Tab.26 - Trib A, B connector .......................................................................................... 138
Tab.27 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT ....................................................................... 139
Tab.28 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 143
Tab.30 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 145
MN.00224.E - 011
389

Tab.40 - Common alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e .................................................. 342
Tab.41 - ETH LAN alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ................................................... 343
Tab.42 - LIM alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e.......................................................... 343
Tab.43 - Node alarms - ALCplus2/ALCplus2e.................................................................... 344
Tab.44 - Radio alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ......................................................... 345
Tab.45 - Radio alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ......................................................... 345
Tab.46 - RT alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ............................................................. 346
Tab.47 - SETS alarms - ALplus/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ......................................................... 346
Tab.48 - SNTP alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ....................................................... 346
Tab.49 - STM1 alarms - ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e ....................................................... 347
Tab.50 - IDU part number .............................................................................................. 354
Tab.51 - Part number and description ............................................................................. 361
Tab.52 - ODU ASN part number and description ............................................................... 377
Tab.53 - ODU ASN HP part number and description .......................................................... 380
390
MN.00224.E - 011
44
ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the company manufacturing the product.
SIAE helpdesk mail is: help@siaemic.it
MN.00224.E - 011
391
392
MN.00224.E - 011

Mn00224e v11 IDU ALP2 ALCP2 ALCP2e PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mn00224e v11 IDU ALP2 ALCP2 ALCP2e PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ALS

ALplus2, ALCplus2, ALCplus2e

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ..............................................................................11

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ....................................................................12

SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................13

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &

INTERNAL BATTERY ..........................................................................................15

PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................16

PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................16

AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................16

STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................16

ABBREVIATION LIST .........................................................................................19

SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................21

SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ....................................................................................21

ALPLUS2 MODULAR IDU ....................................................................................21

ALCPLUS2 COMPACT IDU...................................................................................22

ALCPLUS2E COMPACT IDU .................................................................................23

MNGT/1 and MNGT/2 ................................................................27

LCT USB .................................................................................27

5.8.3 Protocols ...............................................................................................27

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................31

IDU CHARACTERISTICS .....................................................................................31

2 Mbit/s (E1 G.703) ..................................................................31

STM1 electrical ........................................................................32

Ethernet interface ....................................................................33

6.1.2 Alarm interface.......................................................................................36

E1 (Connector name is 2 Mbit/s wayside) ....................................37

64 kbit/s contradirectional .........................................................37

9600 bit/s synch/asynch ...........................................................38

9600 or 2x4800 bit/s synch/asynch ............................................38

6.1.4 Modulation and channel bandwidth ............................................................38

ODU CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................................41

ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................44

Web Lct ..................................................................................45

Controller LEDs ........................................................................45

SD memory card management ...................................................46

7.1.3 LIM .......................................................................................................46

Switch for Ethernet ports...........................................................47

STM-1 synchronisation ..............................................................48

Adaptive code modulation .........................................................50

Power supply ...........................................................................52

ALCplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................57

SD MEMORY CARD MANAGEMENT .......................................................................58

ALC BLOCK DIAGRAMS......................................................................................59

ALCPLUS2 NODE ..............................................................................................59

LAG - LINK AGGREGATION ................................................................................61

LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP ...................................................64

ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................65

ALCPLUS2 FIRMWARE UPDATES .........................................................................68

ALCplus2E IDU DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................76

ALCPLUS2E BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................................76

XPIC 1+1 CONFIGURATION................................................................................78

2X(1+0) EST WEST CONFIGURATION..................................................................79

N+0 CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................80

SWITCH FOR ETHERNET PORTS ..........................................................................92

LAG - LINK AGGREGATION ................................................................................97

LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP ...................................................99

ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................99

ALCPLUS2E FIRMWARE UPDATES...................................................................... 101

FIRMWARE UPDATES FOR ALCPLUS2E 1+1 XPIC ................................................. 108

10 ODU DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................113